JP6550805B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided, and various effect images are displayed on the display device.

JP2013-13528A

  In this type of pachinko machine, it is possible to display various effect images, but since there is only one place where the effect image is displayed, providing a surprising game using the effect image There is a problem that the player can get bored.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can mitigate the bored in Yu technique's.

Gaming machine of the present invention in order to achieve the object, obtains a first display means having a first display area, based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information, by the acquisition unit A storage means capable of storing a plurality of the information, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and a determination result by the determination means A first effect executing means capable of executing the first effect on the first display means, and a second display means having a second display area different from the first display area, and the storage Pre-discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the information before the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means stored in the means, and the second display as an effect for showing the pre-discrimination result by the prior discrimination means The second effect on the means And row second possible effect execution means, from a plurality of said information stored in said storage means includes a data selecting means for selecting an arbitrary information, and the second display means, in the storage means The second effect corresponding to each of the plurality of stored information can be displayed, and the gaming machine can display the first display based on a predetermined condition being satisfied. The first effect displayed on the means is moved and displayed on the second display means, and the second effect corresponding to the information selected by the information selection means displayed on the second display means Is moved to the first display means and can be displayed .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a first display unit having a first display area, based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information, the information obtained by the obtaining means A plurality of storage means capable of being stored, a determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and an effect for indicating a determination result by the determination means First display executing means capable of executing a first effect on one display means, second display means having a second display area different from the first display area, and stored in the storage means A pre-discriminating unit for performing discrimination based on the information before the discrimination is performed by the discriminating unit, and a second effect on the second display unit as an effect for indicating the pre-discrimination result by the prior discriminating unit. The second production that can be performed And line unit, a plurality of said information stored in said storage means includes a data selecting means for selecting an arbitrary information, and the second display means, the plurality stored in said storage means The second effect corresponding to each of the information can be displayed, and the gaming machine is displayed on the first display means based on a predetermined condition being satisfied. The first effect is moved to the second display means for display, and the second effect corresponding to the information selected by the information selection means displayed on the second display means is displayed on the first display means. since the display is moved and has a means capable, there is an effect that it is possible to relax the tired of Yu technique's.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a unit storage member. It is a front view of a unit storage member. It is a front perspective view of the protrusion operation | movement unit in the state which has arrange | positioned the base side displacement member and the relative displacement member in the retracted position. (A) is a disassembled front perspective view of a protrusion operation unit, (b) is a rear perspective view of a connection rod. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the transmission means in front view typically. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the transmission means in front view typically. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a rear perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a protrusion operation unit. (A) is a side view of the protrusion operation unit in the arrow XVIIa direction view of FIG. 16, (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the protrusion operation unit in the portion XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a front view of a to-be-driven member and a following member, (b) is a side view of a to-be-driven member and a following member in the arrow XXIIb direction view of Fig.22 (a). (A) is a front view of a driven member, (b) is a back surface part of a driven member. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIV in FIG. (A) is a front view of a driven member, (b) is a back surface part of a driven member. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove FIG. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove FIG. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove FIG. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove FIG. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove FIG. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove FIG. It is a front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a rotation operation unit. (A) is a rear view of a main-body part, (b) is a partial enlarged rear view of a main-body part which expands and shows the XXXVII part of Fig.37 (a). It is a front view of a rotation operation unit. FIG. 38 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit along line XXXIXa-XXXIXa in FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. 38 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600 along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 38 (b). . (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display aspect of the normal holding | maintenance effect. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of 8 productions. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode in the fluctuation pattern of a composite display mode. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode in the fluctuation pattern of a composite display mode. It is a timing chart which showed the period setting after power-on of a pachinko machine. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode in a time production period. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a display mode in a time effect period, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a display mode in a time effect extension period. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode at the time of the end of a time production period. It is the schematic diagram which showed the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the contents of ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the contents of RAM in the main control device is there. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a special hit random number table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a special hit type selection table, and (c) is a normal hit random number table It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the contents of ROM of the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the contents of RAM of the audio lamp control device FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the button effect selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the extended production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the button production execution process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the background image setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the notice command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the effect command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which compared the size of the pixel of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment, (b) shows the display size comparison with the main liquid crystal and sub liquid crystal of pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed the internal structure of the distribution unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the production | presentation control regarding the reserved symbol production in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen in a 4th embodiment, and (b) is a figure which illustrated an actual display screen in a 4th embodiment. is there. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the normal holding effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display aspect of eight production in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a display mode of eight effects in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a display mode of additional winning effects in the fourth embodiment FIG. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the special continuation presentation in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the flow regarding the synthetic | combination display effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the synthetic | combination display effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the composite display effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the composite display effect in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the composite display effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the flow regarding the time effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the time effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the time effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the time effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the fourth embodiment FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the effect time selection table in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the effect selected by the effect time selection table in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the time table of time typically. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation execution decision processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control device in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the start winning process 2 which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production | presentation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the identification number input process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed eight piece reservation production processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the button effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flow chart which shows winning a prize command reception processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the button presentation selection processing 2 which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the setting processing during 8 productions which are executed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production time setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the extension production setting processing 2 which is executed by MPU in the sound lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding command process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production command process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed the internal structure of the distribution unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart explaining the flow regarding the special symbol variation effect performed using the main screen and sub screen in a 5th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the special symbol fluctuation effect in 5th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the special symbol fluctuation effect in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the prior pseudo fluctuation setting processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In addition, with the pachinko machine where the ball is directly lent out to the upper tray 17 from the ball lending device etc without passing through the card unit, so-called cash machine, the ball operation unit 40 is unnecessary, but in this case, the ball operation unit 40 A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by tapping screw etc. from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state It is a state of. The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640 a is released more than in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is opened at a time and once when the electric symbol 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86. Further, when a projecting operation unit 400 or a composite operation unit 500, which will be described later, is operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 protrudes into the opening of the center frame 86 and can be visually recognized through the opening. It is said. For example, when the projecting operation unit 400 is disposed at the rotational position by the first operation (see FIG. 14A), the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening of the center frame 86, When disposed at the overhanging position by the second operation (see FIG. 15B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

  In addition, the second winning opening 640 during the definite change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the open probability and increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized combination 640a per hit, which increases the hit probability during definite change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. Is configured. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at things.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite variation or time, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the cancellation of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power interruption. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the unit storage member 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. 5 and 6 are front views of the unit storage member 300. In FIG. 5, the state in which each operation unit 400 to 800 is disposed at the retracted position is shown, and in FIG. 6, the projection operation unit 400 and the combined operation unit 500 are stretched. The state of being arranged in the extended position is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, the unit storage member 300 is a front side from the bottom wall plate in a rectangular shape in a front view and an outer wall plate erected from the outer edge of four sides of the bottom wall portion (FIG. The side) is formed in an open box shape. In the bottom plate of the unit storage member 300, an opening 301 having a rectangular shape in a front view is formed at a central portion thereof, whereby the unit storage member 300 is formed in a frame shape having a rectangular shape in a front view. The opening 301 is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (refer to FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the unit storage member 300, the projection operation unit 400, the combined operation unit 500, the rotation operation unit 600, the projection and retraction operation unit 700, and the projection operation unit 800 are respectively stored in the internal space thereof, whereby one operation unit 200 is provided. Configured as

  The protrusion operation unit 400 includes a base side displacement member 440 and a relative displacement member 450, and operates (displacement) between both displacement members 440 and 450 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang position shown in FIG. Let In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the space required for the retracted position is suppressed by forming a state in which the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are overlapped in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 5). On the other hand, at the overhang position shown in FIG. 6, the relative displacement member 450 is slide-displaced with respect to the base side displacement member 440 to enlarge the whole, thereby securing visibility and enhancing the rendering effect. The operation of the protruding operation unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The combined operation unit 500 includes a driven member 550 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) and a driven member 560, and these members 550 and 560 are between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. Operate (displace) with. In this case, the compound operation unit 500 causes the driven member 550 to perform only rotational movement centering on the predetermined position, while the driven member 560 connected to the driven member 550 performs linear motion and the like. By causing the motion combined with the rotational motion to be performed, a change is imparted to the trajectory of the driven member 560 to enhance the effect. The operation of the combined operation unit 500 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The rotary operation unit 600 includes a first rotary body 650 and a second rotary body 660 disposed concentrically, and by rotating both the rotary bodies 650 and 660, it is easy to associate the two rotations with the player. Thus, the effect of rendering the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) is exhibited. The operation of the rotary operation unit 600 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, the projecting operation unit 700 includes a projecting member 710 formed so as to be slidable, and the projecting operation unit 800 includes a projecting member 810 formed so as to be rotatable, and the projecting member 710 and the projecting member 810 are provided. Slide displacement or rotation between a retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and a projected position (not shown) in a state of projecting the front surface (front surface) of the opening 301 (the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2) To move (displace).

  Next, the protruding operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400 in a state where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 8A is an exploded front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400, and FIG. 8B is a rear perspective view of the connecting rod 460.

  7 and 8 show a state in which the projecting operation unit 700 sharing the case body 410 with the projecting operation unit 400 is provided side by side with the projecting operation unit 400. In addition, the pair of projecting operation units 400 are formed symmetrically on the left and right sides of the projecting and retracting operation unit 700 below the opening 301 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). Since the structure is substantially the same, only one (provided on the right side in front view) will be described, and the description on the other (provided on the left side in front view) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the protrusion operation unit 400 has a case body 410 having a framework on its back side, a drive motor 420 disposed on the front side of the case body 410, and its drive motor 420. A plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432 and crank gear 433) for transmitting rotational driving force, a base displacement member 440 rotatably supported by the case body 410, and a slide displacement to the base displacement member 440 Mainly comprising a relative displacement member 450 which is disposed, and a connecting rod 460 which connects between the relative displacement member 450 and the crank gear 433 and which is rotatably supported by the case body 410. Ru.

  The case body 410 is made of a resin material, and a storage recess 411 having an outer shape corresponding to a plurality of gears (each gear 431, 432, 433) is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the case body 410. The rod support shaft 412 is provided on the side of the housing recess 411 (right side in FIG. 8A), and the base support shaft 413 is provided below the housing recess 411 (lower side in FIG. 8A). Each of the support shafts 412 and 413 is made of a brass material, and is disposed in a posture parallel to the rotation shaft of each of the gears 431 to 433.

  In this embodiment, when the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position, as will be described later, the displacement members 440 and 450, the connecting rod 460, the gears 431, 432, and 433, The storage recess 411 is recessed in the front of the case body 410, and the gears 431, 432, and 433 are stored in the storage recess 411, respectively (see FIG. 13). Thus, the protrusion operation unit 400 can be reduced in size in the front-rear direction.

  A pinion gear 431 is attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 420, and an intermediate gear 432 is engaged with the pinion gear 431, and a crank gear 433 is engaged with the intermediate gear 432. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 420 is rotationally driven and the pinion gear 431 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the crank gear 433 via the intermediate gear 432, and the crank gear 433 is rotated.

  The intermediate gear 432 and the crank gear 433 are pivotally supported on the case body 410. Each of the gears 431 to 433 is formed as a spur gear whose teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the rotation axis. In this case, the crank gear 433 is formed with a radial decoration on the front surface (axial end surface), and the diameter of the front portion (axial end surface) is larger than the tooth tip circle engraved on the outer peripheral surface. It is made large so that the teeth can be shielded from the player in front view.

  On the front surface (axial end surface) of the crank gear 433, a crank pin 433 a is protrudingly provided at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft of the crank gear 433. The crank pin 433 a is a portion connected to the connecting rod 460 and is formed as a cylindrical body parallel to the rotation axis of the crank gear 433 and is slidably inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460. (See FIGS. 9 and 10). Thus, when the crank gear 433 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the connecting rod 460 via the crank pin 433a.

  The base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are effect members for producing effects by being displaced from the retracted position to the overhang position (see FIGS. 5 and 6). A hole 442 is rotatably supported by the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and a relative displacement member 450 is slidably disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member 440.

  Here, the relative displacement member 450 is formed with a decorative portion 454 on the front side thereof. The decoration part 454 is a part for decorating the front side of the relative displacement member 450, and from the base end side (the rotation center side when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated, the lower side of FIG. 7 and FIG. 8) The whole is formed into a tapered shape in front view that becomes narrower toward the distal end side (the rotational distal end side when the proximal end displacement member 440 is rotated, the upper side in FIGS. 7 and 8), and the front surface of the decorative portion 454. The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are arranged along the longitudinal direction.

  The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b and the third portion 454c of the decorative portion 454 are formed to have a size corresponding to the tapered shape of the entire decorative portion 454. In other words, the second portion 454b positioned in the middle of the first portion 454a positioned on the distal end side and the third portion 454c positioned on the proximal end side of the second portion 454b positioned in the middle have six large outer shapes, respectively. It is formed in a square shape.

  In this case, the first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are arranged to have different positions in the front-rear direction (positions in the vertical direction in FIG. 5). Specifically, the second portion 454b positioned in the middle of the first portion 454a positioned on the distal end side and the third portion 454c positioned on the proximal end side of the second portion 454b positioned in the middle are respectively in front. It is arranged on the (front) side (the front side in FIG. 5).

  Accordingly, the decorative portion 454 of the relative displacement member 450 (that is, the front surface of the relative displacement member 450) is moved from the proximal end side (the rotation center side of the proximal displacement member 440, the lower side of FIGS. 7 and 8) to the distal end side ( The base end displacement member 440 is inclined downwardly in a stepped manner (three steps in the present embodiment) in a direction approaching the case body 410 as it goes toward the rotational distal end side of FIG. 7 and FIG.

  Thus, as will be described later, when the base-side displacement member 440 is rotated (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the decoration member 480 is prevented from contacting the decoration member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17). When both the displacement members 440 and 450 pass through the back side of the lens, the effect of the production is improved and the relative displacement member 450 is projected (see FIG. 15). ) To improve the force.

  The detailed configuration of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described later (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  The connecting rod 460 is a long plate-shaped member for transmitting the rotation of the crank gear 433 to the relative displacement member 450, and includes a shaft support hole 461 formed as a circular hole at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a shaft thereof. A connection hole 462 formed as a long hole extending along the longitudinal direction on the other end side in the longitudinal direction opposite to the support hole 461, and between the shaft support hole 461 and the connection hole 462 in the longitudinal direction. And a rod groove 463 that is recessed on the back surface side as a recessed groove extending along.

  The connecting rod 460 is attached to the case body 410 in a state where the rod support shaft 412 of the case body 410 is inserted into the shaft support hole 461 and the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463. Further, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460 (see FIGS. 11 and 12). Thereby, as will be described later, the connecting rod 460 is rotated about the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation with the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), and with the rotation of the connecting rod 460, The base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are rotated (first operation) and slide displaced (second operation) (see FIG. 12), and operated (displaced) between the retracted position and the extended position.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the drive motor 420, the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are respectively disposed on the front (one surface) side of the case body 410. Protruding motion compared to the case where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed on the front (one surface) side and the drive motor 420 is disposed on the back (other surface) side with the case body 410 interposed therebetween. The size of the unit 400 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position with the drive motor 420 positioned on the extension of the longitudinal direction thereof (see FIG. 13A), these drive motor 420, the base side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 can be linearly arranged. Therefore, the space required as a retracted position on the front side of the case body 410 can be efficiently suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is cranked together with a plurality of gears (each gear 431 to 433) and the crank gear 433. The connecting rod 460 constituting the mechanism is connected to the connecting rod 460 (the connection hole 462 and the rod groove 463), the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433, and the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450, as will be described later. Are disposed in a region between the rod support shaft 412 and the base support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and the transmission means (the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460) and the support shafts 411 and 412 are arranged. Set the placement.

  Thereby, in a state where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position, the transmission means is disposed in a region overlapping the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 in front view. can do. That is, the dead space formed on the back side of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 disposed at the retracted position can be effectively utilized as the space for disposing the transmission means. As a result, in addition to the effects of the positional relationship between the drive motor 420 and the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 described above, it is possible to synergistically achieve miniaturization of the outer shape in the front and rear direction of the projection operation unit 400 and front view. it can.

  Next, the operation of the transmission means (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432, crank gear 433, and connecting rod 460) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10 are schematic front views schematically showing the transmission means in the front view. FIG. 9A shows a state where the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position in FIG. 9B. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the intermediate rotational position, and FIG. 10 shows a state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the second rotational position.

  9 and 10, the shapes of the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460 are schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate the understanding. 9 and 10, the positions of the center lines of the connecting rod 460 when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotation position, the intermediate rotation position, and the second rotation position are two positions P1, Pm, and P2. It is schematically illustrated using a dotted line.

  Moreover, in description of FIG.9 and FIG.10, FIG. 13-FIG. 15 is referred suitably. 9A corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, and FIG. 9B corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B. FIG. 10 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 9A, in a state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P1, the base side displacement member 440 is at the retracted position and the relative displacement member 450 is at the retracted position. It arrange | positions in a reference (standard) position, respectively (refer FIG. 12 (a) and FIG. 13). In this state, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is located at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460.

  Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotation position, the crank gear 433 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 9A (that is, the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are stretched). Rotation in the direction of retracting from the extended position to the retracted position) can be regulated by bringing the crank pin 433a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Therefore, when arranging the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from the extended position to the retracted position, mechanical failure may occur even if the control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, for example. The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the retracted position by a simple mechanism (a stopper mechanism that regulates the crankpin 433a by the rod groove 463), and both the displacement members 440, 450 and the connecting rod 460 are the other. It is possible to avoid colliding with the members in advance.

  When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9A from the state shown in FIG. 9A, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 lowers the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 at the lower end (rod The connection rod 460 is slid toward the end opposite to the support shaft 412, and the connection rod 460 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. When the crank gear 433 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate rotation position as shown in FIG. 9B, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position Pm. In this state, the base displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed at the reference position (see FIGS. 12B and 14).

  When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9A from the state shown in FIG. 9B, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 lowers the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 at the lower end (rod After sliding toward the support shaft 412 (the end opposite to the support shaft 412), it is slid toward the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side), and the connecting rod 460 has the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation in FIG. a) It is rotated clockwise (clockwise). Thus, when the crank gear 433 reaches the second rotational position as shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position P2. In this state, the base-side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position, and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed at the overhanging position (see FIGS. 12C and 15).

  Even when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is connected to the connecting rod as in the case where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position shown in FIG. It is located at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of 460.

  Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position, the crank gear 433 rotates clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 10 (that is, the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are extended from the retracted position). The rotation in the direction of overhanging to the position can be restricted by bringing the crank pin 433 a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Therefore, when arranging the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from the retracted position to the extended position, mechanical failure may occur even if the control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, for example. The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the overhanging position by a special mechanism (a stopper mechanism that regulates the crank pin 433a by the rod groove 463), and the displacement members 440 and 450 and the connecting rod 460 are moved. Collision with other members can be avoided in advance.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, the configuration and operation of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the base side displacement member 440 has a main body 441 formed in a long plate shape, an axial support hole 442 opened as a circular hole on the back of the main body 411, and a main body 441. The first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444 formed as long holes extending along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) are mainly provided.

  The shaft support hole 442 is a hole through which the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410 is inserted, and by this insertion, the base side displacement member 440 can rotate to the case body 410 around the base side support shaft 413 as a rotation center. Supported by That is, as will be described later, the base side displacement member 440 has a retracted position (see FIGS. 12A and 13) and a rotational position (see FIGS. 12B, 12C, 14 and 15). It is rotatably supported between.

  In this case, the shaft support hole 442 is formed at a position lower than the longitudinal center of the main body 441 and biased to one side (the overhanging position side) of the lateral center of the main body 441. As a result, the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can reduce the rotation angle required for the base side displacement member 440 so that the base side displacement member 440 protrudes from the outer edge of the case body 410 by a predetermined amount (predetermined area). The time required to rotate the displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotational position can be shortened, and as a result, the effect of the displacement of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enhanced.

  The relative displacement member 450 includes a main body portion 451 formed in a long plate shape, a connection pin 452 protruding from the back surface of the main body portion, and a predetermined interval along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 451 (the vertical direction in FIG. 11). A pair of slide pins 453 arranged with a space therebetween, and a decorative portion 454 disposed on the front surface of the main body portion 451 are mainly provided.

  The connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are cylindrical portions which are slidably inserted in the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444 of the base side displacement member 440, respectively. Are slidably displaceable relative to the base displacement member 440 in the longitudinal direction. That is, as described later, the relative displacement member 450 is at the reference position (see FIGS. 12A, 12B, 13 and 14) and the overhanging position (see FIGS. 12C and 15). The base-side displacement member 440 is slidably displaceable between the two.

  In this case, the connection pin 452 is slidably inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 at the distal end side protruding from the first slide hole 443 of the base side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 is thereby inserted. It is connected to a crank gear 433 (see FIG. 8) via a connecting rod 460.

  Thus, as will be described later, by rotating the crank gear 433, the connecting rod 460 is rotated about the rod support shaft 412 (see FIG. 9), so that the base side relative to the base side support shaft 413 is the center of rotation. The rotation (first operation) of the displacement member 450 can be executed, and the slide displacement (second operation) of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 can be executed (see FIG. 12).

  Here, the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are disposed at different positions (spaced apart) along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, since the location where the relative displacement member 450 is connected to the base side displacement member 440 can be dispersed in the longitudinal direction, the front and rear direction of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base side displacement member 440 (the direction of approaching and separating from the case body 410). ) Can be suppressed and the slide displacement can be stabilized.

  Further, the connection pin 452 is arranged on the distal end side in the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member 450 (upper side in FIG. 11) than the slide pin 453. Thereby, the location where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be brought closer to the distal end side in the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member 450. In other words, the location where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be moved away from the shaft support hole 442 of the base side displacement member 440 to the distal end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 11). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress that the tip side of the relative displacement member 450 swings in the front-rear direction (the direction in which it approaches and separates from the case body 410).

  That is, only the longitudinal direction base side (the shaft support hole 442) of the base side displacement member 440 is supported by the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the base side displacement member 440. Because of the structure, the distal ends in the longitudinal direction of both displacement members 440 and 450 are free ends, and the distal ends are likely to swing in the front-rear direction during the first operation. This shaking may cause the distal end to come in contact with the decorative member 480. Therefore, a structure in which the position supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 is the front end side in the longitudinal direction is effective.

  A collar C is rotatably fitted on the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453. Since the collar C is interposed between the outer peripheral surfaces of the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444, the collar C is provided along the slide holes 443 and 444. The pins 452 and 453 can slide smoothly. Further, the collar C (specifically, the large-diameter flange portion of the collar C) is interposed between the main body 441 of the base side displacement member 440 and the main body 451 of the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting rod 460. The opposing distances between the base displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450, and the connecting rod 460 can be kept constant.

  The connection pin 452 is secured to the end surface on the tip side by a disk-like disk S with screws, so that the connection pin 452 is prevented from coming off from the connecting rod 460, and the slide pin 453 is an end surface on the tip side. A long flat slide guide 470 is fastened and fixed by a screw to prevent the base side displacement member 440 from coming off.

  FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450. FIG. 12A corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 9A and 13 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is disposed at the position P1). FIG. 12B corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 9B and FIG. 14 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the intermediate rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is disposed at the position Pm). . 12C corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 10 and 15 (ie, the state in which the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is disposed at the position P2).

  As shown in FIG. 12 (a), when the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position P1 (see FIGS. 9 (a) and 13), rotation with the base side support shaft 413 of the base side displacement member 440 as the rotation center The reference position where the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 is the position where the amount of protrusion from the base side displacement member 440 is the minimum is the retracted position where the position is closest to the rod support shaft 412. It is arranged at each position. In this state, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is positioned at the upper end (end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460.

  From the state shown in FIG. 12A, the connecting rod 460 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12A around the rod support shaft 412 as the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9A) rotates. When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the lower end (end opposite to the rod support shaft 412) of the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460, and the relative displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are relative to each other. The base displacement member 440 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 12A together with the relative displacement member 450 with the base support shaft 413 as a rotation center (first operation). When the connecting rod 460 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate position Pm (see FIGS. 9B and 14) as shown in FIG. 12B, the rotational position of the base side displacement member 440 is the rod support shaft 412. Are disposed at the rotational position which is the position farthest from.

  In this case, the slide position of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440 can be maintained at the reference position. That is, when the connecting rod 460 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12A around the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation, the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 are moved downward. Since the sliding direction is a direction substantially along the sliding displacement direction of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450 is moved relative to the base displacement member 440. No force component is generated in the sliding displacement direction. Therefore, while maintaining the slide position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 (while restricting the occurrence of slide displacement from the reference position), the base side displacement member 440 whose center of rotation is the base side support shaft 413. Only rotation can be generated.

  As a result, both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be rotated about the base support shaft 413 in a state in which the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base side displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum. The separation distance between the rotation tip of the relative displacement member 450 and the drive motor 420 (see FIG. 7) and the decorative member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) can be reduced. As a result, the projection operation unit 400 can be miniaturized, and the degree of freedom in design when defining the shape of the decorative member 480 can be increased.

  From the state shown in FIG. 12 (b), the connecting rod 460 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with the rod support shaft 412 as the rotation center by the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9 (b)). When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the upper end (end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 and then the lower end (opposite to the rod support shaft 412). And the relative displacement member 450 is slid and displaced relative to the base side displacement member 440 in the longitudinal direction (first and second slide holes 443 and 444). (2nd operation). Thus, as shown in FIG. 12C, when the connecting rod 460 reaches the second position P2 (see FIGS. 10 and 15), the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 is at the base. It is disposed at the overhanging position where the amount of overhang from the side displacement member 440 is maximum.

  In this case, the rotational position of the base-side displacement member 440 can be maintained at the rotational position that is the most distant from the rod support shaft 412. That is, the rotation of the connecting rod 460 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12B about the rod support shaft 412 as the rotation center moves the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 along the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460. The relative displacement member 450 is slid relative to the base side displacement member 440 because the direction of this slide is substantially perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base side displacement member 440. Only the force component in the direction of displacement is generated, and the force component in the direction of rotating the base side displacement member 440 around the base side support shaft 413 is not generated. Therefore, only the slide displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 can be generated while restricting the rotation of the base side displacement member 440 around the base side support shaft 413 as the rotation center.

  Thereby, the base displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position in a state where the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base side displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum (the state where the relative displacement member 450 is maintained at the reference position). Rotation to a position (first operation), and after the first operation is completed, the relative displacement member is in a state where the rotation of the base displacement member 440 is restricted (the base displacement member 440 is maintained at the rotation position). A slide displacement (second operation) for extending 450 along the longitudinal direction with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 can be performed. In other words, since the rotation operation and the slide operation can be separated and each can be performed in two stages as separate operations, different operations can be performed in the game compared to the case where the rotation operation and the slide operation are performed simultaneously. Can be clearly recognized, and the effect of rendering by displacing the displacement members 440 and 450 can be enhanced.

  The operation of the projecting operation unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15.

  13 to 15 are front views of the protruding operation unit 400. FIG. As described above, FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 12 (a), and FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and FIG. 12 (b), and FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 10 and 12 (c). FIGS. 13B, 14B, and 15B show a state in which the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, according to the protrusion operation unit 400, as described above, the base side displacement member 440 is in the retracted position shown in FIG. 13 (a) and in FIGS. 14 (a) and 15 (a). And a relative displacement member 450 disposed on the base side displacement member 440, as shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 14 (a). A first operation that is formed so as to be slidable between the overhanging position shown in FIG. 15A and rotates the base side displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotation position, and the relative displacement member 450 is base side displaced. The second operation of displacing the member 440 between the reference position and the overhang position can be performed.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 14A, the base side displacement member 440 in the retracted position is disposed to the rotational position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 in the reference position is secondly moved. As shown in FIG. 15A, the relative displacement member 450 can be made to project outward from the base side displacement member 440 by sliding displacement (elongation) to the overhanging position by operation. Therefore, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enlarged as a whole, both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player, and the effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 (in the present embodiment, the decorative portion) is arranged by arranging the base side displacement member 440 to the rotational position by the first operation. The entire first portion 454a of 454 can be made visible to the player through the opening of the center frame 86, and as shown in FIG. 15A, the relative displacement member 450 is extended by the second operation. By arranging the relative displacement member 450, the player can visually recognize substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 (in the present embodiment, the entire third portion 454a of the striking portion 454) through the opening of the center frame 86.

  That is, the relative displacement member 450 that has been retracted to the retracted position and cannot be visually recognized from the opening of the center frame 86 is first caused to appear from the side to the opening of the center frame 86 by a rotational motion (first operation). In addition, the player can visually recognize only a part of the relative displacement member 450, and is then projected toward the center of the opening of the center frame 86 by a linear motion (second motion). An effect of allowing the player to visually recognize the whole can be performed. Therefore, the visible area of the relative displacement member 450 can be enlarged by the movement form (linear movement) different from the movement form (rotational movement) at the time of appearance, and the visual recognition area by the unexpectedness by the change of the movement form and the linear movement It is possible to make the player feel a sense of speed due to the enlargement and a sense of unity of the combined actions that are performed continuously while being combined. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that cannot be achieved with a configuration in which the relative displacement member 450 is projected and retracted with respect to the opening of the center frame 86 only by linear motion (a configuration in which the retraction position and the overhang position are reciprocated).

  On the other hand, when the base-side displacement member at the rotational position is disposed at the retracted position shown in FIG. 13A by the first operation, as shown in FIGS. By causing the relative displacement member 450 to slide and displace (shorten) to the reference position by the second operation, it is possible to suppress the outward extension of the relative displacement member 450 from the base-side displacement member 440. Therefore, since both displacement members 440 and 450 can be reduced as a whole, the space required to accommodate both displacement members 440 and 450 in the retracted position can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other parts and devices.

  In this case, as described above, the relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the base side displacement member 440 in a slidable state, and the second operation is performed as shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 15 (a). Since the relative displacement member 440 is slidably displaced between the reference position and the overhang position with respect to the base side displacement member 450, for example, the second operation moves the relative displacement member 440 with respect to the base side displacement member 450. As compared with the case of the rotation mode, the space necessary for displacing the relative displacement member 440 from the reference position to the overhang position can be reduced, and in order to dispose other parts and devices accordingly Space can be secured. In addition, since the aspect (slide displacement) of the displacement of the relative displacement member 450 by the second operation can be made different from the aspect (rotation) of the displacement of the base side displacement member 450 by the first operation, It is possible to enhance the rendering effect by continuously performing one operation and the second operation.

  Particularly, in the second operation, the direction of the slide displacement is a direction along the longitudinal direction of the both displacement members 440 and 450. That is, the relative displacement member 450 is arranged in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member 440, and is slid and displaced in the direction along the longitudinal direction of each of the displacement members 440, 450 can be efficiently extended and shortened as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15A, in the state where the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotation position, the displacement member 440 is enlarged as a whole by sliding displacement (extension) of the relative displacement member 450. , 450 can be made sufficiently visible to the player, and the effects can be fully exhibited. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13A, in a state in which the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position, both displacement members 440 can be reduced by reducing the slide displacement (shortening) of the relative displacement member 450 as a whole. , 450 can be reduced, and a space for arranging other parts and devices can be secured.

  Further, according to the protrusion operation unit 400, as described above, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive motor 420 to the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 14 (b). 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (b), it is composed of a plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432 and crank gear 433) and a connecting rod 460, and together with the crank gear 433, a connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 constituting the crank mechanism. Is connected to the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 in a region between the rod support shaft 412, which is the rotation center of the connection rod 460, and the base support shaft 413, which is the rotation center of the base displacement member 440. Therefore, by rotating the crank gear 433, the first operation and the second operation by the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are performed. , It can be executed in the order. That is, since two different operations, the first operation and the second operation, can be performed by only one drive motor 420, the component cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In this case, as the transmission means, a structure in which a gear is provided on the rod support shaft 412 side of the connecting rod 460 and the teeth of the crank gear 433 are meshed with the gear to rotate the connecting rod 460 can be considered. Then, since the crank gear 433 and the connecting rod 460 are provided side by side in a plane and an overlap margin is not formed in a front view, a space necessary for the arrangement increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460, as shown in FIGS. 13 (a), 14 (b) and 15 (b). As described above, the crank gear 433 and the connection link 460 can be arranged in a state where the overlap margin is always present in a front view, and the space necessary for the arrangement of the crank gear 433 and the connection link 460 can be suppressed by the overlap.

  Next, the relationship between the relative displacement member 450 and the decorative member 470 when the proximal displacement member 440 is rotated (first operation) will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.

  FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the protrusion operation unit 400. As shown in FIG. 17A is a side view of the protruding operation unit 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17B is a partially enlarged side view of the protruding operation unit 400 in the portion XVIIb in FIG. It is. 16 and 17 show a state where the decorative member 480 is attached to the protruding operation unit 400. However, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the decoration member 480 necessary for describing the relationship with the relative displacement member 400 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the projecting operation unit 400 is provided with a decorative member 480 on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 16) (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The decorative member 480 is a decorative resin member, and is formed of a light transmitting resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize other members positioned on the back side of the decorative member 480 through the decorative member 480.

  In the present embodiment, the decoration member 480 is formed with a part thereof projecting downward (FIG. 17B, the lower side), whereby as shown in FIG. 17B, the base side displacement member in a front view Between the relative displacement member 450 and the relative displacement member 450 is formed with an overlap of dimension L. Thereby, when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotation position (first operation) (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation trajectories of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are It can overlap with a part of the decorative member 480 in a front view.

  That is, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be displaced in a state where the back side of the decoration member 480 is passed, an operation of crossing the decoration member 480 and the both displacement members 440 and 450 can be performed. At the time of the intersection, the decorative member 480 is allowed to pass through so that both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by displacing both the displacement members 440 and 450. In particular, in the present embodiment, the front end side of the substrate displacement member 440 that is separated from the decoration member 480 protrudes from the front end side of the relative displacement member 450 that is close to the decoration member 480, so that it is difficult to contact the decoration member 480. As a result, the dimension L which is the overlapping margin can be made larger. Therefore, the rendering effect by crossing can be enhanced.

  In this case, as described above, the decorative portion 454 that forms the front side (the right side in FIG. 17B) of the relative displacement member 450 is the base end side (the rotation center side of the base side displacement member 440, FIG. b) is inclined stepwise toward the case body 410 (left side in FIG. 17B) as it goes from the lower side to the distal end side (rotational tip side of the proximal end displacement member 440, upper side in FIG. 17B) The Further, the distal end side of the base side displacement member 440 arranged on the back side (left side in FIG. 17B) of the relative displacement member 450 is protruded from the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, in the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 as a whole, the tip end side can be disposed at a position recessed toward the case body 410 side (rear side, left side in FIG. 17B).

  Thereby, when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotation position (first operation) (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation locus is overlapped with the decoration member 480 in front view. In addition, it is possible to suppress the contact between the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 and the decorative member 480 while ensuring the improvement of the effect.

  In this case, only one longitudinal side of the base-side displacement member 440 is supported by the base-side support shaft 413 and the distal end side is a free end (see FIGS. 12A and 12B). ), During the first operation, the tip end side tends to swing in the front-rear direction (the direction approaching and separating from the case body 410 side, the vertical direction in FIG. 5), and the contact with the decorative member 480 is likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration according to the present embodiment (a shape that is inclined so that the distal end side is closer to the case body 410) is particularly effective.

  On the other hand, the relative displacement member 450 does not have the entire decorative portion 454 close to the case body 410 side, but, as described above, the distal end side (the rotational distal end side of the proximal end displacement member 440, FIG. 17B). The shape is located closer to the front side (front side) (right side in FIG. 17B) toward the base end side (upper rotation side of the base side displacement member 440, lower side in FIG. 17B) than the upper side. That is, the decorative portion 454 is inclined upward in a stepped manner in a direction away from the case body 410 (right side in FIG. 17B) as it goes from the distal end side to the proximal end side.

  Thereby, when the relative displacement member 450 is slide-displaced (second operation) from the reference position to the extended position (see FIGS. 14 and 15), the relative displacement member 440 is more front (front) side (ie, It can be placed closer to the player to increase power. In particular, in this embodiment, since the outer shape is enlarged toward the portion (the second portion 454b than the first portion 454a and the third portion 454c than the second portion 454b) arranged on the front (front) side, Can be more effective.

  Next, the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 30. 18 and 19 are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 18 illustrates a state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 5), and FIG. 19 illustrates a state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 5). The

  Here, in the composite operation unit 500, a pair of left and right is disposed above the opening 301 with the rotary operation unit 600 interposed therebetween (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and the pair of composite operation units 500 are symmetrical. Since they are formed and their structures are substantially the same, only one (provided on the right side in front view) will be described, and the description on the other (provided on the left side in front view) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the compound operation unit 500 causes the driven member 550 to be displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 530, and causes the driven member 560 to follow the displacement of the driven member 550. Then, the driven member 560 is displaced between the retracted position shown in FIG. 18 and the extended position shown in FIG. In this case, the driven member 560 is driven by the driven member 550 while changing the relative position with respect to the driven member 550 by rotation and slide displacement, as will be described later (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

  As a result, even when the driven member 550 is rotated at a constant speed around a predetermined position (shaft portions 553 and 554) as a rotation center, the driven member 550 is driven by a different path from the driven member 550. The member 560 can be displaced, and a change can be given to the displacement mode of the driven member 560. That is, according to the combined operation unit 500, it is possible to apply a change to the aspect of the displacement of the driven member 560 while keeping the output of the drive motor 530 constant. The detailed configuration of the combined operation unit 500 will be described below.

  20 and 21 are exploded front perspective views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 22 (a) is a front view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, and FIG. 22 (b) is a view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 in the arrow XXIIb direction of FIG. 22 (a). It is a side view.

  20 corresponds to a state where the combined operation unit 500 illustrated in FIG. 18 is disassembled, and FIG. 21 corresponds to a state where the combined operation unit 500 illustrated in FIG. 19 is disassembled. FIGS. 22A and 22B correspond to the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 in the states illustrated in FIGS. 18 and 20, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the composite operation unit 500 includes a front case body 510 and a back case body 520 that form the skeleton, a drive motor 530 disposed on the back side of the back case body 520, and driving thereof. The crank member 540 attached to the drive shaft 531 of the motor 530, the driven member 550 driven by the driving force of the drive motor 530 being transmitted through the crank member 540, and the relative displacement to the driven member 550 A driven member 560 that can be connected is mainly provided.

  The front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, and are arranged opposite to each other with a predetermined distance therebetween, and by fastening and fixing each other by screws (not shown) It is configured as a housing member in which an internal space is formed between the facing surfaces. A driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552), a driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561), and a crank member 540 are respectively provided in the internal spaces (between opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520. It is accommodated in a displaceable state.

  The front case body 510 includes a shaft support hole 511, an insertion hole 512, and a first guide groove 513. The shaft support hole 511 is a circular hole in front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 540. The insertion hole 512 is an opening through which the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is inserted, and is formed in a size that allows the reciprocating movement of the crank pin 541. The crank pin 541 can be connected to the driven member 560 (drive shaft 561a) through the insertion hole 512.

  The first guide groove 513 is an opening through which the first pin 561a in the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and a shape obtained by extracting a part of the annular shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, 27 (a) to 29 (a)). The groove width of the first guide groove 513 is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the first pin 561a. As will be described later, the first pin 561a is slid along the extending direction of the first guide groove 513. By moving (guiding), the posture of the interposed plate portion 561 (the driven member 560) (in particular, the relative rotational position with respect to the driven member 550) can be defined (see FIGS. 27 (a) to 29 (a)). .

  The back case body 520 includes a shaft support hole 521, an insertion hole 522, and a second guide groove 523. The axial support hole 521 is a hole in a front view circular shape for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 554 of the driven member 540, and is disposed concentrically with the axial support hole 511 of the front case body 510 described above. In other words, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 have their shaft support holes 511 and 521 that respectively support the shaft portions 553 and 554 of the driven member 550 so that the driven member 550 can be rotated. I can support it. The insertion hole 522 is an opening through which the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 is inserted, and the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 can be connected to the crank member 540 through the insertion hole 522.

  The second guide groove 513 is an opening through which the connection shaft 561b in the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and a shape obtained by extracting a part of the annular shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, FIG. 27 (b) to 29 (b)). The groove width of the second guide groove 523 is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 561b, and the connection shaft 561b is slid along the extending direction of the second guide groove 523, as will be described later. By guiding (guiding), it is possible to define the posture (in particular, the relative sliding position with respect to the driven member 550) of the interposed plate portion 561 (follower member 560) (see FIGS. 27B to 29B).

  As described above, the crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530, and the crank member 540 is eccentric from the rotation shaft (drive shaft 531) when being rotated by the drive motor 530. A crank pin 541 is disposed at the position. The crank pin 541 is inserted into the drive groove 551 a of the driven member 550. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is slid along the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550, and the driven member 550 is rotated. (See FIGS. 30 to 32).

  As described above, the driven member 550 is a member that is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 and that displaces the driven member 560 along with the rotation, and supports the shaft portions 553 and 554 as a shaft. By pivotally supporting the holes 511 and 521, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are rotatably held. Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG.

  FIG. 23A is a front view of the driven member 550, and FIG. 23B is a back surface portion of the driven member 550. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member 550 in the arrow XXIV direction view of FIG. 23 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the driven member 550 includes a long plate-shaped front plate portion 551 and a long plate-shaped interposed member which intersects the front plate portion 551 substantially at a right angle in a front view. A plate portion 552, a cylindrical shaft portion 553 connecting the front plate portion 551 and the installation plate portion 552, and a circle projecting from the back surface of the insertion plate portion 552 at a position concentric with the shaft portion 553 It is mainly provided with a columnar shaft portion 554.

  The front plate 551 is a member disposed on the front of the front case body 510 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and has an oval front view on one end side (the side opposite to the side to which the shaft 553 is connected). The drive groove 551a is formed in the shape of a circle. The drive groove 551 a is an opening through which the crank pin 541 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the crank member 540 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the front plate portion 551. The groove width of the drive groove 551a is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the crank pin 541. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 can be slid along the drive groove 551a, and as a result, the shaft portion 553, 554 is rotated as a center of rotation. The drive member 550 can be rotated (see FIGS. 30-32).

  The interposing plate portion 552 is a member disposed in the internal space (between facing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and one end side thereof (front stomach body portion 551). A connecting groove 552a having an oval shape in front view is formed on the side opposite to the side to which the is connected. The connection groove 552 a is an opening through which the connection shaft 561 b (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the driven member 560 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the interposed plate portion 552. The groove width of the connection groove 552a is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 561b. Therefore, the connection groove 552a can hold the connection shaft 561b rotatably and slidably. That is, the driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 so as to be rotatable and slidable (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

  Here, the connection groove 552a has a region overlapping the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 in a front view when the driven member 550 is rotated with the shaft portions 553 and 554 as a rotation center, and The connection shaft 561b is configured to be disposed within the region (see FIGS. 27A to 27C). Thereby, as described later, the slide displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be defined based on the shape (contour) of the second guide groove 523.

  In the driven member 550, the interposed plate portion 552 and the shaft portions 553, 554 are integrally formed from a resin material, while the front plate portion 551 is formed from a resin material as a separate member from these portions 552-554, The axial direction end surface of the shaft portion 553 (the end surface opposite to the interposed plate portion 552) is brought into contact with the back surface of the base plate side of the front plate portion 551 (the side opposite to the side where the driving groove 551a is drilled), It is assembled by fastening and fixing both with a screw.

  In this case, four pins 553a project from the axial end surface of the shaft portion 553, and holes 551b for receiving the four pins 553a are provided at four locations on the base end side of the front plate portion 551. The pins 553a are assembled in a state of being received in the holes 551b. Thus, the flat plate portion 551 and the interposing plate portion 552 can be reliably prevented from relative rotation while reducing the number of screws and reducing the cost of parts.

  Referring back to FIG. 20 to FIG. As described above, the connecting shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 in the driven member 560 is inserted into the connecting groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 in the driven member 550, whereby the driven member is connected to the driving member 550. 560 are connected for relative displacement (rotation and slide displacement). As described above, the driven member 560 is a member that is driven in accordance with the displacement of the driving member 550, and the connecting shaft 561 b of the interposed plate portion 561 is connected to the connecting groove 552 a of the interposed plate portion 552 of the driven member 550. In addition to the above, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are held in a rotatable and slidable state by being inserted into the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520. Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG.

  FIG. 25A is a front view of the driven member 560, and FIG. 25B is a back surface portion of the driven member 560. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member 560 in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the driven member 560 includes a plate-like interposed plate portion 561 and a decorative portion 562 having a pair of elongated portions on the front surface of which a shape for decoration is formed, and A rear plate portion 563 which is continuously provided on the side of the decorative portion 562 and connected to the rear surface side of the interposed plate portion 561 is mainly provided.

  The interposing plate portion 561 is a member disposed in the internal space (between facing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). The first pin 561a to be inserted through the first guide groove 513 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) is provided in a protruding manner, and the connection shaft 561b is provided on the back surface at a position eccentric to the first pin 561a. Is done. As described above, the connection shaft 561b is inserted into the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (the interposed plate portion 552) and the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). .

  Therefore, when the driven member 550 is rotated about the shaft portions 553 and 5554, the first pin 561a is slid (guided) along the first guide groove 513, whereby the interposed plate portion 561 ( That is, the driven member 560 is rotated relative to the driven member 550 and the back case body 520 around the connection shaft 561b (see FIGS. 27A to 29A), and the connection shaft 561b. Is slid (guided) along the second guide groove 523, so that the driven plate 561 (that is, the driven member 560) has a direction along the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 as a sliding direction. The slide displacement is relative to 550 (see FIGS. 27 (b) to 29 (b)).

  Here, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is inserted only into the connecting groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552), and a pin separately provided on the interposed plate portion 561 is inserted into the first pin of the rear case body 520. The same action as described above can also be obtained by inserting the guide groove 523 through the guide groove 523.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the connection shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is provided in both the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520 and the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposition plate portion 552). The displacement of the driven member 560 relative to the back case body 520 is regulated by being inserted into the connecting shaft 561b and guided by the second guide groove 523 (that is, the driven member 560 is slid relative to the driven member 550). And the function of connecting the driven member 560 to the driven member 550 so as to be capable of relative displacement (rotation and slide displacement) by being inserted into the connection groove 561b. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost, and the structure can be simplified to improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

  The rear plate portion 563 is a circular member in a front view circular shape disposed on the rear surface of the rear case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and an abutment portion on the front surface (the front side surface in FIG. 25A). 563a is provided in a protruding manner. The contact portion 563a is a portion that is in contact with the back surface of the back case body 520, and is formed in an annular shape in front view concentric with the connection shaft 561b. That is, only the peripheral portion of the back plate portion 563 (the protruding front end surface of the contact portion 562a) is in contact with the back surface of the back case body 520.

  As described above, by providing the back plate 563 with the concentric contact portion 563 on the connection shaft 561b, when the connection shaft 561b slides (guides) along the second guide groove 523, the first pin 561a is provided. And even if the driven member 560 is rotated relative to the rear case body 520 about the connecting shaft 561b as a rotation center by the rotation action of the first guide groove 523 (see FIGS. 27 to 29), the rear case body By keeping the contact state of the back surface 520 with the back surface constant, it is possible to suppress the change of the support reaction force. As a result, the driven member 560 can be displaced in a stable state.

  In the driven member 560, the decorative portion 562 and the back plate portion 563 are integrally formed from a resin material, while the interposing plate portion 561 is formed from a resin material as a separate member from these portions 562 and 563, and the back plate portion. Assembling is performed by bringing the end face in the axial direction of the connecting shaft 561b of the interposition plate portion 561 into contact with the front face of 563 and fastening and fixing them together with screws. The structure in which the plurality of pins 561c protruding from the axial end surface of the connecting shaft 561b are received in the plurality of holes 563b of the back plate portion 563, respectively, so that they are coupled so as not to rotate relative to each other is the above-described driven structure. The same as in the case of the member 550, the description thereof is omitted.

  Referring back to FIG. 20 to FIG. The combined operation unit 500 can be assembled as follows. First, the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 550 is inserted into the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510, and the interposing plate portion 561 and the front plate portions 551 of the driven member 550 are fastened and fixed. Thus, the driven member 550 can be assembled to the front case body 510 in a rotatable state. At the time of this assembly, the connection shaft 561 b of the interposing plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted in advance in the connecting groove 552 of the driven member 550 (the interposing plate portion 552).

  Next, the crank member 540 is mounted on the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 through the insertion hole 522 of the back case body 520, and the driven member 550 is connected to the crank pin 541 through the insertion hole 512 of the front case body 510. The drive groove 551a of (front plate portion 551) is inserted. In addition, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561) is inserted through the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520, and the interposed plate portion 561 and the back plate portion 563 of the driven member 560 are fastened and fixed. To do. Thus, the driven member 560 can be rotatably assembled to the rear case body 520, can be connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slidable state, and can be driven via the crank member 540. A state in which the rotational driving force of the motor 530 can be transmitted to the driven member 550 can be formed.

  Thereafter, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are fastened and fixed by screws (not shown). Accordingly, the driven member 550 is displaced by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, and the driven member 560 can be displaced (driven) in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550. It can be unitized as one device. As described above, according to the combined operation unit 500, assembling is possible by sequentially assembling each component to the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, so that not only can the assembly cost be reduced but also it can be unitized. Thus, the assembly to the unit storage member 300 (the gaming machine main body, see FIGS. 5 and 6) can be facilitated, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  The operation of combined operation unit 500 will now be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 27A, 28A, and 29A are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513. FIG. FIG. 28B and FIG. 29B are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523.

  Similarly, FIG. 30A, FIG. 31A and FIG. 32A are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513, and FIG. 30B and 30B are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523. FIG.

  27 and 30 correspond to the state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position (state shown in FIGS. 18 and 20), and FIGS. 29 and 32 correspond to the state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position. This corresponds to the state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20). The states shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 correspond to the state in which the driven member 560 is disposed between the retracted position and the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 30, when the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is on the right side when viewed from the front with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (FIG. 30A). As a result, the driven member 550 tilts the front end side (formation portion of the drive groove 551a) of the front plate portion 551 to the right side (right side in FIG. 30 (b)) and the interposed plate. The front end side of the portion 552 (the portion where the connection groove 552a is formed) is lifted upward (upper side in FIG. 30B). That is, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position which is a rotational end in a clockwise (clockwise) direction in a front view with the shaft portions 553, 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) as the rotational center.

  On the other hand, as described above, the driven member 560 is in a posture in which the driven member 550 lifts the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 552 upward, so that the connection shaft 561b is connected to the upper end side of the second guide groove 523 ( The posture is pushed up to the upper side of FIG. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at the uppermost position in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 30B) and at the most left position in the lateral direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 30B). Is done. Further, the driven member 560 is positioned at the front end side of the interposing plate portion 561 (the upper left side in FIG. 27A) by positioning the first pin 561a of the interposing plate portion 561 at the upper end side of FIG. The first pin 561a is disposed in a horizontal posture with the left side of the first pin 561a facing leftward (left side in FIG. 27A). That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position that is the end of rotation in a counterclockwise (front-turning) direction when viewed from the front centered on the connection shaft 561b.

  From the state where the driven member 560 shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 30 is disposed at the retracted position, the crank member 540 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when the drive shaft 531 is rotating by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530. When rotated, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is slid along the drive groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, so that the driven member 550 has the shaft portions 553, 554 (FIG. 20 and FIG. 20). As shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, the driven member 560 is rotated to a position approximately in the middle between the retracted position and the extended position. Be placed.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, when the driven member 560 is disposed at a position substantially intermediate between the retracted position and the extended position, the driven member 550 makes the front plate 551 substantially upright and The plate portion 552 is in a substantially horizontal posture. That is, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position that is substantially in the middle of the rotatable range with the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) as the rotational center.

  On the other hand, in the driven member 560, the driven member 550 is positioned so that the interposed plate portion 552 is substantially horizontal, so that the connecting shaft 561b pushed down by the connecting groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 has the second The posture is set at an intermediate position of the guide groove 523. In other words, the driven member 560 is disposed at a substantially middle position in the displaceable range in the vertical direction (FIG. 31 (b) vertical direction), and the rightmost in the left / right direction (FIG. 30 (b) horizontal direction). Are placed at Further, the driven member 560 is disposed at a position where the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 is substantially in the middle of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 561 (of the first pin 561a). The inclined portion is disposed in an upper left direction (upper left side in FIG. 28A) in the front view. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position that is substantially in the middle of the rotatable range around the connection shaft 561b.

  When the crank member 540 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in a front view with the drive shaft 531 being rotated by the rotational drive force of the drive motor 530 from the state shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, The crank pin 541 is slid along the driving groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, so that the driven member 550 has a front surface with the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) as the center of rotation. It is rotated in a counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction, and as shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, in a state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position, the crankpin 541 of the crank member 540 is on the left side in a front view with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (FIG. ), The driven member 550 is tilted from the front end side of the front plate portion 551 (the portion where the driving groove 551a is formed) to the left side of the front view (left side in FIG. 32 (b)). It is set as the attitude | position which dropped the front end side (formation part of the connection groove | channel 552a) of the board part 552 below (FIG.32 (b) lower side). In other words, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position that is the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front centering on the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, as described above, the driven member 560 is in a posture in which the driven member 550 drops the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 552 downward, so that the connecting shaft 561b is connected to the lower end side of the second guide groove 523 ( It is set as the attitude | pressed to FIG. 29 (b) lower side). That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at the lowest position in the vertical direction (FIG. 32 (b) vertical direction) and at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (FIG. 32 (b) horizontal direction). Is done. Further, the driven member 560 is positioned at the lower end side (the lower right side in FIG. 29A) of the first guide groove 513 with the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561. In the upright posture, the (arrangement portion of the first pin 561a) is directed upward in a front view (the upper side in FIG. 29A). In other words, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position that is the end of rotation in the clockwise direction (clockwise) when viewed from the front centering on the connection shaft 561b.

  As described above, according to the combined operation unit 500, when the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the driven member 560 is moved along with the displacement of the driven member 550. The drive member 550 can be driven while being relatively displaced. That is, the mode of displacement of the driven member 550 is rotation about the shaft portions 533 and 554 as a rotation center, and even if it is displaced by a constant trajectory, a trajectory different from that of the driven member 550 (displacement) The driven member 560 can be displaced in the Moreover, since the change of the displacement mode is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550, even if the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) at a constant speed, The driven member 560 can be displaced by a different path (displacement mode) from the driven member 550. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member 560 while keeping the output of the drive motor 530 constant.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the means (displacement defining means) for relatively displacing the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 is the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520. 523 and the first pin 561a of the driven member 560 and the connecting shaft 561b. That is, the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to each case body 510, 520 can be defined by guiding the first pin 561a and the connection shaft 561b along the guide grooves 513, 523. Thereby, the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be formed in accordance with the outline (shape) of each guide groove 513, 523. As a result, the displacement defining means can be formed by a mechanical element such as a guide groove and a shaft-like body guided by the guide groove, and the structure thereof is simplified, so that the product cost can be reduced. In addition, since simple mechanical elements can be employed, the reliability and durability of the movable part can be improved.

  Further, by setting the contours (shapes) of the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the aspect of relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be arbitrarily set. The degree of freedom in design when setting the aspect can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily secure the variation of the aspect of the displacement that can be applied to the driven member 560.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 so as to be rotatable and slidable, a first guide groove 513 and a first pin 561a are used to mainly define the rotation. A guide structure and a second guide structure that is configured by the second guide groove 523 and the connecting shaft 561b and mainly defines the slide displacement are provided. As a result, not only can the variations of the change that can be given to the aspect of displacement be increased, but also when the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 is of multiple types (rotation and slide displacement) And the second guide structure can properly guide each. As a result, the displacement of the driven member 560 can be stabilized, and the reliability as the movable member can be improved.

  Here, the first guide structure described above, for example, forms the first pin 561a in the front case body 510 or the rear case body 520 in the installation plate portion 561 or the rear plate portion 563 of the first guide groove 513, respectively. The same applies to the On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510, and the first pin 561a is formed in the interposed plate portion 561. This makes it easy to secure a space for forming the first guide groove 513.

  That is, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 need to be formed to have relatively large outer shapes because it is necessary to hold both the members 550 and 560 while securing the displacement space of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560. There is a tendency that a dead space is formed on the plate surface. Therefore, by using the front case body 510 as the formation object of the first guide groove portion 513, it is possible to secure a sufficient space for forming the first guide groove 513 by effectively utilizing the dead space. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the contour (shape) and the extension length of the first guide groove 513, and it is possible to increase the variation variation which can be given to the aspect of the displacement. The second guide structure is also similar to the case of the first guide structure, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the first guide structure and the second guide structure are also realized by a configuration in which both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the back case body 520. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed because the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510 and the second guide groove 523 is formed in the back case body 520. Can be formed without considering the formation position of each other.

  That is, when both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the back case body 520, it is necessary to form the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 so as not to intersect with each other. The degree of freedom in the design of the contour (shape) and the extension length is limited. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, in both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the contour (shape) and the extended length are arbitrarily set without considering the positional relationship with the other party. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the design can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased accordingly.

  Next, the rotational operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. FIG. 33 is a front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the rotational operation unit 600 includes a spherical liquid crystal device 670 in which a first rotator 650 having an annular shape in front view is disposed so as to surround the periphery thereof, and the back surface of the first rotator 650. A second rotating body 660 having an annular shape in front view is concentrically disposed on the side, and in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are rotated at different rotational speeds and in opposite directions.

  Here, in the conventional product in which a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged at positions separated from each other, it is difficult to make the player recognize the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies in association with each other. That is, the conventional product is configured such that each rotating body is independently rotated without being associated with other rotating bodies, and therefore, the effect of the effect by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies is sufficiently exhibited. I couldn't let it go.

  On the other hand, according to the rotation operation unit 600 in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are concentrically arranged around the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and these two rotating bodies rotate differently. Since it is rotated in a mode (a mode in which the rotation speed and the rotation direction are different from each other), these rotations can be associated with each other so that the player can easily recognize them, and the effect of rendering can be achieved by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies. it can. The detailed configuration of the rotation operation unit 600 will be described below.

  FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotational operation unit 600, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotational operation unit 600. FIG. 36 is a longitudinal sectional view of the rotation operation unit 600. In FIGS. 35 and 36, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is omitted. 36 corresponds to the cross section of the rotary operation unit 600 cut by a plane including the rotation centers of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the rotary operation unit 600 includes a front case body 610 and a back case body 620 that form the skeleton, a drive motor 630 disposed on the back side of the back case body 620, and driving thereof. A plurality of gears (first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and a front gear 646) as transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the motor 630 and the rotational driving force of the driving motor 630 are transmitted via the plurality of gears. Of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 which are rotated by being rotated, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, and the front case body 610. And a light emitting device 680 disposed on the front side.

  The front case body 610 and the back case body 620 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, and are disposed opposite to each other with a predetermined distance therebetween, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is configured as a housing member in which an internal space is formed between the facing surfaces. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 are stored in the internal spaces (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, respectively.

  The front case body 610 and the back case body 620 are respectively formed with openings 611 and 621 that are circular in front view, and these openings 611 and 621 are arranged concentrically in the assembled state. On the front side of the front case body 610, a cylindrical tubular portion 612 is provided projecting toward the front (front) at a position concentric with the openings 611 and 621. In the front case body 610, the inner diameter of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 is set to the same size, and the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 610 rotates on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612. Possible support. In addition, the second rotating body 620 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612.

  As described above, the first rotating body 650 (main body portion 651) and the second rotating body 660 are rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610. The arrangement positions of the rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be defined with respect to the front case body 610, respectively. Therefore, as will be described later, gears (first and second outer peripheral gears 653a and 661a) engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 650 (housing flange portion 653) and the second rotating body 660, and the front surface The positional relationship between the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 disposed on the case body 610 can be defined with the front case body 610 as a reference. As a result, the meshing state between the outer peripheral gears 653a and 661a of the rotating bodies 650 and 660 and the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed. Can be reduced.

  The drive motor 630 has a pinion gear 631 attached to its drive shaft, and is attached to the back surface of the back case body 620, whereby the pinion gear 631 is attached to the first storage gear 641 among the plurality of gears constituting the transmission means. Engage the teeth. Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 can be transmitted to the transmission means (a plurality of gears) via the pinion gear 431. As a result, as described later, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are used. Can be rotated respectively.

  As described above, the first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the front gear 646 are a gear group for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660. The teeth are respectively formed as spur gears engraved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the rotation axis. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 are rotatably supported on the back side of the front case body 610, and are connected (engaged) in series so that the first storage gear 641 is the top and the fifth storage is performed. A gear train (gear train) is formed with a gear 645 as a tail.

  The front gear 646 is rotatably supported on the front side of the front case body 610 so as to be able to synchronously rotate with the fifth storage gear 645. That is, the front gear 646 and the fifth storage gear 645 are respectively fixed to one end and the other end of the rotating shaft disposed through the front case body 610, and the gears 645, 646 and the rotating shaft are integrated. It is turned.

  According to the gear group configured in this manner, when the drive motor 630 is rotationally driven, the rotational drive force is transmitted to the first accommodation gear 641 via the pinion gear 631 and the first accommodation gear 641 is rotated. . The rotation of the first housing gear 641 is transmitted to the fifth housing gear 645 by the action of a gear train (gear train), and the front gear 646 is rotated by rotating the fifth housing gear 645.

  Here, as will be described later, the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 (the storing flange portion 653) is provided in the second receiving gear 642, and the second outer periphery of the second rotating body 660 is provided in the front gear 646. Since the gears 661a are engaged with each other, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be rotated with the rotation of the drive motor 630, respectively. That is, by the rotational driving of the drive motor 630 of 1, it is possible to simultaneously rotate the 2 rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660).

  In this case, in the present embodiment, an even number of gears (third and fourth housing gears 643 and 644) are interposed between the second housing gear 642 and the fifth housing gear 645. Therefore, not only can the rotation speed between the front gear 646 and the second storage gear 642 rotated synchronously with the fifth storage gear 645 be different, but also the rotation between the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646. The directions can also be different. As a result, as will be described later, the rotation speed and the rotation direction between the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be varied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a gear train including the second storage gear 642 on the back side of the front case body 610 and a front gear on the front side of the front case cheer 610 are provided. On the back side, the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are engaged with the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 and the second outer peripheral gear 651a of the second rotating body 660, respectively. Therefore, for example, both the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are arranged on the front side of the front case body 610, and both the gears 642 and 646 are engaged with the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, respectively. Compared to the structure to be driven, not only the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 but also the structure of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 itself. It can be simplified.

  Further, the gear train and the housing flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 with which the second housing gear 642 of the gear train is engaged are arranged on the back side of the front case body 610, so that the rotation is performed. The gear case and the storage flange portion 653 can be shielded by the front case body 610 from the player who views the operation unit 600 from the front. That is, the shielding structure for shielding the gear train and the storage flange portion 653 in an invisible manner can be simply formed using the back case body 610 without the need to provide another member.

  The first rotator 650 is an effect member for performing effects by rotating around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (see FIG. 33), and is integrated with the main body 651 and one side in the axial direction of the main body 651. A front effect portion 652 to be formed and a storage flange portion 653 fastened and fixed to the other axial end (axial end surface) of the main body 651 by a screw are mainly included.

  The main body portion 651 is a portion formed in a cylindrical shape from a resin material, and is inserted into the opening 611 in the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612. That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612) with the main body 651 as a rotation axis. Here, a detailed configuration of the main body 651 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a rear view of the main body 651, and FIG. 37 (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the main body 651 showing the XXXVII portion of FIG. 37 (a) in an enlarged manner. In FIG. 37 (b), for easy understanding, the diameters of the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b are schematically enlarged to be larger than actual and the first projecting portion 651a. A virtual circle IS, which is a virtual circle inscribed at each top of the second protrusion 651b, is illustrated using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), the main body 651 is formed with a first protrusion 651a and a second protrusion 651b, and at a position corresponding to the second protrusion 651b. , And an offset portion 651c.

  The first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b are formed so as to project from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651, and along the axial direction of the main body portion 651 (FIG. 37 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). However, it is a part extended over the entire length of the main body part 651 (see FIG. 35), and is a plurality of places (a total of eight places in the present embodiment) that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction, and includes a first protrusion 651a and a second protrusion. The portions 651 b and the portions 651 b are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction.

  That is, the first projecting portion 651a embeds a cylindrical body having a circular cross-section having a diameter larger than the plate thickness of the main body 561 in the main body 651 in a posture in which the main body 651 coincides with the axial direction. Of the embedded columnar body, the main body portion 651 is formed by a portion protruding from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface (a part of the columnar body). The second protrusion 651b is the same as the first protrusion 651a except that the diameter of the columnar body embedded in the main body 651 is larger than that of the first protrusion 651a.

  As described above, the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b projecting from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 extend over the entire length of the main body portion 651 along the axial direction. The rigidity of the 651 can be increased.

  The second projecting portion 651b is further extended along the axial direction from the axial end surface of the main body portion 651 (the front side surface in FIG. 37 (b)). Therefore, as will be described later, when the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 with a screw, the axially extending portion of the second projecting portion 651b is recessed in the front surface of the storage flange portion 653. The main body 651 and the storage flange 653 can be firmly coupled so as not to be relatively rotatable by being fitted in the recessed portion (see FIG. 36).

  The offset portion 651c is a portion in which the vicinity of the second protruding portion 651b formation portion in the main body portion 651 is offset to the inner peripheral side while maintaining the plate thickness dimension, and is approximately three times the diameter of the second protruding portion 651b. It is formed over a range (circumferential direction). That is, the offset portion 651c is curved in an arc shape concentric with the main body portion 651 in the axial direction view of the main body portion 651 shown in FIG. By forming the offset portion 651c in the main body portion 651 as described above, the axial center of the second projecting portion 651b can be offset to the axial center side as described later, and the main body portion 651 as a whole can be positioned. Stiffness can be increased.

  The plurality of (four in this embodiment) first protrusions 651a are set to have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651, and the plurality of (four in this embodiment) second protrusions 652b are The amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651 is set to be the same, and the amount of protrusion of the first protrusion 651a is the same due to the offset by the offset portion 651c. The plurality of (eight in this embodiment) first protrusions 651a and second protrusions 652b are set to have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651. As a result, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the virtual circle IS inscribed by the tops of the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 652b can be set concentrically on the outer peripheral side of the main body 651. In this case, the diameter dimension of the virtual circle IS is set to a dimension equivalent to or slightly larger than the inner diameter dimension of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610.

  Therefore, in the state in which the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted into the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612, the contact area thereof becomes the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion Since the present invention can be limited to the respective top portions of 651b, the main body portion 651 can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 by suppressing the contact resistance.

  In particular, the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b have an arc shape as viewed in the axial direction (specifically, an arc shape in which a cross-sectional shape cut by a plane orthogonal to the axial direction of the main body portion 651 is convex outward). ), The contact area can be suppressed, and the tops of the first and second projecting portions 651a and 651b are smoothly in contact with the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 612. Therefore, the main body 651 can be rotated more smoothly on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 even when there is shakiness due to dimensional tolerance.

  As described above, the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b project not only from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 but also from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651. Thereby, when the main body 651 is molded by the resin mold, the shape of the main body 651 is made uniform (symmetrical shape) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side, and the moldability can be ensured.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first projecting portion 651a has a projecting dimension of the portion formed by projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 and the main body portion 651 in the axial view of the main body portion 651 shown in FIG. The projecting dimension of the portion formed by projecting from the inner peripheral surface is the same. Similarly, in the second projecting portion 651a, the projecting dimension of the portion that projects from the outer peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c and the projecting dimension of the portion that projects from the inner peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c are the same. . Therefore, the shape on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side of the main body 651 can be made more uniform (symmetrical shape), and the moldability can be further ensured.

  Further, the second protrusion 651b is provided with a circular hole having a circular cross section that is formed along the axial direction thereof (see FIG. 36). Thereby, the thickness of the second protrusion 651b having a larger diameter than that of the first protrusion 651a can be made uniform with other parts (the main body 651, the offset part 651c, the first protrusion 651a, etc.). As a result, the formability of the main body 651 can be ensured.

  In this case, a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the hole formed in the second projecting portion 651b, and a screw for fastening and fixing the storage flange portion 653 can be screwed (see FIG. 36). As described above, the second protrusion 651 b having a relatively large diameter bears the screw fastening portion for fastening the screw, whereby the strength of the screw fastening portion can be secured. In particular, the second protruding portion 651b is a portion formed in the offset portion 651c, and the rigidity of the main body portion 651 is reinforced, so that the connecting portion between the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 is connected to the second protruding portion 651b. By carrying out, while being able to connect both firmly, durability improvement can be aimed at.

  Referring back to FIG. 34 to FIG. The front effect portion 652 is a portion visually recognized as an effect portion by the player, and is formed so as to be flanged outward in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651. The front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect portion 652 is plated, and an appearance imitating a glossy metal is imparted to the front effect portion 652. The front effect portion 652 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, but is plated so that the player can visually recognize the light emitting device 680 (light emitting element 681) through the front effect portion 652. It can be avoided.

  The front view portion 652 is formed in a saw blade shape in which a mountain (second portion) and a valley (first portion) having an indefinite shape are repeated along the circumferential direction. The peaks (valleys) are arranged at circumferentially uneven intervals (unequal pitches). As described later, when the first rotating body 650 is rotated, the hills and valleys of the front effect portion 652 sequentially pass through the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 of the light emitting device 680 to emit light to the player. The element 681 can be viewed intermittently and selectively (see FIG. 39).

  The storage flange portion 653 is a portion that is stored in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, and is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the cylindrical portion of the front case body 610 It is fastened and fixed to the end face in the axial direction of the main body portion 651 inserted through 612 through the opening 611. Specifically, as described above, by screwing the screw inserted into the storage flange portion 653 to the second projecting portion 651b of the main body portion 651, the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651.

  The storage flange portion 653 is set to have a thickness dimension that is equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the opposing surfaces of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, and has an outer diameter dimension that corresponds to the front case body 610 and the back case. The size is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the openings 611 and 621 in the body 620. Accordingly, the first rotating body 650 defines the axial position of the first rotating body 650 by bringing the front or back surface of the storage flange portion 653 into contact with the back surface of the front case body 610 or the front surface of the back case body 620. it can.

  A first outer peripheral gear 653a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653. The first outer peripheral gear 653a is the second storage of the aforementioned gear train disposed on the back surface of the front case body 610. Gear 642 is engaged. Therefore, when the gear train is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the housing flange portion 653 via the second housing gear 642 and the first outer peripheral gear 653a, and the first rotating body 650 It is rotated.

  As described above, the first rotating body 650 has the first outer peripheral gear 653a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653, and the first rotating body 650 includes a gear train disposed along the periphery of the opening 511 of the front case body 610. Since the second storage gear 642 is meshed with the first outer peripheral gear 653a, the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotary body 650 can be simplified. In particular, the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a projected surface portion 671 of a spherical liquid crystal device 670 described later is disposed on the inner peripheral side thereof, so it is difficult to secure a space on the inner peripheral surface side. It becomes. Therefore, it is effective to be able to arrange the transmission structure described above on the outer peripheral side of the first rotating body 650.

  Further, as described above, the first rotating body 650 (main body portion 651) is rotatably supported on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610. Therefore, the first rotating body 650 is disposed. The position can be defined with reference to the front case body 610. Therefore, a position between the gear (first outer gear 653a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 650 (housing flange portion 653) and the second housing gear 642 disposed in the front case body 610. The relationship can be defined with the front case body 610 as a reference. As a result, the meshing state of the first outer peripheral gear 653a and the second housing gear 642 of the first rotating body 650 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gear can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed. it can.

  The second rotator 660 is an effect member for performing effects by rotating on the back side of the first rotator 650 (see FIG. 33), and is a main body formed in a cylindrical shape from a light-transmitting resin material. And 661 and a front effect portion 662 integrally formed on an axial end surface of the main portion 661.

  The main body 661 is set to have an inner diameter equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610, and is externally fitted to the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 612 (ie, The cylindrical case 612 is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the main body 661) and is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (cylindrical portion 612).

  A second outer peripheral gear 661a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 661, and the above-described front gear 646 disposed on the front of the front case body 610 is engaged with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. Therefore, when the gear train and the front gear 646 described above are rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the main body 661 via the front gear 646 and the second outer peripheral gear 661a, and the second rotation. Body 660 is rotated.

  Thus, the second rotating body 660 has the second outer peripheral gear 661a engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and the front gear 646 disposed in front of the front case body 610 is meshed with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. The transmission structure for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive motor 630 to the second rotary body 660 can be simplified. In particular, since the second rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is rotatably held by being fitted around the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, a space is secured on the inner peripheral surface side. It will be difficult to do. Therefore, it is effective to be able to arrange the transmission structure described above on the outer peripheral side of the second rotating body 660.

  Further, as described above, since the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, the arrangement position of the second rotating body 660 is set to the front case body. It can be defined on the basis of 610. Therefore, the positional relationship between the gear (second outer peripheral gear 661 a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 disposed in the front case body 610 is expressed as the front case body 610. It can be defined as a standard. As a result, the meshing state of the second outer peripheral gear 661a of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that partial wear of the gear can be suppressed and drive resistance can be suppressed.

  The main body portion 661 has an axial dimension that is set to a size that is equal to or slightly smaller than the facing distance between the front surface of the front case body 610 and the back surface of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 causes the end face on one side in the axial direction or the end face on the other side in the axial direction of the main body 661 to abut on the back of the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 or the front of the front case body 610. Thus, the axial position of the second rotating body 650 can be defined.

  A front ridge 661 b and a rear ridge 661 c are provided on the end face on one side in the axial direction and the end face on the other side in the axial direction of the main body 661. The front ridge 661 b is formed in a front view annular shape, and the back ridge 661 c is formed in a shape obtained by dividing the front view annular shape at a plurality of places. Thereby, when rotating the 1st rotary body 660, the frictional resistance between the main-body part 661, the front case 610, and the 2nd rotary body 650 (front effect part 652) is reduced, and the load of the drive motor 630 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  The front effect part 662 is located on the back side of the front effect part 652 in the first rotating body 650 and is a part that is visually recognized by the player as an effect part together with the effect part 652, and is radial from the outer peripheral surface of the main body part 661. It is formed to project outward in a flange shape. The front effect portion 662 has an outer peripheral side portion 662a formed in a saw blade shape in which irregularly shaped peaks and valleys are repeated along the circumferential direction, and an annular shape in front view on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral side portion 662a. And an inner peripheral side portion 662b.

  Plating is applied to the front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect portion 662 as in the case of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. However, in the first rotating body 650 described above, plating is applied to the entire surface (full range) of the front effect portion 652, but with the second rotating body 650, only the outer peripheral portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 is plated The inner peripheral portion 662b is not plated.

  Therefore, as will be described later, a mountain (second portion) and a valley (first portion) of the front effect portion 652 in the first rotating body 650 are sequentially passed on the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 in the light emitting device 680. When the light emitting element 681 is intermittently and selectively viewed by the player, the light emitting element 681 is watermarked on the inner peripheral side portion 662 b (that is, the portion not plated) of the front effect portion 662. Thus, it is possible to make the player visually recognize (see FIG. 39).

  The spherical liquid crystal device 670 includes a projection surface portion 671 formed as a spherical shell from a light transmissive material, and a case body 672 in which a projection device that projects an image on the inner surface of the spherical shell of the projection surface portion 671 is housed. The video image projected from the projection device and transmitted through the outer surface of the projection surface portion 671 is visually recognized by the player. In the assembled state, the case body 672 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the rear case body 620, and the projection surface portion 671 causes approximately half of the spherical shell to project forward than the front of the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. It is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 in a fixed posture (see FIG. 33).

  The light-emitting device 680 includes a case body 681 having an annular shape in front view that is fitted around the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case 610, a circuit board accommodated in the case body 681, and a front surface (front surface) of the circuit board. A plurality of (twelve in the present embodiment) light emitting elements 682 disposed (mounted) on the side, and in the assembled state, the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660. It is disposed on the back side of the 662.

  On the front surface (front surface) of the case body 681, openings having an outer shape larger than that of the light emitting element 682 are formed at 12 positions that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction, and each light emitting element corresponds to the opening position of each opening. 682 is mounted on the circuit board. That is, in the front view, the light emitting device 680 has the light emitting element 682 exposed from the opening of the case body 681, and transmits light emitted from the light emitting element 682 through the opening of the case body 681 (first rotation). Irradiation can be performed toward the front rendering portions 652 and 662) of the body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

  As described above, the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 are disposed on the front (front) side of the light emitting device 680, and the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650 is provided. Is turned, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light emission by the light emitting element 682 intermittently and selectively. Here, a structure for allowing a player to visually recognize light emitted from the light emitting element 682 intermittently and selectively will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the rotary operation unit 600, and in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), a state in which the first rotary body 650 is disposed at different rotational positions is illustrated. 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600 taken along line XXXIXa-XXXIXa of FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. 39 (b) is a rotary operation unit 600 taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 38 (b). FIG.

  38, in order to clarify the phase relationship between the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680, the first rotating body 650 and the rotating operation unit 600 Only the light emitting device 680 is illustrated, and in FIG. 39, in order to clarify the radial position relationship between the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. FIG. 38 schematically illustrates a disassembled state in which the second rotating body 660 is added to the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting device 680 illustrated in FIG. 38.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the front view shape of the front effect portion 652 in the first rotator 650 is an irregularly shaped mountain (second portion) and valley (first portion) that are repeated along the circumferential direction. In the light emitting device 680, the light emitting element 682 is disposed at a radially outer side (upper side in FIG. 39 (a)) than the valley bottom in the front effect portion 652, and in the front effect portion 652. It is set to a radial position (vertical position in FIG. 39 (a)) which is radially inside (lower side in FIG. 39 (a)) than the peak.

  In this case, as described above, the inner (peripheral) side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is not plated on the front surface (front surface) and is formed so as to transmit light. The formation range of the circumferential side portion 662b (the range indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 39) is set to a range including the valley bottom of the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. That is, in front view, light is emitted from the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650 via the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotator 660 (that is, transmitted). The player can visually recognize the light emitting element 682 of the device 680.

  In addition, as described above, the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated on the front surface (front surface) to give an appearance imitating a glossy metal. The outer circumferential side portion 662 a is disposed to face the back side of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. That is, in the front view, the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotator 660 from the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650.

  As described above, according to the rotational operation unit 600, the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 is formed with alternately crests and valleys in the circumferential direction in the region overlapping the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 when viewed from the front. Therefore, with the rotation of the first rotating body 650, the peaks and valleys of the front effect portion 652 alternately pass in front of the light emitting element 682 to emit light from the light emitting element 682 to the second rotating body 660. The player can intermittently make the player visually recognize through the inner peripheral side portion 662 b of the front effect portion 682 of the above. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively perform an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 as a center.

  In addition, the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated to give an appearance imitating a shiny metal, the front (front side) side of the outer peripheral side portion 662a The front effect part 652 of the 1st rotary body 650 is arrange | positioned. Therefore, as described above, when the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 are rotated in opposite directions, the first rotary body 650 has a valley portion in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotary body 650. The player can visually recognize the aspect in which the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 652 of the two-rotor 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650.

  That is, according to the rotational operation unit 600, the player who views the first rotating body 650 from the front side intermittently visually recognizes the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 on the valley bottom side in the mountain valley shape of the front rendering unit 652. The front effect portion 662 (peripheral side portion 662a) of the second rotating body 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 (mountain and valley shape) of the first rotating body 650 on the crest on the mountain and valley shape of the front effect portion 652 Can be viewed visually. Accordingly, the rotation of the first rotating body 650 and the rotation of the second rotating body 660 can be associated with each other so that the player can easily recognize them. As a result, a plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660). It is possible to effectively perform the effects of rotating each of them.

  Further, according to the rotation effect unit 600, as described above, valleys in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 are formed in 16 places in the circumferential direction, while the light emitting elements 682 of the light emitting device 680 are in the circumferential direction 12. Since the light emitting elements 682 are disposed at the twelve places, the player can selectively make only a specific light emitting element 682 visible.

  That is, the circumferential spacing of the valleys in the front effect portion 652 is different from the circumferential spacing of the light emitting elements 682. For example, in the state shown in FIG. While the provided light emitting element 682 is visible, when the first rotating body 650 (front effect unit 652) is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the state shown in FIG. 38A, FIG. As shown in), different light emitting elements 682 are selected, and the light emitting elements 682 disposed at four locations, upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left, are made visible.

  Thereby, not only can the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 be visually recognized intermittently, but also the position of the visually recognized light emitting element 682 can be changed in the circumferential direction, so that a plurality of rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and An effect of rotating the second rotating body 660 can be more effectively performed.

  Returning to FIG. 34 to FIG. 36, the overall structure of the rotary operation unit 600 will be described. As described above, the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 are formed in the front case body 610, and the storage flange portion 653 is separately formed with respect to the main body portion 651 and the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 is mounted on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, and the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In addition, after the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the inserted main body portion 651, the rear case body 620 is fastened and fixed to the front case body 610, whereby the first rotating body 650 is fixed to the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620. The second rotating body 660 can be held in a rotatable state.

  That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably supported by the front case body 610 by inserting the main body 651 through the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the front case body 610 and the front surface of the back case body 620, whereby the first rotating body 650 with respect to both case bodies 610 and 620 is obtained. It is possible to regulate the displacement to the front side (front) and the back side (rear) of

  At the same time, the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported by the front case body 610 by being externally fitted to the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the second rotating body 660 (the front ridge 661 b and the back ridge 662 c) is in contact with the back of the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the front of the case body 681 of the light emitting device 680. Thereby, the displacement to the front side (front) and back side (rear) of the 2nd rotary body 660 with respect to both case bodies 610 and 620 can be controlled.

  Thus, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) can be held in a rotatable state, and the rotating body (the first rotating body 650) itself. Since the second part also serves as a part that regulates the displacement of the second rotating body 660, the structure can be simplified accordingly. In addition, the holding flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 with a holding structure that can hold the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) in a rotatable state. Since it can form only by doing, an assembly process can be simplified. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the opening 621 is formed in the back case body 620. Therefore, the front case body 610 and the back case body 620 are rotated a plurality of times. After the bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) are held in a rotatable state, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is mounted from the back side of the back case body 620 and fastened and fixed. The assembly of the unit 600 can be completed (see FIG. 33). That is, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 can be retrofitted in a separate process with respect to the assembly of the case bodies 5610 and 620 and the rotary bodies 650 and 660. Therefore, this point also contributes to the simplification of the assembly process and the reduction of the product cost.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In the protrusion operation unit 400 in the above embodiment, the case where the relative displacement member 450 is disposed so as to be slidable with respect to the base side displacement member 440 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The relative displacement member 450 may be rotatably arranged with respect to 440. That is, as in the case of the above-described embodiment, the first operation is to rotate the base side displacement member 440 between the retracted position (see FIG. 13) and the rotation position (see FIG. 14), and the second operation is A configuration in which the relative displacement member 450 is rotated with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 between a reference position (see FIG. 14) and an extended position (see FIG. 15) may be employed.

  Even with this configuration, the base side displacement member 450 in the retracted position is disposed at the rotation position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 at the reference position is disposed at the extended position by the second operation. While both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player and the effect of the performance can be sufficiently exhibited, the relative displacement member 450 in the extended position is rotated to the reference position by the second operation. Since the base side displacement member 440 in the rotation position is arranged at the retracted position by the first operation, both the displacement members 440 and 450 are reduced in size, and the space required to accommodate the displacement member is suppressed. it can.

  In the protruding operation unit 400 in the above embodiment, in the state where the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 17B), the front end side of the base side displacement member 450 is more than the front end side of the relative displacement member 450. Although the case of projecting to the decorative member 480 side (the upper side in FIG. 17B) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and conversely, the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450 is the base displacement member 450. A configuration may be employed in which the decorative member 480 is projected to the side of the decorative member 480 (upper side in FIG. 17B) than the tip end side.

  Also with this configuration, the rotational trajectories of both displacement members 440 and 450 can intersect with the decoration member 480, and at the time of the intersection, the decoration member 480 can be transmitted and the both displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. The production effect by displacing the members 440 and 450 can be enhanced. Furthermore, according to this configuration, when the relative displacement member 450 is extended (see FIG. 15), the area of the decorative portion 454 located in the front (front) can be further increased, and the force can be further increased. It can improve.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the driven member 550 (connection shaft 561b) can be rotated by forming the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 in a long hole shape. And although the case where it connects in the state in which slide displacement is possible was explained, it is not necessarily restricted to this, and the driven groove to driven member 550 (connection groove 552a) is formed by connecting groove 552a being formed circularly. A configuration in which the slide displacement of 560 (connection shaft 561b) is disabled (that is, a configuration in which only rotation is allowed) may be employed. Even in this configuration, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed. It is possible to enhance the production effect by adding a change to.

  In this case, the displacement defining means constituted by the first guide groove 513 and the first pin 561a is engaged with the gear disposed on the driven member 560 concentrically with the connection shaft 561b and the gear. You may comprise by the curved rack gear formed along the circular arc centering on the drive shaft 551a of the to-be-driven member 550, and arrange | positioned at the front case body 510 or the back case body 520. Accordingly, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed by the gear rolling the rack gear. it can.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the front case body 510 and the back case body 520, and are inserted through the both guide grooves 513 and 523, respectively. Although the case where the 1 pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b are formed on the driven member 560 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and conversely, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are connected to the driven member. And a portion (a member corresponding to the first pin 561a and the connection shaft 561b) to be inserted into both the guide grooves 513 and 523 is provided on the front case body 510 and / or the back case body 520. It is good. This configuration also allows the driven member 560 to perform a combination of linear motion and rotational motion in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, so that the trajectory of the driven member 560 is changed, The presentation effect can be enhanced.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the case where the first guide groove 513 is drilled (opened) in the front case body 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the first guide groove 513 is not necessarily limited thereto. However, it may be formed as a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section, for example. That is, the first guide groove 513 has only a shape that can guide the first pin 561a along the extending direction.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are curved and extended, while the connection groove 551a is linearly extended. On the contrary, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are linearly extended while the connection groove 551a is curved and extended. Also good. In particular, for the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the case where the radius of curvature is set to a constant arc shape has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the arc shapes of a plurality of curvature radii are combined. It is naturally possible to adopt a different shape (for example, an S shape). As a result, the trajectory of the driven member 560 can be changed more complicatedly, so the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, for example, when the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to an arc shape, the arc shape is defined as the rotation start end of the rotation direction of the driven member 550 about the shaft portions 553 and 554. Alternatively, it is preferable to make the radius larger than the reference value (decrease the curvature) in the state of being disposed at the terminal end and in the vicinity thereof. That is, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 in the first range in the vicinity and the first range or the end in the vicinity thereof and the second range in the vicinity thereof is made larger than the reference value, or the first range and the second range. It is preferable to make it larger than the radius in the third range located between the ranges. As a result, in the initial stage of starting the driving of the driven member 550 in the stopped state by the driving motor 530, the load can be reduced and the driving can be started smoothly.

  Alternatively, while the driven member 560 is invisible by the front case body 510, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value, and a part of the driven member 560 is set. The first drive unit 560 is exposed from the area of the front case body 510 (visible) to the time when the entire driven member 560 is exposed to the outside of the area of the front case body 510 (visible). The radius of the guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in the former case, since the operation of the driven member 560 is not visually recognized by the player, it is possible to reduce the load of the drive motor 530 without affecting the effect, and in the latter case, The movement of the driven member 560 can be made faster in a range in which a part of the driven member 560 is shielded by the front case body 510, so that the driven member 560 appears suddenly from the front case body 510. It is possible to perform an effect that hides quickly on the back of the camera.

  Alternatively, the driven member 560 is decorated within a range defined by a pair of virtual lines inclined up and down by 45 degrees with respect to a horizontal line passing through the connection shaft 561b in a horizontal posture (viewed in the direction of the connection shaft 561b (see FIG. 30)). While the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value while the driven member 560 exceeds the horizontal posture, The radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in a region where the weight of the driven member 560 (gravity action) needs to be supported by the driving force of the driving motor 530 is relatively large, the radius is increased, and the n-type friction resistance and the driven in each guide groove 513,514. While the load of the drive motor 530 can be reduced by reducing the influence of the inertial force due to the posture change of the member 560, a region where the necessity to support the self weight (action of gravity) of the driven member 560 by the drive force of the drive motor 530 is relatively small. Then, by reducing the radius, it is possible to increase the change in the operation of the driven member 560 and enhance the rendering effect.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 according to the above-described embodiment, in the first rotating body 650, the main body portion 651 and the front rendering portion 652 are integrated, and the storage flange portion 653 is separated. Instead, the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 may be integrated, and the front effect portion 652 may be a separate body so that the first rotating body 650 is formed. Also with this configuration, as in the case of the above embodiment, the structure and assembly process for rotatably holding the plurality of rotating bodies can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case where the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front rendering unit 662 of the second rotator 660 is formed with the front surface (front surface) as a flat surface has been described. However, part or all of the front surface may be replaced with a flat surface to have another shape. Examples of other shapes include a surface having a plurality of irregularities, a surface formed in a corrugated cross section, an inclined surface, a curved surface, or a surface combining these. When these other shapes are adopted, not only diffuse reflection or refraction of light emitted from the light emitting element 682 and transmitted through the inner peripheral side portion 662 b, but also irregular reflection of the second rotary body 660 as it rotates Since motion can be given in the direction of refraction, the rendering effect can be enhanced (see FIG. 39).

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case has been described in which the outer diameter size of the front rendering portion 662 of the second rotator 660 is set to a size that overlaps only a part of the front gear 646 in front view ( However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer diameter dimension of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 may be set to a size that overlaps the entire front gear 646 when viewed from the front. Thereby, since the front gear 646 can be shielded by the front effect part 662, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for making the front gear 646 invisible to the player. Note that if the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player, the front gear 646 can be a larger-diameter gear, so that the degree of freedom in setting the gear ratio can be increased. Therefore, the change in rotation of the second rotating body 660 with respect to the first rotating body 650 can be increased.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the description of the stop positions of the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 is omitted, but it may be configured as follows. That is, the mountain shape of at least one or both of the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotator 650 or the second rotator 660 is formed to a size that can shield the front gear 646 when viewed from the front. The rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 may be stopped at a phase position in which the portion of the shape is disposed in front of the front gear 646. Thereby, the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player when the rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 is stopped.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

Second Embodiment
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, a control process (a process related to control of a game such as display effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be described.

<Mechanical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1-3, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 49) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17.

  The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the background mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later is changed or the content of the notice effect is changed. Ru. Further, the frame button 22 may be configured to be used as a switch for driving, for example, a driving combination or the like provided in a game machine.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In addition, with the pachinko machine where the ball is directly lent out to the upper tray 17 from the ball lending device etc without passing through the card unit, so-called cash machine, the ball operation unit 40 is unnecessary, but in this case, the ball operation unit 40 A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the electric accessory 640 a, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with wood screws. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 49) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of special symbol 1 (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first winning opening 64, and a special symbol 2 (when the ball enters the second winning opening 640) The first symbol) is drawn, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. A special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 will be referred to as a special symbol) for the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Whether the symbol is a big hit or not is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the type of jackpot is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses) or 10 balls are won ) Is released, and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. There are two types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the drawing of the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37 and the predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) After 30 seconds, etc.), the special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entering the ball is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first It is shown by the symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 while the special symbol is moving, the number of ball entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is shown on the first symbol display device 37 Both are also shown for the third symbol display device 81. Note that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is shown in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in an identifiable display mode. As will be described in detail later, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that the number of holding balls, the variation display mode of the special symbol, the determination result, etc. can be easily identified for the player than the first symbol display device 37 The normal player is configured to play a game by viewing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81.

  When the variation display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of holding balls for the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 remains, a lottery of the next special symbol is performed, and the lottery is performed. The variable display according to is started. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of holding balls of the second winning opening 640 has priority over the number of holding balls of the first winning opening 64, and the drawing of the special symbol 2 is performed. The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. Therefore, the lottery with respect to the reserved ball of the first winning port 64 is configured to be executed when there is no reserved ball at the second winning port 640. While the special symbol 2 variation is being performed, the special symbol 1 variation is not performed. That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured such that there is no period in which they simultaneously change.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured not to vary at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to vary simultaneously. By configuring in this manner, more lotterys of the game can be executed in a short time, and the determination result can be displayed, so that the game can be performed more efficiently.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the second winning opening 640 restricts the ball entry into the ball entry opening state where the game ball can be guided to the ball entry into the ball entry port where the game ball enters the ball entrance. And an electric part 640a having a rotatable wing member in the closed state. The motorized part 640a is operated from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time based on the winning (a win) of the normal symbol (second symbol) described later. In addition, normally, it is held in an upright state so as to prevent the entry of game balls from both sides of the entrance, so that the game balls are prevented from entering between the blade members. A first winning opening 64 is arranged. Therefore, the second winning opening 640 is normally configured so as to be able to enter the ball only when the electric accessory 640a is activated. Therefore, normally, the game ball is configured to easily enter the first winning port 64, and the player plays the game by firing the game ball so as to enter the first winning port 64. It becomes a thing.

  Note that the special prize opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the second prize opening 640. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a special winning opening 65a, so many balls enter the first winning opening 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first winning opening 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. There are two types of normal symbol hits: a normal hit and a normal hit, and a long time in which the opening time and the number of releases increase. When the normal symbol is hit normally or for a long time, the electric accessory attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 2 seconds), and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. The ball is easy to enter. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640, and as a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable symbol display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is retained up to four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also shown. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery is started Ru.

  As described above, there are two types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. In both cases of “big hit A” and “big hit B”, a special gaming state (16R big hit) with 16 rounds is set. Then, in the case of "big hit A", as added value after the big hit end, the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol (after the big hit end until the jackpot game of the next special symbol starts) Move on to the special symbol). On the other hand, “hit B” has a higher probability of winning a normal symbol from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. In the high probability state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is similarly set up.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” means a state where the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, the special gaming state (16R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the normal symbol has a big hit probability (Special symbol normal state or low probability gaming state). In addition, “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time short-time or short-time game state) is a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640. Say In contrast, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state" is called "ordinary symbol normal state" (ordinary gaming state), this is the normal symbol hit probability is normal state, that is, a state where hit probability is lower than time saving Show that. Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the special symbol jackpot ends is referred to as a special symbol probability change period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the period from the end of the “big hit A” to the start of the next big hit is the definite variation period, but it is not limited thereto. A period during which a lottery of special symbols may be executed may be set as a probability variation period. In addition, the "big hit A" and the "big hit B" may both be set to be a definite variation period for a predetermined number of times. Also, the definite variation period may naturally be a definite variation period during a predetermined time (such as 2 minutes or 5 minutes).

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, it is always set to the "special symbol low probability state". After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”.

  In addition, while "the high probability state of special symbol" is continued, when the jackpot of the special symbol is newly made and the jackpot type is "big hit A", "the high probability state of special symbol" is further that It will be continued from the end of the new special symbol jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are lit depending on whether or not the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 which is performed along with the ball entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning) is being executed. Display a variable display or show a special symbol 1 (first symbol) or a special symbol 2 (first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol as a stop symbol after the end of the variation by lighting. Among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose variation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

  A ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 while the variation display of the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is performed in the first symbol display device 37. In the case of a ball, the number of times of ball entry is held up to four times, respectively, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum holding number is limited to four times Instead, it may be set three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot) A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to B) is shown.

  Note that, for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, separate dedicated LEDs 37a are respectively assigned for displaying the symbol and displaying the number of reserved balls. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to configure so that the player can distinguish between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 more easily.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), it is used as a trigger to correspond to the starting opening entered in the first symbol display device 37. The variable display of the symbol is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a view for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 40 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 40B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is constituted by the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 49) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the odd number "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are aligned and stopped. Further, if “big hit B”, the variable display in which the main symbols of “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” which are even numbers are aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the upper 2/3 of the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and other than that The lower one-third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The approximate center of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 (reserved balls), and the small area Ds2 is The area for displaying the notice effect image, and the small area Ds3 is the area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the second winning opening 640. It is.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 40B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the central part, the main symbols arranged before and after it are displayed visibly, so a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub display area Ds, one “●” symbol is displayed for one holding ball, and the holding symbols corresponding to up to four holding balls for each of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are displayed. Is displayed. That is, up to eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In the present embodiment, the same reserved symbol (design) is used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, but this is not restrictive. The symbol 2 may be configured to be displayed by "□" symbol).

  As a result, the holding balls of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, that is, the holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be easily identified and displayed. In addition, since the display mode of the holding ball entering the second winning opening 640 is displayed differently depending on the hit type of the normal symbol, the player is allowed to easily discriminate that the holding ball has been generated for a long time be able to.

  In the present embodiment, in the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the main symbol, the hold symbol, etc. described above, the character display and the notice effect display such as the character, etc. The display of the number of changes is appropriately displayed. Also, when the holding symbol is not displayed, it indicates that the number of holding balls is 0, that is, there is no holding ball.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first winning opening 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, in place of the display of the number-of-parking balls number symbol in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the number of holding balls is divided into a number of parts of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different by an amount. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Continuously, with reference to FIGS. 41-44, the display aspect of the pending production performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is demonstrated. In the second embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbol of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is variably displayed to notify of the result of the game or the variation pattern type to be selected. . In the present embodiment, a normal holding effect as shown in FIG. 41 and eight effects as shown in FIG. 42 are respectively set. As for the normal holding effect, as shown in FIGS. 41A to 41B, when the holding number is less than 8, one of the holding symbols is changed to a symbol displayed as “push”. It is displayed (FIG. 41 (a)). When the player presses the frame button 22 after being variably displayed on the symbol displayed as “push”, the symbol is variably displayed as a “Δ” symbol (see FIG. 41B).

  In this embodiment, when a reserved symbol for which super reach is selected is stored in the stored reserved symbol, or when a reserved symbol for which the determination result is true is stored, the normal reserved symbol is executed by lottery. When it is lottery, the held symbol is displayed variably as a "push" symbol as shown in FIG. 41 (a). In addition, this "push" symbol is a notification holding symbol that informs the player to press (operate) the frame button 22. As long as the frame button 22 is not pressed, the display mode of the notification holding symbol is maintained and displayed until the holding symbol starts to change.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that it might be displayed by alerting | holding symbol until it becomes a fluctuation | variation start, you may comprise not only it but it may be displayed by alerting | holding symbol only for a fixed time. In addition, although the normal holding effect is configured to be executed by lottery when the holding symbol to be the super reach is stored and the holding symbol to be the big hit is stored, it is not limited thereto, but other than that It may be configured to be executed by lottery also in the case of (e.g., normal reach, out of range, etc.). The symbols displayed variably from the notification suspension symbols may be set in various ways, and the result of determination of acceptance or rejection, the type of reach, etc. may be notified by the symbol type, the color, etc. Further, by configuring the normal holding effect so that it is easy to be drawn when the success / failure determination result is a big hit, it is possible to make the jackpot more expectable when the normal holding effect is displayed.

  Next, eight effects will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, when the number of holdings reaches the maximum of eight, whether or not to perform eight effects (see FIGS. 42A to 42B) using all eight holding symbols is drawn, When it is determined that eight effects are to be executed, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), all the held symbols are variably displayed as the notification held symbols of the "push" symbol. Then, on the right end, a notification mode (notification mode that is not a reserved symbol) in which the characters “Please press!” Are displayed, and it is configured to prompt the user to press the frame button 22.

  When the player presses the frame button 22 during a period in which the eight effects are being executed, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the notification suspension symbol is displayed variably into characters one by one. Here, one notification hold symbol is variably displayed each time the frame button 22 is pressed once. The variable order is configured to change sequentially from the notification holding symbol displayed on the left.

  It is determined whether or not the eight effects are to be executed by lottery when there is a stored memory that is super reach or a stored memory that is a big hit among the eight stored stored stored symbols. Be done.

  In the eight hold effect, notification is performed to the player by letters using eight hold symbols. Specifically, when the word “big hit !!!!!” is displayed, it is informed that there is a hold memory in which the determination result is a big hit in the eight hold memories (it is determined that a big hit will be confirmed). doing. On the other hand, if the word “big hit !!!!!” is displayed, there is a possibility that the reserved memory that is a big hit is stored in the eight reserved memories (the big hit is in the eight reserved memories). Is notified that it is undecided that the pending storage is stored.

  With this configuration, when the player presses the frame button 22 once after the eight effect notification hold symbols are displayed, the leftmost notification hold symbol is changed to “large” and displayed. Be done. By displaying this character, the player first presses the frame button 22 in expectation of the character of "big hit". Here, when “OK” is displayed, next, the frame button 22 is pressed to expect that the characters “R” will be displayed. In this way, seven notification hold symbols are variably displayed, and when the character "big hit !!!" is displayed, the last notification hold symbol (the hold symbol on the far right) left is "! The expectation to the jackpot will be high if it may be changed to Thereafter, when the player operates the frame button 22, the player can determine the notification result. As described above, in the eight-holding effect, each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the game can be performed while expecting the next displayed character, and the player can be entertained.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if the holding ball is digested and the fluctuation is started, the remaining notification holding symbols changed by eight effects are maintained and displayed, so that the player can obtain the remaining notification holding symbols. It is possible to predict what character (informing mode) has been set from the character.

  In this embodiment, since eight reservations are stored, effects are produced that are advantageous to the player are executed, so the player is allowed to play the game so that the ball is more stored. Can. Specifically, when a long fluctuation pattern (high expectation to jackpot) such as super reach is usually selected, the player may stop playing the game ball and play a game. However, during that time, it is also a period during which the holding balls are easy to accumulate, so that the player can play the game without stopping the firing of the game balls so that eight effects are executed even when the balls come off. it can.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that eight presentation may be performed for the fixed time after eight presentations are performed, if eight reservation balls are memorize | stored. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game ball and to play the game so as to generate more reserved balls.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the alerting | reporting aspect (character to be displayed) determined at the timing when eight production | presentation was performed may be changed with the determination result, when a new holding ball generate | occur | produces. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide pleasure for the player to determine the timing for changing the notification suspension symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 44, the combined display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described. Synthetic display effect means that when the reach display mode is selected, the secondary symbol (blank symbol “△”) is changed to the “push” symbol after the main symbol that is out of the middle symbol is temporarily stopped. After being displayed, the "push" symbol is moved to the center of the third symbol display device 81, and is variably displayed as a "push" symbol having a large size. Thereafter, when the player presses the frame button 22, a combination of main symbols indicating the result of the pass / fail judgment is displayed again. Specifically, if the determination result is a win, it is displayed in a combination indicating a big hit such as “777”. On the other hand, if it is off, it is displayed with a symbol indicating the off, such as “717”.

  FIG. 43 (a) shows a state where the variation pattern of the combined display mode is displayed and the reach display mode with the "7" symbol is displayed, and the middle symbol is variably displayed. In the case of reach, except for the variation pattern of the composite display mode, the middle symbol is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) beyond the symbol which is the reach. That is, the reach symbol is scrolled once through the reach effective line. However, in the variation pattern of the composite display mode, the reach symbol is set to temporarily stop in front of the reach line without passing through the reach effective line. That is, the reach period is set shorter than the normal reach display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (b), after the “5” symbol before the reach symbol stops at the reach effective line, a sub-second arranged between the main symbols of the left symbol row and the right symbol row after 3 seconds The symbol (blank symbol “Δ”) is variably displayed as the informing symbol of the small “push” symbol. Among the fluctuation patterns of the synthetic display mode, the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo synthetic display mode is configured not to be variable to the synthetic display mode from being changed to the notification symbol. In this case, when the frame button 22 is pressed, an effect of changing the “5” symbol of the stopped middle symbol again is executed.

  On the other hand, in the variation pattern changed to the composite display mode, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the “5” symbol of the middle symbol row in which the “push” symbol is displayed at the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. It moves and is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44B, the “5” symbol is covered and a large “push” symbol is displayed. The variation pattern of the composite display mode in which the large "push" symbol is displayed is extremely easy to be selected when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a big hit, so that the player can display this composite display mode. , Have high expectations for jackpots.

  Next, the time effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The time effect is changed to a dedicated background image set in advance for a predetermined time (five minutes in the present embodiment) every predetermined time (a certain period) after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. This is an effect mode to be executed. In the present embodiment, the clocking means 292 configured by an RTC (real time clock) is provided, and since the internal power supply (battery in the present embodiment) dedicated to the clocking means 292 is provided, the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 Timekeeping can be continued even in the unsupplied state. Here, when manufacturing the pachinko machine 10, by setting the same time (for example, the present time) to the clock means and manufacturing, it is configured to supply power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 simultaneously. The same insertion time information can be acquired between the pachinko machines 10. With this configuration, the time effect can be executed in synchronization between the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing the timing of executing the time presentation period. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the current time information is clocked by the time setting process (S1214 in FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 described later (see FIG. 68). Obtained from Based on the acquired time information, a time effect period (effect mode B) is set after 55 minutes have elapsed. It should be noted that the normal gaming machine period (effect mode A) is set as the period until the time effect period is set. The time effect period is normally set to 5 minutes, and when the 5 minutes have elapsed, the normal game period is set.

  Here, when the time production period of 5 minutes elapses, it is determined whether a holding memory stored at that time or a special symbol that is fluctuating is set so that the determination result is a big hit, and a big hit is obtained. If one is set, the time rendering extension period (rendering mode C) is set as the time until the variation ends.

  Fig. 46 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of time effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining time in the time effect period is 180 seconds. During the time effect period, the background image is a display mode in which a dedicated school of fish is displayed.

  FIG. 46 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining time in the time effect period is 3 seconds. In the example of FIG. 46 (b), the actual third symbol is reduced and variably displayed at the lower right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. And the effect design similar to the 3rd design is stopped and displayed in the display mode which showed the detachment. In this case, the effect symbol is displayed in a slightly shaken manner to notify that it is not completely stopped and displayed. In this way, the end timing of the time effect period and the change stop timing of the third symbol are rarely matched, but by switching to the effect symbol and displaying it as if the third symbol was stopped and displayed. It is possible to make it seem as if the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the same timing as other pachinko machines 10. The effect symbol is also displayed when the stop timing of the third symbol coincides with the time effect period. By comprising in this way, the display mode at the time of completion | finish of a time production period becomes constant, and it can suppress making a player feel uncomfortable.

  When the rendering symbol is stopped and displayed 3 seconds before the remaining period, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), a prognostic display mode is displayed in which the rendering symbol is slightly shaken for 3 seconds. Then, after the character "super fish school time" indicating that it is a time presentation period, a notification mode which is the timing of the division of whether "end?" Is extended or not is displayed. After that, when the time effect extension period is set, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the text “Super fish time extension!” Notifying that the time effect period has been extended is displayed, and the background image of the fish school. Is displayed again. In this case, at the same time as the extension start, the effect symbol starts variable display, and the player is notified as if a new special symbol change is started. Further, since the extension period is a period until the variable display, which is a big hit, is ended, the remaining period (115 seconds in the example of FIG. 47B) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the time effect period is extended, the time effect is extended because the hold memory for the big hit is set, or the change is already started (during the change). This means that the player 4a is notified of the jackpot. Here, in the time effect period, the same effect is executed synchronously between the same pachinko machines 10, and the effect (see FIG. 47 (a)) indicating whether the extension period is set at the same timing is displayed Be done. Thereby, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 10 for which the extension period is set is a big hit from other players, and the gambling feelings of other players can be obtained.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48, when the extension effect is not set, the characters “Super fish school time end !!” are displayed to notify that the time effect period has ended. After that, when the third symbol is changing, the effect pattern is displayed in the same time as the remaining changing time of the third symbol, and then it is stopped and displayed. From the next change, the reduced display of the third symbol is canceled, and the third symbol is changed and displayed in the normal size. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort even when the time effect period ends. On the other hand, when the timing at which the third symbol is stopped and displayed matches the end timing of the time effect period, the reduced display of the third symbol is canceled and displayed from the start of the next change.

  Note that if the change has already ended at the end timing of the time effect period and no hold memory is stored, the precursor effect is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot condition is set as the condition under which the extension is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set as a pending storage in which the fluctuation pattern to be the super reach is selected. It may be configured to be set when a lottery is made and it becomes a win.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 changes display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol performed in conjunction with the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is being executed, and is stopped after the end of the change. As a symbol, the normal symbol (the second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variation display in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lighted To be done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, the second winning opening 640 is configured so as to easily enter a ball. The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is not limited to four, and the number of holding balls is not limited to four, and is three or less, or five or more The number of times (for example, eight times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, there are disposed a first winning opening 64 and a second winning opening 640 where balls can enter. When the ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. Due to the first ball entry switch and the second ball entry switch being turned on, a lottery for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 is made by the main control unit 110, and the display according to the lottery result is the first symbol display device 37 Is shown by the LED 37a. Further, the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 are also one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters.

  In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls when entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is the same, but is not limited thereto, and may be different numbers of winning balls. For example, when entering the first winning opening 64, the number of winning balls for the second winning opening 640 as the four winning balls when entering the second winning opening 640 as the three winning balls It is also possible to set more than the number of winning balls for one winning opening 64.

  On the other hand, when the number of winning balls in the second winning port 640 is set to be smaller than that of the first winning port 64, it is possible to design so that more game balls are won in the second winning port 640 during the probability change period or in a shorter time. As a result, the number of balls reserved for special symbol 2 can be maintained at a larger number, and efficient games can be played. Therefore, during the time saving, the game time of the definite variation period can be shortened, and the sales on the gaming shop side can be further increased.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second winning port 640, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (16 rounds of big hit) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 49). ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 49), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first hit type counter C2 used for the first time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and the change type counter CS1 used for the change pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 67). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a consisting of four holding areas (the first to fourth holding areas) for storing the holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the holding balls of the special symbol 2 Special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth area) of each is provided, and the common special symbol holding ball execution area of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 is It is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first collision type counter C2 is stored according to the timing of entering the first winning opening 64. Similarly, the same value is stored for each area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of entering the second winning opening 640.

  Also, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and a ball passes through each of these areas. The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the gate 67.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 57).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The random number value that is a special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the special symbol jackpot random number table C1. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is the jackpot. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used for special symbols at low probability (period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at high probability (special symbols) that have a higher probability of winning a special symbol than that low probability. And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. A special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability and a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Provided in

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit classification counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol 1 hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that makes the big win of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that causes the special symbol to go out, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that will be the big win of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode is for the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the present embodiment, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are set for the big hit type, and either "big hit A" or "big hit B" is set by the first hit type counter C2. Is determined. A display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, at the low probability of the special symbol, there are three random number values that become the big wins of the special symbol, and the random number "7, 107, 282" is the special symbol for low probability Stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 3, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/100".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random number values that become the jackpot of the special symbol, and the value is "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability Is stored in As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 30, so the probability of being a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/10".

  In the present embodiment, the random number value for the big hit stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability time, and the random number value for the big hit stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol or low probability state of special symbol), change the random number value to be a big hit Since it can be made difficult to predict the random number value which becomes the jackpot of a special symbol by this, suppression against fraud can be aimed at.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 59” in the first jackpot type counter C2 set in the jackpot type selection table (not shown) is “jackpot A”. The jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (see FIG. 52 (b)). The table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines rough display modes such as so-called short time deviation, long time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 The The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 67) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It has been.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, variation pattern selection tables for selecting a variation pattern dedicated to the special symbol 1 are set for each gaming state (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state, probability variation gaming state). In addition, although it demonstrates in detail by description about the selection of the fluctuation | variation pattern in the audio lamp control apparatus 113 mentioned later, in the main control apparatus 110, it is based on the determination result, the number of reservation balls, and the value of the fluctuation | variation classification counter CS1. Then, the contents of the rough fluctuation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the fluctuation time are determined, and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the contents of the determination is set.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), if the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired is any one of 5 to 20 at the low probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol is normal It is determined that it is a win. On the other hand, when the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired is any one of 5 to 204 at the high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that it is a normal hit of the normal symbol.

  Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit. Therefore, when the probability is low, it is possible to lower the frequency at which the motorized prize 640a is operated and to reduce the frequency at which the second winning opening 640 is entered. Therefore, it is possible to enter the first winning opening 64 mainly, thereby increasing the game ball consumption of the player and increasing the profit of the gaming shop side. On the other hand, in the high-probability time-span and mid-term and definite change periods, the opportunity to operate the motorized accessory 640a can be given with the probability of 1 / 1.2, and the chance of entering the second winning opening 640 is increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to set a gaming state advantageous to the player while suppressing the player's consumption of the game ball. Therefore, a player can play a game aiming at a game with a high probability, and can play a game for a longer time.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “○” is lit. Then, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "5 to 20", the second winning opening 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal hit. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in a normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 53A) for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the normal symbol. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ) And the second winning opening 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the release period of the second winning opening 640 Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times” is very long, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only “2 seconds × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 67).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 50, the RAM 203 is a stack area where the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the cancellation of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power interruption. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 67), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 65) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 holding ball number. It has a counter 203d, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, a time saving counter 203g, a probability change flag 203h, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol 1 and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, Each value of the per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data includes four holding areas (the first holding area). Among the vacant areas of the area to the reserved fourth area), the areas with the smallest area number (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the special symbol 2.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas with the smallest area number (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  It should be noted that when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes empty, so similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the winning combinations stored in the other holding areas A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first winning opening 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases to 1 at maximum value 1 each time Addition is performed (see S404 in FIG. 61). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S307 in FIG. 60).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command. The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is changed.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is a counter for counting the holding balls based on winning in the second winning opening 640, and the other configuration is the same as the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d, so Detailed description is omitted.

  The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the fluctuation display suspended in the main control device 110 by the suspension ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 retention ball number counter 203 d is changed. You can get the value of the ball number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display controlled by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the maximum number of holding balls (number of waits) of the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 64). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 63).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 64). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (FIG. 64, S703: No).

  The hour / minute counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the ordinary symbol hour / short state. If the value of the time counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the counter 203g is set to zero, and a lottery for a special symbol is performed in the main control unit 110, and a value according to the jackpot type is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot Be done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is newly set regardless of how many values of the hour / middle counter 203g are.

  The probability change flag 203h is a flag indicating that the game state is a probability change game state. When the probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state, the probability variation flag 203h is set to ON. The probability variation flag 203h is set off when the big hit B is won. In the initialized state, it is set to off.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 65) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the variation pattern selection table 222a is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Also, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c, a normal symbol reserved ball Number counter 223d, change start flag 223e, stop type selection flag 223f, effect counter 223g, hold effect flag 223h, eight effect flag 223i, set time storage area 223j, effect mode storage area 223k, normal period flag 223m, start period flag 223o, an extension effect flag 223p, an extension effect time storage area 223q, a button effect flag 223r, a button effect counter 223s, and other memory areas 223z.

  The winning information storage area 223 a is an area in which winning information is stored corresponding to the holding ball based on the winning command output from the main control device 110. As the winning information, various kinds of information such as a determination result, a variation pattern, and a stop type are set.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is a storage area in which the number of holding balls of the special symbol 1 is stored based on the holding ball command. The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c is a storage area in which the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 is stored based on the holding ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d is a storage area in which the number of holding balls of the normal symbol is stored based on the holding ball command.

  The variation start flag 223e is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start variation of the third symbol.

  The stop type selection flag 223 f is a flag indicating a stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a stop state based on the stop type command output from the main control device 110.

  The effect counter 223 g is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for determining various effects and details of fluctuation patterns, and for performing various lottery and the like. This effect counter 223h is repeatedly updated in the main process in the range of 0 to 198.

  The hold effect flag 223h is a flag indicating that the normal hold effect is being executed. The normal holding effect is set to be performed, and the holding symbol is set to be off based on the timing when the fluctuation starts.

  The eight effect flag 223i is a flag indicating that eight effects are being executed. It is set to ON based on the fact that eight effects are determined to be executed, and is switched off based on the timing at which the eighth reserved symbol displayed when eight effects are executed starts changing. It is a flag set to

  The set time storage area 223i is a storage area in which time information for executing the time effect period is stored. In this set time storage area 223i, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the time setting process in the start process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 113 of the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 69, S1214) In S1222, the information of the time presentation period is set for 24 hours.

  The effect mode storage area 223 k is a storage area in which information on the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C is stored (set). In the effect mode, if the current effect mode is the normal game period (out of the time effect period), the effect mode A is stored, and if it is the time effect period, the effect mode B is stored, if it is the extended time effect period, the effect Mode C is stored.

  The normal period flag 223m is a flag indicating that the normal game period is started. By setting the normal period flag 223m to ON, the background image is changed from the time effect period or the extension time effect period to a background image corresponding to the normal game period. In that case, after the background image shown in FIG. 48 is displayed, the background image showing the normal game period is displayed.

  The start period flag 223o is a flag indicating that the time effect period is started. By setting this time effect period to ON, a background image (see FIG. 46A) of the super fish school indicating that it is a time effect period is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The extension effect flag 223p is a flag indicating that the time effect extension period is started. When this time effect extension period is set, a background image showing the time effect extension period shown in FIG. 47 (b) is set.

  The extension effect time storage area 223 q is a storage area in which the time until the end of the fluctuation that becomes the big hit is calculated when the time effect extension period is set, and information indicating the time is stored. Based on the value of the extended effect time storage area 223q, the remaining time of the time effect extension period is displayed.

  The button effect flag 223r is a flag indicating that the variation pattern for executing the button effect is selected. It is determined that the button effect is executed by this flag.

  The button effect counter 223s is a counter for selecting a display mode of the button effect.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 71) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Control). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 65) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots and the number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output data after Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 fail data different in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. And, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 84) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 57) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 85B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. This area stores the corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and entry of the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the fluctuation effect.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 83).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display a power-on main image (not shown). 3 Display on the symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is "out of special symbol", the image showing it will stop the changing effect Displayed for a fixed period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the images showing “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 40) with the numerals "0" to "9" being the third symbol are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 despite the fact that the fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the production is not started immediately.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset release. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters the ball, the electric jackpot becomes a big hit of an ordinary symbol and the ball is a second winning opening It becomes easy to get to 640 and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, it is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls or a state in which the number of balls is not reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get the jackpot of the special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table.

  When the MPU 231 specifies to display any one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (in the sea, on the beach, the background for the preparation period, or the background dedicated to the time effect) according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified with the passage of time.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 55) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 57) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 56 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 56).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 56, In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 57) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 56, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the power-on image (not shown) (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2005 in FIG. 83). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3605 in FIG. 95B).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 85 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 85 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (see FIG. 85B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 85 (b) (see S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 86 to 91) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 92 to 94) are executed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3501 of FIG. 95A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 95 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 57), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 57), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 57) described later (see FIG. 57) describing the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. ) (See S2303), pointer update processing (see S3105 in FIG. 70B) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 57), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, obtain the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 57, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3107 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Then, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i is performed when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3713 in FIG. 96). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 96). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 97).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 85B) is performed, the process is performed (see S3802 in FIG. 97).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated with power on and a main process executed after the start-up process, and activated periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment) There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start-up. Processing and main processing will be described.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 299, 99, 239), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104), and thereafter, The start-up winning process is executed in association with the winning (starting-up winning) to the first winning opening 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed To do (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S203). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S204). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the stop type selection counter C3 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation If the time has not passed (S204: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S204: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S205). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S203) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. A special symbol lottery will be held. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first per random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the second per category counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S205 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S206). If the lottery result this time is a big hit of the special symbol (S206: Yes), it is determined what the big hit type is among the big hit (big hit A, big hit B) of the two kinds of special symbols (S207), big hit type Is a big hit B, 100 is set to the hour / minute counter 203g of the RAM 203 (S209). Thereafter, the process of S210 is performed. If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability that is a probability variation period (S208). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S210), and the present process is ended.

  In the process of S206, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the special symbol (S206: No), it is determined whether the value of the time counter 203g is 1 or more (S211), the value of the time counter 203g is 1 If it is the above (S211: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S212), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S211: No), the process of S212 is skipped and this process is ended.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S203). This special symbol variation start process (S203) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 59) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the special symbol retention 1 ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (judgment judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "out of special symbol" While performing, it is processing for determining the production pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production performed with the 1st symbol display 37 and the 3rd symbol display 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process (S203), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) (S301). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S302), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 ((S302) S302: Yes, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S303), and the holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S304). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S304, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number area 203b is shifted (S305). In the process of S305, data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After the process of S305 is executed, a process of acquiring data of the execution area in the special symbol holding ball number storage area is executed (S310).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S302 that the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 (S302: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S301. It is determined whether (N1) is 0 (S306). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S306: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S306, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S306: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S307), and sets a ball holding number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation (S308). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S308, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S309). In the process of S309, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After the data is shifted, the values of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are obtained. (S310).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S311). The determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not a probability variation flag (not shown) is on. The probability variation flag is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S311: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special variation state of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S312. In the process of S312, a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S310 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability ( S312). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol large random number table for high probability one by one. As mentioned above, as a random value which becomes the big hit of the special symbol, “4, 11, 28, 38, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168 , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the number of these rounds Is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol when the random numbers match. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S314.

  On the other hand, in the process of S311, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (S311: No), the process of S313 is executed. In the process of S313, based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S310 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained ( S313). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 3 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. Three random numbers “7, 107, 282” are set as special symbol jackpots, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits them. It is determined that it is a big hit of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S314.

  In the process of S314, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S312 or S313 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S314), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S314: Yes), based on the value of the second hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S310, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S315). More specifically, the value of the second hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S310 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the big hit of two types of special symbols (big hit A, Among jackpots B), it is determined what kind of jackpot. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that the jackpot A (16R jackpot, probability change period up to the next jackpot after jackpot game), "60- If it is in the range of "99", it is determined that the jackpot B (16R jackpot, 100 times a short time of the normal symbol).

  In the process of S315, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big jack A, jack B). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S316). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S316, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third pattern display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the fluctuation pattern, the main control unit 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol to notify of the result of the judgment of acceptance, and notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the fluctuation time. In the voice lamp control device 113, the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the variation time and the result of the determination of success or failure. In the main controller 110, even in the display mode of the outreach, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to the display mode of the out which is not the reach display mode as long as the change time is the same. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, as variation patterns for outliers, various types such as "displacement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short duration)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach", and "disappearing special reach" are defined. ing. As the variation pattern of jackpot A and jackpot B common use, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

  In the process of S314, when it is determined that the special symbol is off (S314: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S317). In the process of S317, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the value of the stop type selection counter C <b> 3, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S318). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S317, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, symbol fluctuation such as normal reach or super reach Determine the variation time.

  Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S316 or S318 is set (S319). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the stop type selection counter C3 set in the process of S316 or S318 is set (S320). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 67). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S320 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58) to determine the presence or absence of a winning on the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and when there is a start winning, This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball. The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command of the special symbol 1 indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the second per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, about S407-S411, about each process of S401-S406 demonstrated above, the process with respect to having won the 1st prize opening 64 is changed into the process with respect to having won the 2nd prize opening 640, Since the same processing is executed, detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, when the game ball is won in the second winning opening 640, also when stored as a holding ball, each value of the first random number counter C1 and the second hit type counter C2 is acquired, and the corresponding special It is stored in the empty reservation area of the symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b.

  In this way, by acquiring the respective values of the first per-random number counter C1 and the second per-type counter C2 for the special symbol 2 based on the entrance to the second winning port 640, the same as the special symbol 1. Since the lottery can be executed using a common random number for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the winning probability can be made constant for both the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

  After performing the process of S411, a prefetch process is performed (S412). The details of the pre-reading process (S412) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Thus, a process for determining in advance each lottery result executed at the start of variation is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is selected based on the ball entry, but may be selected at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, there is no need for a storage area for storing the value of each counter until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the counters, a part of the counters (for example, only the stop type selection counter C3) may be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, a counter related to the hit / not determination at the time of entering the ball can be obtained, and a counter not involved in the hit / off determination can be obtained later, and the amount of data to be stored is maintained while maintaining the fairness of the game. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the prefetching process (S412) which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S412).

  In the prefetching process (FIG. 62, S412), first, based on the acquired value of the first hit random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the determination of success / failure at the start of fluctuation is a big hit (S501). The determination of success / failure at the start of change is a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area indicating whether the game state at the start of change is a normal game state (low probability) or a probability change game state (high probability game state). The determination is made based on whether or not the counter value stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is variably displayed and the hit type. When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S501: Yes), a winning command indicating a jackpot is set (S502). On the other hand, in the process of S501, if the determination result is not a big hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not it is an outlier super reach (S503). If it is determined in the process of S503 that the game is out of super reach (S503: Yes), a winning command indicating that it is out of super reach is set (S504). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S503 that it is not an outlier super reach (S503: No), a winning command indicating that it is out is set (S505). As described above, since the result of the determination of whether or not prior to the start of the fluctuation is output as a winning command to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a holding ball is established, the sound lamp control device 113 It is possible to recognize in advance the result of the pass / fail judgment and the hit type. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can change the player's advance notice determination result for the hold ball to the player based on the winning command (for example, the color of the hold symbol can be changed to a color for notifying the determination result). In addition, it is possible to execute an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the result of the determination of the success / failure in the holding ball. In addition, since the winning command is output as one winning command for the holding ball every time the holding ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the holding ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 58), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor attached to the second winning opening 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the special object 640a and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the second design, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit and the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is being performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the second symbol (S601: Yes), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the second symbol is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is determined. Is not being changed (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time is short (S608). If the time is not short (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. On the other hand, when it is in the time saving state (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S609). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included.

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), it shifts to the process of S610. In the process of S609, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), it proceeds to the process of S610.

  If the probability change or time is short (that is, the time is short state) (S609: Yes), if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol (S609: No), the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 Based on the value and the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 52 (c)) for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 52C).

  In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the probability random number table 202c for normal use (see FIG. 52C), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the ordinary random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 52C).

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so the electric role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened This is because it is possible to suppress, as much as possible, the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a to enter the second winning opening 640. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second winning opening 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol. Many balls enter in 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of balls held for the second winning opening 640 is maximum (four times).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the second symbol (S612), and if it is determined that it is a hit of the second symbol (S612: Yes), the display mode for winning is set (S613). Next, it is determined whether or not the time is short (S614).

  Then, if it is determined in the process of S614 that the time saving state is established (S614: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. , And the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 640a is set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619.

  When it is determined in the process of S614 that the time saving state is not set (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the second symbol, the opening period of the motorized jack 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is While setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to one (S617), and the process proceeds to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the second symbol is dislocated (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disengaging is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not it is in the time-short state (S619). If it is in the time-short state (S619: Yes), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds ( S620), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the time-short state in the process of S619 (S619: No), the change time of the change display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process ends. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the second symbol is high, the time of the variable display is very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the low probability of the second symbol, Further, since the release period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

  On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is discriminated (S622). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S 618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) in the second symbol display device 83 Are set to If the stop display is set by the process of S623, then the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 67) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 67) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). The through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if there is a ball passing, the second hit is made. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of variable display in normal symbol) is obtained (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  If the ball has not passed through gate 67 (S701: No), or if the ball has passed through gate 67, the value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S703) : No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area. Exit.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, referring to FIG. 66, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As a summary, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as periodic processing of 4 millisecond cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58), and if there is the winning detection information, corresponds to the winning ball number to the payout control device 111. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 58) and the start winning process (see FIG. 61) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process and the pre-reading process (see FIG. 62) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). Next, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the motorized product opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 640a is set in the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 63), the opening / closing control of the motorized workpiece 640a is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S613 or the process of S617 in FIG. 63 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S316 or the process of S318 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Begin at device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S315 or the process of S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60) ends. The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S315 or the processing of S317 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 60). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 63) or the process of S621, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation display. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 63), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. The display of the change is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighted display) in the display mode set by the processing of S613 in the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 63). Do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1009). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process of this time (S1009: No), the initial time within the predetermined time is reached, ie, within the remaining time to the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the remaining time, whereby the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the first per random number counter CINI2) The initial value of the random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the stop type selection counter C3 can be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

<Control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 68, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-off process in S1320 (see FIG. 70) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As described later with reference to FIG. 70, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1317 in FIG. 70), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1320. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1320 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1320 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1320, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1320, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1320 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 70). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1320 is performed, the process of S1208 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1320 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1208 is performed via the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the interrupt permission is set. In step S1211, the process proceeds to the main process. Thereafter, it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1212).

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that, when the process of S1208 is reached via the processes of S1204 to S1206, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S1214, a time setting process is executed (S1214). The time setting process (S1214) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the time setting process (S1214) which is one process in the start-up process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the time setting process (S1214). In the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214), the setting switch 291 is determined to determine whether or not to execute the time effect. If the setting is to execute the time effect, the time information is acquired from the RTC 292. Then, based on the time information, a process of setting the time effect period in the set time storage area 223j is executed.

  In the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214), first, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1221). As the time information acquired here, a value of “hour, minute” is acquired. Note that the RTC 292 is a timing unit having a battery inside, and is configured such that when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years. The RTC 292 also has a calendar function, and is configured to be able to determine the "date". Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to control to change to a background image exclusively for Christmas or to display a special character such as Santa.

  Next, based on the acquired time information, the preparation period and the time presentation period are respectively calculated and set in the set time storage area 223 j (S 1222).

  In this embodiment, based on the acquired time information, the preparation period for 24 hours and the time effect period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223j, but the invention is not limited thereto, but first, it is usually It is also possible to set 54 minutes to execute the game, count the period by counting down or counting up, and set the preparation period based on the elapse of 54 minutes. In addition, the time after 54 minutes may be set, and the time of the next period may be set when the time is reached. By configuring in this way, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S1301 this time is executed (S1301), and 1 millisecond If the above has not elapsed (S1301: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1312 without performing the process of S1302 to S1311. Whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in the processing of S1301 is mainly processing related to display (production) in S1302 to S1311, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1312, the change display setting process of S1313, and the process of updating various counter values not shown in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1302). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1304). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1305 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. Details of the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and a background image setting process is further executed (S1311). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1312. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1312, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1312). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process (FIG. 71, S1312) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1313). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1313 ends, the process of synchronous effect management process (S1314) is executed. The synchronization effect management process (S1314) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1314 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1319), and the power-off process is executed (S1320). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the command determination processing (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1312). This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on (S1402), and data of the corresponding winning information storage area is shifted (S1403). Thereafter, the advance notice selection process is executed (S1404), and the process proceeds to the process of S1419.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the notice selection processing (S1404) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the notice selection processing (S1404).

  In the advance notice selection process (S1404), first, the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S1501). It is determined whether the rendering mode set in the rendering mode storage area 223k is the rendering mode A (S1502). When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1502: Yes), the normal notice effect is selected based on the determination result and the value of the effect counter 223g (S1503). Thereafter, a display notice command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S1504).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when the rendering mode A is not set (S1502: No), it is determined whether the rendering mode C is set (S1505). When the effect mode C is set (S1505: Yes), if the result of the determination is a hit, the third symbol display device 81 is a display for showing a notice of super fish school in which a group of fish flows from right to left A notice command is set (S1507).

  On the other hand, if the rendering mode C is not set in the process of S1505 (S1505: No), or if the result of the determination in S1506 is not a win (S1506: No), this process ends.

  As described above, it is possible to switch and configure the display advance notice command to be set based on the set effect mode. In addition, since the advance notice effect is also determined based on the value of the effect counter 223g at the start of fluctuation, as a result of the judgment, there is no need to perform processing for determining the display start timing etc. and reducing control load be able to. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the advance notice is displayed is determined in advance by the variation pattern, and the display advance notice command indicating the timing is set, whereby the display control device 114 displays the advance notice at that timing. Set to be

  Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. After the notice selection process (FIG. 72, S1404) is executed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. If it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 74) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1408). If a reserved ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the number of held balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are extracted. The number of reserved balls is set for each (S1409).

  Here, the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the processing of S1407. Can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise etc., the values of special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of voice lamp control device 113 are special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of main controller 110, special symbol 2 Even if it deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when the start winning is detected or when the special symbol is drawn. Can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. In addition, when the processing of S1407 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is It is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the holding ball number command has not been received (S1408: No), it is next determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1410). When a winning command is received (S1410: Yes), a winning command receiving process is executed (S1411). Thereafter, processing according to other commands is executed (S1419), and the processing returns to the main processing. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball reaches the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), the main controller 110 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and The acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are respectively stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b. Further, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired in main controller 110, the inherent value of each counter C1 to C3 acquired separately from the big win lottery of the original special symbol Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading ends in the main control device 110, a winning command including various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 73, a winning command reception process (S1411) which is a process in the command determination process (FIG. 71, S1312) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a winning command reception process (S1411). In the winning command reception process, first, data is set in the winning information storage area corresponding to the received winning command (S1511), and the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S1512). Next, it is determined whether the eight effect flag 223i is on (S1513). If the eight effect flags 223i are on (S1514: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if the eight effect flag 223i is not on, whether the total number of reserved symbols in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is eight (that is, the first special symbol and Whether the number of reserved balls with the second special symbol is the maximum value) is determined (S1514).

  When the number of holding is eight (S1514: Yes), based on the effect counter 223g, an eight effect lottery is executed as to whether or not to perform a notice display mode executed for eight reserved balls ( S1519). Here, in the eight effect lottery, it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223g (counter updated in the range of 0 to 198) acquired in the processing of S1512 is any of “0 to 49”.

  When the result of the eight effect lottery executes eight effects (S1520: Yes), the eight effect flag 223i is turned on to set eight effects (S1522). On the other hand, when the result of eight effect lottery does not execute eight effects (S1520: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1514, if the number of holds is not eight (S1514: No), a normal hold effect is selected based on the value of the acquired effect counter 223g (S1515), and whether there is a change in the hold effect. It is determined (S1516). Here, when the received winning command is a hit, if the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 99”, the normal holding effect (the display mode of the holding symbol corresponding to the received winning command is shown in FIG. 41 (a As shown in), PUSH is selected and changed to the symbol displayed), otherwise the normal hold effect is not selected (ie, no change in the hold effect (display mode of the hold symbol)).

  If there is a change in the hold effect (S1516: Yes), the corresponding hold effect flag 223h is set to ON (S1517), and the selected normal hold effect is set (S1518). On the other hand, if there is no change in the hold effect (S1516: No), this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. In the process of S1410, when it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. The process returns to the main process (S1419). For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the holding effect to be displayed is set to be different depending on the difference in the number of holdings. When the number of held pieces reaches the maximum value, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), an effect mode different from the normal held effect (see FIG. 41 (a)) is displayed, so the player tries to increase the number of held pieces as much as possible. You can play games with motivation.

  Moreover, although it mentions later, it is changed by operating the frame button 22 to the holding symbol which alert | reports the yes / no determination result corresponding to the changed holding symbol in a normal holding production. Specifically, when the determination result is a win, the symbol is displayed variably by pressing the frame button 22 on a star symbol, and when the selected variation pattern is super reach, the triangle symbol is pressed. Ru. In addition, in the eight effect, the notification mode is determined based on the result of determination of acceptance or rejection for one of the eight reserved symbols being displayed or the type of the variation pattern. For example, as a notification mode based on which the jackpot that is a big hit is stored, when the frame button 22 is pressed for each of the eight PUSH symbols to be changed and displayed, as shown in FIG. The letters "Big wins !!!!" are displayed on. FIG. 42 (b) shows a state in which the second PUSH symbols are variably displayed.

  In the present embodiment, for the eight effects, when it is determined to execute the eight effects, an effect mode is displayed according to the determination result of the determination in the hold storage and the selected variation pattern type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that the number of holdings is eight, it is determined whether to execute eight effects and when it is determined to execute eight effects. Displays the reserved symbol display in a display manner as shown in FIG. When a hold memory that is a big hit in the hold memory is set in the hold memory, a notification mode (for example, “hit !!!!”) indicating a big win is set. On the other hand, in the case where a hold indicating that the success or failure judgment result is a big hit is not stored, a notification mode (for example, "big hit determination ????") for expecting a big hit is set, and the frame button 22 is pressed. If the reserved ball is digested before and a new reserved ball is stored, the notification mode set by the determination result of the reserved ball may be changed and set. In this case, if the determination result of the newly established holding ball is a jackpot, the notification mode (for example, jackpot determination is determined!) That suggests a jackpot is newly set as the notification mode. Also good. Thus, the player can enjoy the pleasure of determining the timing of pressing the frame button 22.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1313). This variable display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 74, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1601). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, and thus the process proceeds to S1605. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S1601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned off (S1602), and then fluctuation pattern selection processing is executed (S1603). The details of the variation pattern selection process (S1603) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 75, but the details of the variation pattern are determined according to the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 based on the current rendering mode. Is executed. As for the selection of the fluctuation pattern, a rough content such as a fluctuation time, a fluctuation type (reach, non-reach, etc.) is determined by a fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110, and the effect mode set in the sound lamp controller 113 is set. The contents of the variation mode to be actually displayed (details of the variation pattern) are determined by the value of the production counter or the like.

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1604). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1605.

  In the processing of S1605, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223f provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1605). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not on (that is, it is off) (S1605: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S1605: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S1606), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223. Obtain (S1607). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1608), and the process proceeds to S1609.

  In the processing of S1609, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1609). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S1609 is executed, this process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 75, variation pattern selection processing (S1603) which is one of the variation display setting processing (FIG. 74, S1313) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1603).

  In the variation pattern selection process (S1603), first, the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S1611). It is determined whether the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223k (S1612). If it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1612: Yes), button effect selection processing is executed (S1613). Thereafter, this process is terminated. The button effect selection process (S1613) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 75, but a process for selecting a variation pattern dedicated to the normal game period is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1612 that the rendering mode A is not set (S1612: No), it is determined whether the rendering mode B (time rendering period) is set (S1614). If it is determined that the effect mode B is set (S1614: Yes), the change pattern is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223g and the content of the change pattern command from the change pattern selection table 222a of the corresponding time effect period. Select and set (S1615). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1614 that the mode is not the production mode B, that is, the production mode C (time production extension period) (S1614: No), the corresponding time production extension period variation pattern selection table 222a. The variation pattern is selected and set based on the effect counter 223g and the content of the received variation pattern command (S1616). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, since the dedicated variation pattern is selected based on the set effect mode, the contents of the effect displayed depending on the period can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to produce a variety of game effects, and to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a button effect selection process (S1613) which is one process in the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 75, S1603) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button effect selection process (S1613).

  In the button effect selection process (FIG. 76, S1613), first, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223g and the content of the received fluctuation pattern command from the corresponding fluctuation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to the normal game period Set (S1621). It is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a button effect (variation pattern of composite display mode). If it is determined that the variation pattern of the composite display mode (see FIG. 43) (S1622: Yes), the stop symbol for the button effect is set as the reach stop symbol (S1623). Here, it is set so as to be a reach display mode in which the sub symbol is in the diagonal position. The button effect flag 223r is set to on (S1624). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1622, when it is determined that the selected fluctuation pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the composite display mode (S1622: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a synchronization effect management process (S1314) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1314). In this synchronization effect management process (S1314), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, and based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a normal game period, a time effect period, or a time effect extension period, and an effect indicating it Execute the process to set the mode.

  In the synchronized effect management process (FIG. 77, S1314), first, time information of “hour, minute” is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1701). It is determined whether the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223k (S1702). If it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1701 is within the time effect period (S1703). When it is determined that it is within the time effect period, that is, when it is determined that it is the start timing of time effect (S1703: Yes), the start period flag 223o is set to ON (S1704). The effect mode B (time effect period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223k (S1705), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1703 that it is not the time effect period, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1702 that the effect mode A is not set (S1702: No), it is determined whether the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S1706). If it is determined that the effect mode B is set (S1706: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S1701 is 3 seconds before the end of the time effect, that is, 3 of the end timing of the time effect period It is determined whether it is a second before (S1707). By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a precursor effect as to whether or not to execute an extended effect for 3 seconds.

  If it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (S1707: Yes), an extended effect setting process is executed (S1708). Thereafter, this process is terminated. The extended effect setting process (S1708) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 78, but a process for determining whether or not to set a time effect extended period is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect mode is not B, that is, if the effect mode C (time effect extension period) is determined (S1706: No), it is outside the time effect extension period, that is, the end timing of the time effect extension period Is determined (S1709). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (S1709: Yes), the effect mode is set to A (S1710). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, an extended effect setting process (S1708) which is one process in the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 77, S1314) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Explain. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extension effect setting process (S1708).

  In the extension effect setting process (FIG. 78, S1708), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S1721). When it is determined that the game is a big hit game (S1721: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S1722), and the production mode A (normal game period) is set (S1723). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, when the jackpot game is in progress, the extension effect cannot be executed. Therefore, by executing the process of setting the normal game period, the background image of the normal game period is set after the jackpot game. Can be controlled.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1721 that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1721: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the time effect period (S1724). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (S1724: Yes), it is determined whether re-change effect is set in the process of S1728 described later, that is, it is determined that extension effect is set. (S1725). When the extension effect is determined (S1725: Yes), the extension effect flag 223p is set to ON (S1725). The effect mode is set to C (S1727). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the extension effect has not been determined in the process of S1725 (S1725: No), the process proceeds to S1722. If it is determined in the processing of S1724 that it is not the end timing of the time effect (S1724: No), the winning information that corresponds to the winning information storage area 223a is stored or it is determined whether or not the winning is changing. It is determined whether or not there is (S1728). If the winning information to be the winning is stored, or if the variation judgment is the winning (S1728: Yes), the time until the variation to be winning ends is calculated and set as the extension effect time (S1729). A re-variation effect is set (S1730). Here, as the revariation effect, as shown in FIG. 47B, a display mode in which the display mode of the fish school appears from the right is set. After the process of S1730 ends, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the pending number display update process (S1306) which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is described. Do. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending number display update process (S1306).

  In the hold number display update process (FIG. 79, S1306), it is first determined whether or not the display of the hold symbol needs to be changed (S1801). This determination is made based on the hold command acquired from the main control device 110. A hold command for display indicating the hold symbol display after the change is set (S1802). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1801 that there is no change in the pending display (S1801: No), this process is ended.

  Next, referring to FIG. 80, the frame button input monitoring and effect process (S1307) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S1307 in FIG. 80), first, it is determined whether a valid period determined to be valid when the frame button 22 is pressed is set (S1811). If it is determined that the period is a valid period (S 1811: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S 1812). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1812: Yes), it is determined whether the eight effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1813). When it is determined that the eight effect flag 223i is on (S1813: Yes), the corresponding eight pending effect flag 223i is set to be off (S1814). In addition, eight effect flags are comprised so that a flag may be set with respect to each holding ball | bowl, The flag corresponding to the holding symbol displayed changing to notification holding symbol is set ON. Moreover, based on operation of the frame button 22, the notification holding symbol is set to OFF (when being displayed in a variable manner in the notification mode (in the present embodiment, character display)).

  After the process of S1814, the notification mode of the eight effects is set for the notification pending symbol whose change start order is the earliest among the reserved symbols for which the eight effect flags 223i are set to ON (S1815). . Thereafter, this process is terminated. Note that this notification mode is preset when eight effects are set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is out of the effective period (S 1811: No), or when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process of S 1812 (S 1812: No), this process ends. Do.

  If it is determined in the process of S1813 that the eight effect flags 223i are off (S1813: No), it is determined whether the hold effect flag 223h is on (S1816). If it is determined that the hold effect flag 223h is on (S1816: Yes), the corresponding hold effect flag 223h is set to off (S1817). The corresponding hold normal hold effect is executed (S1816). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1816 that the hold effect flag 223h is OFF (S1816: No), the change effect pattern of the composite display mode is being executed, so the button effect execution process is executed ( S1819). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a button effect execution process which is one process in the frame button input monitoring and effect process (FIG. 80, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. (S1819) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the contents of this button effect execution process (S1819). In this button effect execution process (S1819), control of the button effect in the variation pattern of the composite display mode shown in FIGS. 43 to 44 is executed.

  In the button effect execution process (FIG. 81, S1819), first, it is determined whether or not the button effect flag 223r is on (S1831). The button effect flag 223r is a flag indicating that the variation pattern in which the composite display mode illustrated in FIG. 44B is displayed is selected. The fluctuation pattern of the composite display mode includes a fake fluctuation pattern in which the composite display mode shown in FIG. 44B is not displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the button effect flag 223r is on (S1831: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing after the composite display mode (see FIG. 44B) is displayed (S1832). If it is determined that it is the timing after the composite display mode is displayed (S 1832: Yes), a display command indicating the composite display mode corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set (S 1843). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1831 that the button effect flag 223r is off (S1831: No), the timing at which the informing symbol is variably displayed before the composite display mode is displayed (FIG. 43 (b) It is determined whether it is a reference) (S1835). If it is determined that the timing is before the composite display (S1835: Yes), 1 is added to the button effect counter (S1836). Based on the selected variation pattern and the value of the button effect counter, a display command indicating the pre-combination effect mode (notification mode) is set (S1837). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, characters such as “chance”, characters, and the like are displayed, and the player is notified of the result of the success / failure determination.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1835 that the pressing timing before the composite display mode is displayed, this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of button effects are set. However, by controlling each flag, control is performed properly. By configuring in this way, it can be configured without increasing the number of frame buttons 22, and can be configured at low cost and in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, background image setting processing (S1311) which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. . FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background image setting process (S1311).

  In the background image setting process (FIG. 82, S1311), first, it is determined whether or not the extended effect flag 223p is on (S1901). When the extension effect flag 223p is on, that is, when it is the start timing of the extension effect (S1901: Yes), the extension effect flag 223p is set to be off (S1902). A display background image command corresponding to the time rendering extension period is set (S1903). In the present embodiment, a background image in which the color of the background image in the time effect period is changed to gold is set. This background image is a background image for notifying the player of a hit, since the time effect period is extended, that is, it is determined that the fluctuation to be a hit is started. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1901 that the extension effect flag 223p is off (S1901: No), it is determined whether the start period flag 223o is on (S1904). If it is determined that the start period flag is on (S1904: Yes), the start period flag 223o is set off (S1905), and a display background change command corresponding to the time presentation period is set (S1906) . As described above, when the start period flag 223o is on, since it is the start timing of the time effect period, a background image dedicated to the time effect period (see FIG. 46A) is set. Thus, the background image can be changed in accordance with the start timing, so that the background image can be changed in synchronization with the other pachinko machine 10 of the same model.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1904 that the start period flag 223o is off (S1904: No), it is determined whether the normal period flag 223m is on (S1907). If it is determined that the normal period flag 223m is on (S1907: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set off (S1908), and a display background command corresponding to the normal period is set (S1909). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal period flag 223m is off (S1907: No), this process ends.

<Regarding Control Processing in Display Control Device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 to 97, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing in S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 83). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) (S2105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 84, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2101. The processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after the processing is repeated a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 83. When the boot process ends, an initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2004, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S2005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 95A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3402 in FIG. 95A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIG. 47 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85 (b)). Determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 85B) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 85B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first winning opening 64, and an instruction to start the changing effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. In the case of via the display 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, a power fluctuation image, not shown, may be displayed immediately during the fluctuation effect period to perform a simple fluctuation effect. it can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85 (a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 57) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 85B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302), etc., an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 The contents of are specifically identified. Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp control device 113, a continuous notice is given to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction for transferring the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305) 57, the drawing list shown in FIG. 57 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2107, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and the process of S2304 is performed. Transition to

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process (FIG. 86, S2302), first, as shown in FIG. 86, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401). (S2401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2405), the process returns to the process of S2401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (a). FIG. 87 (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, the display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2501). Here, the display data table buffer 233 d is configured to be able to set a plurality of display data tables, and it is possible to synchronize the set display data table and transfer and process a pointer. Therefore, even when different displays are performed corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by setting one of the plurality of display data table buffers as active and switching it.

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is displayed in the display data table buffer. Set to 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). It is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the composite display mode is (the variation pattern of the button effect) (S2503). If it is determined that the variation pattern is a combined display mode (S2503: Yes), a reach symbol corresponding to the combined display mode variation pattern is set (S2504). Thereafter, the process of S2505 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2503 that the pattern is not a combined display mode variation pattern (S2503: No), the process of S2505 is executed.

  Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the set variation display data table is turned on, and other variation display data tables are also displayed. The corresponding data table determination flag is set to off (S2505). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2506. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2506), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Initialization is performed (S2507). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2508), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2508, the pointer 233f is set from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The drawing contents specified in the address shown are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, they are set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S2505. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table, and image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the image storage area of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to 236a, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2507, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 86. If it is determined in the process of S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406), If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the processing returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (before big hit A and big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2601), the stop type table and V interrupt processing are performed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set by comparing the value of the stop type counter updated every time (see FIG. 85 (b)). (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2603). Thereafter, the processing returns to S2401 in FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603 and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether there is a display advance display command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). When it is determined that the display notice command is received (S2408: Yes), notice command processing is executed (S2409).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the details of the advance notice command processing (S2409) will be described. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the contents of this advance notice command processing (FIG. S2409).

  In the advance notice command process, first, the display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2701). Here, the display data table buffer 233d is configured to be able to set a plurality of display data tables, and the set display data tables can be processed by moving the pointer in synchronization. Therefore, even when different displays are executed corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by setting one of the plurality of display data table buffers to active and switching.

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed in the display data table buffer. Set to 233d.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, among the data table determination flags of the variable display data table corresponding to each notice pattern, the set data table determination flag is turned on, and the other data table determination flags are set off (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2703, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Initialization is performed (S2705). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2706), the notice command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. In the process of S2408, when it is determined that there is no display notice command (S2408: No), it is determined whether there is a display hold command among the unprocessed commands. When it is determined that the display hold command is received (S2410: Yes), the hold command processing is executed.

  Here, the pending command process (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold command process (S2411).

  In the hold command process (FIG. 89, S2411), first, it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating the number of hold (S2801). If it is determined that the command indicates the number of reserved items (S2801: Yes), the display number of the reserved display data corresponding to the reserved symbol in the number of reserved items and the pattern (pattern, color, etc.) indicated by the received display-holding command is displayed in the display data table. (S2802). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2801 that the received command is not a command indicating the number of holds (S2801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command for normal hold effect (S2803). If it is determined that the command is a normal hold effect (S2803: Yes), the corresponding hold symbol is changed to a normal hold effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2804). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2803 that the received command is not a command indicating a normal hold effect (S2803: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command of eight effects (S2805). If it is determined that it is a command of eight effects (S2805: Yes), display data to be changed to a notice symbol of eight effects is set in the display data table (S2806), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2805 that the command is not an eight effect, other hold display settings are executed (S2807). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2410 that the display hold command has not been received (S2410: No), it is determined whether a display effect command has been received (S2412). When it is determined that the display effect command is received (S2412: Yes), effect command processing is executed (S2413).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 90, the details of the effect command processing (S2413) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect command process (S2413).

  In the effect command processing (FIG. 90, S2413), first, it is determined whether a re-variance effect (see FIG. 47B) in the time effect extension period is set (S2901). Here, the re-change effect is notified to the display control device 114 by a command when it is set in the processing of S1730 of the extended effect setting processing (FIG. 78, S1708) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. When it is determined that the re-change effect is set (S2901: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the re-change effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2902). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2909.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the re-variation effect is not set (S2901: No), it is determined whether the effect is a pseudo extension effect (S2903). This pseudo extension effect is a sign effect displayed 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period, and the effect symbol is displayed with shaking (see FIG. 47A). If it is determined that the pseudo extension effect is set (S2903: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the pseudo extension effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2904). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2909.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2903, when it is determined that the pseudo extension effect is not set (S2903: No), it is determined whether eight effects are set (S2905). If it is determined that eight effects are set (S2905: Yes), a display data table corresponding to eight effects is set in the display data table buffer (S2906). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2909.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2905 that eight effects are not set (S2905: No), it is determined whether a normal hold effect is set (S2907). If it is determined that the normal hold effect is set (S2907: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the normal hold effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2908). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2909. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2907 that the normal hold effect is not set (S2907: No), this process is ended.

  In the process of S2909, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2909). Then, among the data table discrimination flags of the display data table corresponding to each display pattern, the set data table discrimination flag is turned on, and the other data table discrimination flags are set off (S2910).

  Next, based on the display time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2911), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2912). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2412 that there is no display effect command (S2412: No), it is determined whether a back image change command has been received (S2414). If it is determined that the back image change command has been received (S2414: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S2415).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 91, the back image change command process (S2415) will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the rear image change command process (S2415).

  In the rear image change command processing (FIG. 91, S2415), the rear image change flag is set to ON (S3001). The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the changed rear image type indicated by the command is set to ON (S3002). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2414 that the rear image change command has not been received (S2414: No), it is determined whether there is an error command (S2416). If it is determined that an error command has been received (S2416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2417).

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2417) will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b). FIG. 91B is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3101). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3002, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 86. If it is determined in the processing of S2416 that there is no error command (S2416: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2419), and the processing returns to S2401.

  In the process of S2401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes ), The processing of S2402 to S2419 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2419 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85B), the simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying a power-on image (not shown) from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command Only the variable pattern command process (see FIG. 87 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 87 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other commands are also extracted. Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 87A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 92, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3201), and if the new command flag is not on, ie, off (S3201: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the processes of S3202 to S3204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S3201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S3202), S3203 to S3204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3301).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

    Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3204), or when it is determined in the process of S3203 that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off (S3203: No), the process proceeds to S3205.

  At S3205, pointer update processing is executed (S3205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3301, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3402). As a result, if it is End information (S3402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3403). If it is a demonstration display data table (S3403: Yes), the display data is displayed. Time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3405), and this process is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3303 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S3403: S3406), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 92, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S3206 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and the display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3108: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S3209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3209: No), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3211). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S3215) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. In addition, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3215, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is OFF instead of ON in the processing of S3209 (S3209: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S3216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3216: Yes), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The buffer 233d is set (S3217), and then the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S3221), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  In the process of S3216, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2309) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 85B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (not shown) is stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 95A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3502) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3501, that is, if it is off (S3501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (b). FIG. 95 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3501: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3602). In the process of S3602, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3602 (S3602: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Also, as a result of the process of S3501, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3603.

  In the process of S3603, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3603: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the process of S3603 (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 85B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 85B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 86 to 91) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 92 to 94) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) (see S3401: No in FIG. 95A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3503), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3205) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3702). If it is transfer data information (S3702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3704), and the process proceeds to step S3705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3702 (S3702: No), the process of S3703 and S3704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3706).

  In the process of S3606, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3606 (S3706: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to S3707. Also, as a result of the process of S3705, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3705: No), the process proceeds to S3707.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3703 is set as the transfer object image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3709. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3707: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S3709, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3709). The determination in the process of S3709 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3709 (S3709: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3709 (S3709: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3710). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3610, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3711), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and a transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 57 is generated (S3801). That is, in the process of S3701, based on the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S 3802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3702, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S3703). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 85B) is performed, it is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, instead, each apparatus 113,114 may be integrated and provided as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. The command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. After that, the display control device 114 may transmit the command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, it is determined that the image controller 237 accesses the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (that is, using) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 by the MPU 231, It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from the image controller 237 as needed. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 235 and 236 are not used. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, the MPU 231 also transfers transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, when image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is performed. Therefore, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required to be stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be stored. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  The process of reading out image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, transfer processing of image data can be executed using time during which important processing in the display control apparatus 114 such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing is not performed. In addition, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed prior to the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be performed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the video RAMs using the addresses held by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly designate the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or regular video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but merely designates the address, and The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the specification. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as an information indicating the storage destination of the data of the sprite, without using the storage RAM type, simply using the address set in the common address system. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. 237 may be directly connected. Also, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the NAND flash memory 234a uses the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control device 114 is configured as described in the above embodiment, so that an image can be displayed without any problem at a desired display time. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the MPU 231 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first after releasing the system reset in the first program storage area 234d1. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first cancels the system reset in that area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like is provided in the character ROM 234 and a first program storage area is provided thereon. It may store part of the boot program to be executed first.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program to be executed first in the area after releasing the system reset in the MPU 231 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like may be provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area may be provided thereon. A part of the boot program to be executed first after system reset release may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line) is read. You may output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do.

  Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated in the internal bus (bus line 240) designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from the data and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, so that the display main process can be activated in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  Although the above embodiment describes the case where the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more may be provided. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be made resident, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type of RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed simultaneously. For example, while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn, it is read from the character ROM 234 The process of writing the processed image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. One RAM may be a resident area and a normal area. The same content as that of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least for residence in response to a received command received from the main control unit 110 or the audio lamp control unit 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is partially transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident is described, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 May be. In this case, since the image data stored in the nonresident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 If the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is largely different based on the command received from the image, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined timing. Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept updated in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when the other resident images are updated. You may leave it. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. You may make it transfer during unused (namely, during the period when the image data corresponding to a transfer image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). Image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 according to data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (ie, while image data corresponding to the transition image is not read) You may do it.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. You may make it display on the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. While the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data through the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the content of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. Before starting to transfer main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the main display process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is checked, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, this means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, and thus the image data transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be made non-execution by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for the power failure recovery. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data if the data of the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary stop or the like. Since time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can start the game immediately. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Alternatively, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  Although the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the period (blank period) of scanning the blank area that is the scanning area other than the display area in which the actual image is displayed in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from the other buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while an area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another image data is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since processing can be performed, the time taken for the processing can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 after power on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thereby, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after power-on are performed on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. The image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is not transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, for example, by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. Image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 through the buffer RAM 237a, the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power activation fluctuation. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235 b has been described, while image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. Directly transfer image data corresponding to the main image at power on and power fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 directly to the power main image area 235a and power fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Also, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the power-on main image and power stored in the normal video RAM 236 While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 If the image data is not read out from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the contents of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10, and change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the presentation mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the back image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined such that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the vibration error is detected by the audio lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 The controller 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main controller 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114. Then, when an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and sends an error command for further notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, whereby the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 69). The warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 70A) when the above-mentioned is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 was described in the said embodiment, it replaces with the vibration sensor or with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 It is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress that the flow of the ball is changed by the magnetic field such as a magnet and the ball is intentionally entered into the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command for reporting an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for informing the magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. May turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is not It can be suppressed.

  When the drawing content required to change the color tone of a part or all of one presentation is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for the frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) is represented as one unit, and the change in the sprite It may define color information specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452 d and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If color information to be displayed is specified, color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed. The drawing list may be created in place of the color information specified by the additional drawing content of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 In correspondence with the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying is displayed as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed, and the new It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 displays the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, various sprites specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image in accordance with the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may configure it.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing to draw an image based on the additional drawing content. Many sprites can be drawn depending on the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table May be. Thereby, the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined to include not only the additional drawing content but also transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for image drawing performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. The processing load required for the specification can be reduced as compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has described the case of preparing the display data table for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "fluctuation start", "high speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command After identifying the elements necessary for the fluctuation production, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the fluctuation production specified are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. For "variation start", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc., a display common to each fluctuation pattern is often performed. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by elementizing the fluctuation effect in this way and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, in the display data table and the transfer data table, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f using the common pointer 233f has been described. Alternatively, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer to which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing object buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded from the other frame buffer earlier. Has been described and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 is a frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded each time the drawing list is received. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded. The frame buffer to be used may be switched.

  In the above embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main display unit 110 is notified via the audio lamp control device 113 until the finalized display effect is finished. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the case of setting the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect to the display data table buffer 233 d As explained above, a fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Also, in this case, until the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change and display the back image and stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9”, is not necessarily described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first supplies image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is transferred to the time-varying image area 235b, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after the power is turned on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Thereby, since the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 can be used in an operation check in a player, a hall-related person or a factory at the time of manufacture. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problems by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 235b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should be transferred to the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) or to that time, corresponding to the time that represents 20 milliseconds as one unit. Although the case of defining the information (transfer data information) of the image data has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, as a sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals, an address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself. May be defined. The display control device 114 reads the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. I manage the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, it is stored whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, in place of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data It may be determined whether or not it has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of that predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and also stores image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be memorized. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. Alternatively, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  Although the above embodiment has described the case where only the image data corresponding to “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear surface images is made to reside in the rear surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, transfer processing of image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the back image of super reach expected to have a high or high frequency of occurrence resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. Information on the sprite type required in the table is described. Based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. In addition, not only images that scroll with time or changes in color tone as back images, but instead of such back images, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above embodiment, information on the various counters (the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2) acquired at the start winning prize notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the main control unit 110 is the number of holding balls. Although the case where it is included in the command has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of the various counters (the first random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2) acquired at the start winning combination is not limited to this. The control device 113 may be notified.

  In the above embodiment, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is displayed when performing variation effects. All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where one first winning opening 64 is arranged on the game board 13 is started when the lottery of the big hit of the special symbol is started when the ball enters the ball, but it is not necessarily limited thereto. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the jackpot lottery is started. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted by the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 when there is a hold at each first entrance indicates which first entrance is the hold. Information may be included. In addition, even if the fluctuation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started, information indicating which of the first ball entry is the fluctuation effect reserved by the first ball entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. If you set the number of holding balls in the number of holding balls counter for the mouth and receive the fluctuation pattern command, if you decrease the number of holding balls counter for the first entrance indicated in the fluctuation pattern command by 1, the first ball entrance The number of holding balls can be counted every time.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control unit 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the holding ball number command is Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, only when the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the winnings to the first winning opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are respectively held up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is not limited to four. You may set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of held balls for variable display based on winning in the first winning opening 64 is different from the number in the part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of reserved balls or in four divided areas. A light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37 so as to indicate the number of holding balls by means of the light emitting member. It may be configured.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a design along a predetermined path such as direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Third Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, display control between the rotary operation unit 600 and the third symbol display device 81 described in the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 98 (a) is a schematic view showing a display mode when a main symbol is displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 of the rotation operation unit 600. FIG. In the spherical liquid crystal device 670, a plurality of pixels each having a size of 1 mm is arranged to form a display area. The display area Pb of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 shown in FIG. 98 (a) and the display area Pa shown in the third symbol display device 81 are display areas having the same size.

  FIG. 98B is an enlarged view of the display area Pa and the display area Pb. The display area Pa is configured by 2 columns × 2 columns of 1.5 mm square pixels, and is configured by a total of 4 pixels. The display area Pb is composed of 3 mm × 3 columns of 1 mm square pixels, and is composed of a total of nine pixels. Thus, the third symbol display device 81 is composed of pixels 1.5 times larger than the spherical liquid crystal device 670.

  The spherical liquid crystal device 670 has a display area arranged to overlap the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is configured to be able to display mutually related display effects.

  Next, an example of a display mode displayed in association with the third symbol display device 81 and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 102. FIG. 98 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the third symbol is displayed only in the spherical liquid crystal and scrolled while being enlarged from the upper right direction to the lower right direction. When the main symbol is displayed up to the end of the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), the third symbol moves to the boundary portion of the third symbol display device 81 with the spherical liquid crystal device 670. Displayed. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 is set and displayed with the same display data as the main symbol display data displayed immediately before on the spherical liquid crystal device 670.

  With this configuration, the third symbol display device 81 has a pixel size of 1.5 times that of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and thus the third symbol size is 1.5 times as large. Is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to show the player that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is gradually enlarged and scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the process which expands and sets a main symbol can be reduced, and the control load of the display control apparatus 114 can be reduced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the third symbol is scroll-displayed while being enlarged by 1.5 times. Further, even when scroll display is performed in the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, the display is variably displayed by being enlarged by 1.5 times. By configuring in this way, even if the display is performed without changing the enlargement setting from the spherical liquid crystal device 670 to the third symbol display device 81, the ratio of the enlargement display by the pixel and the change are not made, and the player feels strange. Defects can be suppressed.

  FIGS. 100A to 100B are views showing an enlarged scroll display while rotating within the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670. FIG. Also in this case, each time it is moved and displayed, it is enlarged 1.5 times and displayed. 101 (a) to 101 (b) and FIG. 102 (a) are states in which the display is rotated from the right end of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 to the left after being rotated and displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670. FIG. Here, each time it is moved and displayed, it is enlarged 1.5 times and displayed. As shown in FIG. 102 (b), a table showing the sizes of symbols actually displayed at the set enlargement ratio of the third symbol display device 81 (main liquid crystal) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub liquid crystal) It is.

  In the sub-liquid crystal, the actual size is different by 1.5 times between the design set at the enlargement ratio of c1 and the design set at the enlargement ratio of c1 on the main liquid crystal.

  In the present embodiment, when the scroll display is performed in the same display device, it is configured to be gradually enlarged and displayed at the same magnification, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be set to be close to 1.5 times (ratio of pixel size) at the boundary between the liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the discomfort and display the switching between the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal. Further, the scroll display may be performed while reducing the main liquid crystal to the sub liquid crystal. In this case, as in the enlarged display, the reduction ratio may be gradually changed at the same reduction ratio or the same ratio, and may be configured to match the pixel reduction ratio at the switching timing. In the present embodiment, the main symbol has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other symbols, characters, characters, and the like may be used.

  With reference to FIG. 103, the electrical configuration of the display control apparatus 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a block diagram of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment.

  In the third embodiment, a sub display data table buffer 233 m, a sub pointer 233 n, and a sub clock counter 233 i are added to the second embodiment. Here, the main liquid crystal 81 is configured similarly to the main liquid crystal so that different display modes can be displayed simultaneously with the main liquid crystal. Therefore, the detailed description thereof is the same as the description already given in the second embodiment, and will be omitted.

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, only the command determination process is changed, and the other processes are the same as those in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The command determination process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment is a variation pattern command process (FIG. 87, FIG. 87) in the command determination process (FIG. 86, S2302) in the second embodiment. The difference is that S2302) is changed to variation pattern command processing 2 (FIG. 104, S2450). The other configurations are the same, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the variation pattern command process 2 (S2450) in the third embodiment is a process of S2519 to S2523 in contrast to the variation pattern command process (FIGS. 87A and S2405) in the second embodiment. Has been added.

  If it is determined in step S2513 that the button effect is not a button effect (S2513: No), it is determined whether the display effect using the sub liquid crystal (spherical liquid crystal device 670) is a variation pattern. If it is a fluctuation pattern in which the sub liquid crystal is not used, the process proceeds to the process of S2515.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2519 that there is an effect using the sub liquid crystal (S2519: Yes), a display data table for the sub liquid crystal is set (S2520). The sub data table determination flag corresponding to the set display data table for sub liquid crystal is set to on (S 2521). Based on the data table, time data is set to the sub clock counter (S2522). The sub-pointer is initialized and set (S2523), and the process proceeds to S2515.

  With this configuration, the display mode can be displayed independently for the sub liquid crystal and the main liquid crystal. Therefore, various display effects can be provided to the player.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, the second embodiment described above includes the configuration of the sorting unit 1064, the processing order of the balls winning in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and the display control of the third symbol display device 81. The configuration is different, and other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, if the difference with the second embodiment in the display control of the fourth embodiment is described in detail, the additional display effect and the special continuation effect, which will be described later, are added to the eight pending effects. The point that the effect using the frame button 22 is added is different from the point that the time effect period described later in the time effect can be changed.

  FIG. 105 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 105, below the variable display device unit 80 provided on the front surface of the game board 13, a distribution unit 1064 into which a ball can enter is disposed. The balls that have entered the distribution unit 1064 are configured to be alternately distributed to a first winning port 964a or a left second winning port 964b, which will be described later.

  In addition, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment of the present invention, as a winning opening (so-called, second winning opening) where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed by winning, the second right winning opening 640 ( A second winning opening disposed on the lower right side of the game board 13 and a left second winning opening 964b (second winning opening disposed in the distribution unit 1064) are provided.

  Here, the configuration of distribution unit 1064 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 106A and 106B show the internal structure of the distribution unit 1064. Actually, a cover body made of a transparent resin is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is colored with a spiral pattern so that the inside of the cover body is difficult to see. In addition, a decoration LED (illustrated) is attached to the distribution unit 1064, which emits light when the pachinko machine 10 is playing a big hit game or a normal game, and makes the game board 13 gorgeous. It is directing for. The light emitted when performing such an effect is reflected on the surface of the cover body, making it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the sorting unit 1064 while playing a game with the pachinko machine 10, and the game is played. In the absence, the inside of the sorting unit 1064 is configured to be easily visible. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegal act using the principle of the ball sorting mechanism and to easily perform a visual inspection of the inside of the sorting unit 1064 by a store clerk when no game is played. ing.

  At the upper part of the sorting unit 1064, there is provided a passage opening through which a game ball can enter, and a transmission type ball entrance sensor 1064a that can detect that the game ball has passed through the passage opening is disposed. . The balls having passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distributing member 900 into a first winning hole 964a and a left second winning hole 964b disposed below the ball.

  The balls distributed by the distribution member 900 roll on the first guide member 900z1 and the second guide member 900z2 installed on the distribution unit 1064, and are respectively guided to the winning ports. Thus, by providing the guiding members 900z1 and 900z2 between the distributing member 900 configured to be rotatable to the left and right and the winning openings 964a and 964b, the distributing member 900 to be pivoted is configured to receive each winning opening It becomes possible to prevent contact with 964a and 964b. Further, the distribution member 900 can be reduced in size.

  As the size of the distribution member 900, desirably, the storage portion 900a of the distribution member 900 is set to a size that does not allow two spheres to be stored (the length of the wall surface constituting the storage portion 900a is less than 5.5 mm). good. By comprising in this way, it can prevent that the some ball accommodated in the accommodating part 900a balances and obstructs rotation of the distribution member 900. FIG. Also, in order to prevent the one storage portion 900a from successively receiving a plurality of gaming balls, a loosely inclined portion may be provided which temporarily receives the ball entering the sorting unit 1064 and allows the gentle slope to flow down. By using such a configuration, a sphere that continuously enters the sorting unit 1064 (a sphere that is a daisy chain) flows down the gently inclined portion, thereby generating a gap between the spheres, It becomes possible to prevent the one receiving portion 900a from continuously receiving the balls.

  The distributing member 900 is attached to the base body provided on the back side of the distributing unit 1064 so as to be pivotable to the left and right via the pivot portion 900 d, and the housing ball 900 a of the distributing member 900 is loaded with gaming balls. Alternatively, it is configured to receive at 900c. The distributing member 900 is configured to be symmetrical about the pivotal support portion 900d, and is pivotally fixed so that the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c is in a vertical state (directly above) by the weight of the distributing member 900. It is done. When a game ball is received in the housing portion 900a, the sorting member 900 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the first winning port 964a.

  Limiting members 900y1 and 900y2 are erected in the distribution unit 1064, and the rotation range of the distribution member 900 can be rotated about 45 degrees in the left-right direction. In addition, a magnet 900b is provided at the boundary between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b.

  A magnet (base-side magnet) 901 is disposed on the center line of the passage opening on the base body provided on the back side of the distribution unit 1064. The magnet 900 b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to be mutually repelled in polarity. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting member 900 side.

  The magnet 900b is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The base-side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other at the position where the sorting member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c is directly above (the tip portions face each other). It becomes a position. Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity, they repel each other, and do not stop at the position where the boundary wall of the distributing member 900 is directed straight up, to the position rotated left or right. Will be maintained.

  As a result, the distributing member 900 causes the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 to repel each other when the magnet 900b provided on the boundary wall is at a position on the center line of the passage opening (position directly above) by its own weight. By rotating to the left or right of the sorting member 900, either the storage portion 900a or the storage portion 900c faces the ball receiving side (the upper side of the gaming machine) that enters the sorting unit 1064. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls that have entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c and causing the clogging of the balls.

  In addition, when the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are repelled, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 45 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first winning port 964a, and then the sorting member It is possible to prevent 900 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the gaming ball to the first winning opening 964a, the housing portion 900c is directed upward, and the ball that has entered the distribution unit 1064 next is received by the housing portion 900c, and the weight of the ball is received. As a result, the sorting member 900 rotates about 90 degrees to the right, and guides the game ball to the second winning opening 964b. As described above, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide the balls entering the distribution unit 1064 to the first winning port 964a and the left second winning port 964b. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the game balls to the first winning port 964a and the left second winning port 964b evenly and enter the lottery game (which will be described later) resulting from the ball entering the first winning port 964a. The first lottery game) and the lottery game (second lottery game) resulting from the ball entering the second left winning port 964b can be efficiently executed.

  Next, the operation of the sorting member 900 when a ball enters the sorting unit 1064 will be described. FIG. 106A shows a state where the accommodating portion 900a of the distribution member 900 is positioned so as to face the passage opening of the distribution unit 1064 (above the gaming machine). In this state, the magnet 900b is located on the right side of the base-side magnet 901, and a position where the rotational force in the left direction due to the weight of the sorting member 900 and the repulsive force between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are balanced. Is maintained. In this case, when the ball passes through the passage opening, the ball is accommodated in the accommodating portion 900a, and the distributing member 900 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight to roll on the guiding portion 900z1 to the first winning opening 964a It is When a ball enters the first winning port 964a, a prize ball (for example, three) is paid out and the first lottery game is executed.

  After the balls are distributed to the first winning opening 964a by the distribution member 900, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the distribution member 900 is maintained at the position where the housing portion 900c faces upward. Thereafter, when the ball passes through the passage opening, the ball is accommodated in the accommodating portion 900c, and the gaming ball is distributed to the left second winning opening 964b. When a ball enters the second left winning port 964b, a winning ball (for example, three) is paid out and the second lottery game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b alternately.

  Note that the configuration of the sorting member 900 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and for example, a rotating operation may be performed at regular intervals using an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. When adopting such a configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the position where the gaming ball can be guided to one of the winning openings (for example, the first winning opening 964a) as the origin position, the origin position is selected. It may be configured to return to the origin position when it is detected that the lottery game has not been performed for a long time. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to provide a fair game to a player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution destination of the distribution member 900 is in the two directions of the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b, but may be distributed in three directions or more. In such a case, a through gate 67 that causes the second symbol (ordinary symbol) lottery and a general winning port 63 that causes the payout of the prize ball may be provided at the distribution destination. By doing so, it becomes possible to consolidate the devices that cause the game (lottery and prize balls) of the pachinko machine 10 in one place, and a large area that can be used for decoration and production on the game board 13 is secured. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of winning balls when entering the first winning port 964a and the second left winning port 964b is the same, but they may be different. Further, although the distribution member 900 is configured to distribute the distribution destinations evenly, the distribution ratio may be changed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment can store up to eight lottery games caused by entering the ball in the order of entering the ball (four first lottery games and four second lottery games). (Details will be described later). Therefore, as described above, two lottery games can be stored evenly by adopting a configuration in which balls that have entered the distribution unit 1064 alternately enter the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which only one of the lottery games is stored and the maximum number of lottery games (8) is not reached.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform the second lottery game even when the ball enters the right second winning opening 640. In other words, during a normal game, a left-handed game (a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the left side of the game area provided on the game board 13) is performed, and the distribution unit 1064 is aimed at. 2. Right-handed game (game that launches a ball aiming at the right side of the game area provided in the game board 13) during probability change or short time when the electric player 640a is easily opened by receiving the two lottery games alternately. By aiming at the right second winning opening 640, it is possible to play the game so as to always receive the provision of the second lottery game.

  Next, effect control displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 107 is a time chart for explaining the effect control related to the reserved symbol effect described later. As shown in FIG. 107, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is controlled to perform a plurality of reserved symbol effects based on the increase or decrease of the number of reserved balls.

  Specifically, on condition that the number of holding balls is equal to or more than a predetermined number, a holding symbol effect different from that of normal (the holding effect performed when the number of holding balls is equal to or less than a predetermined number) is performed. The details of the reserved symbol effect will be described later. In this way, when the reserved ball number becomes a predetermined number or more, a special effect is performed so that the player can see the special effect. , The game continues to be played so that the number of holding balls is equal to or more than a predetermined number or the upper limit value.

  First, increase and decrease of the number of holding balls shown in FIG. 107 will be described. The number of holding balls is the number storing information related to the lottery game performed with the entry of the first winning opening 964a or the left second winning opening 964b, and in the present embodiment, the number of holding balls is The maximum is set to eight (four in the first lottery game and four in the second lottery game). Although the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with two second winning openings as described above, in the present description, the game during the left strike is highly likely to have eight balls held. This will be described using the state. Therefore, the description will be made using the left second winning opening 964b among the two second winning openings.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a fluctuating state (fluctuating time) for a predetermined time when displaying the lottery game result (big hit or miss) in an identifiable manner. The attraction of the game is enhanced by providing the player with an effect suggesting the result of the lottery game using this fluctuation time (for example, dynamic display (variation display displayed on the third symbol display device 81)) . In addition, a plurality of fluctuation times described above are set according to the result of the lottery game, for example, 5 seconds when the result of the lottery game is out, 30 seconds in the case of reach out, and 60 seconds in the case of big hit ing. This is to ask the player whether or not the result of the lottery game currently being performed is a big hit, and the longer the variation time, the longer the performance can be performed.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed so that a plurality of the above-mentioned lottery games cannot be performed at the same time. During one lottery game, the first winning port 964a and the left second winning port 964b are arranged. When a ball enters, it has a function (holding function) for storing a lottery game resulting from the ball entry after the current lottery game is completed. The number storing the lottery game is the number of holding balls.

  That is, the increase or decrease in the number of holding balls shown in FIG. 107 is the number of holding balls when the balls enter the first winning opening 964a, the left second winning opening 965b or the right second winning opening 640 during the lottery game. Increases, the lottery game ends, and a new lottery game starts, the number of reserved balls decreases. The maximum number of reserved balls is eight. The number of holding balls is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 using the holding symbol (see FIG. 108 (b)), and the lottery result of the lottery game individually stored (consulting judgment result) ) A reserved symbol effect (details will be described later) is performed to change the display mode of the reserved symbol based on the information related to.

  A period A shown in FIG. 107 represents a period until the number of reserved balls reaches eight. During this period, a normal holding effect is performed as an effect of the holding symbol. The normal holding effect is the same as the contents described in the second embodiment described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, when the number of holding balls reaches eight, eight holding effects are performed (start of period B). The eight reserved effects are reserved symbol effects performed using the eight reserved symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds (see FIG. 110). Period B is a period from the start of the eight rendition effects to the end of the eight rendition effects (at the time of the last lottery game to be performed among the reserved balls used for the eight rendition effects). is there. That is, the period B is continued until the eighth lottery game is started after the number of holding balls reaches eight.

  When the number of holding balls increases in period B (a new lottery game is stored), an additional winning effect is performed. The additional winning effect is a reserved symbol effect that is performed when a lottery game is newly memorized (additional winning) when a reserved symbol effect using a plurality of reserved symbols such as eight reserved effects is performed. Unlike the normal holding effect, this is an effect of changing the holding symbol so that the holding symbol effect using a plurality of holding symbols is continuously performed (see FIG. 111 (b)). By performing this additional winning effect, the player continues to play the game even while the eight reserved effects are being performed in order to experience a different reserved symbol effect than usual. Therefore, the player's willingness to play the game can be increased, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be reduced.

  Next, when the number of reserved balls is five or more at the time when the period B ends, a special continuous effect is performed using all the reserved symbols displayed at that time (start of the period C). That is, the special continuation effect is a reserved symbol effect performed only when at least five lottery games are newly stored during the period B. Since this special continuation effect is more difficult to start than the above-described eight hold effects, the reserved symbol effect provided is also a valuable effect for the player. A valuable effect means, for example, that a premium effect which is displayed only in a small part of the result of the lottery game is displayed for sure, or the points the player has accumulated regardless of the result of the lottery game It is possible to display information that can be given in large quantities. Period C is a period from the start of the special continuation effect to the end of the special continuation effect (at the time of the last lottery game to be performed among the reserved balls used for the special continuation effect). Also during the period C, the additional prize effect is executed.

  When the period C in which the special continuation rendition is performed is ended, the period A starts again. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of reserved symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 on the condition that the number of reserved balls is a predetermined number (eight). Perform multiple hold symbol effects (8 hold effects) using. And when the number of held symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (five) at the time when the plurality of held symbol effects are finished, the plurality of held currently displayed at that time The second plural holding symbol effect (special continuation effect) is performed using the symbol. Further, an additional prize effect different from the normal holding effect is performed for the holding symbol newly generated while the plurality of holding symbols effect using the plurality of holding symbols is being performed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to urge the player to always display a predetermined number or more of the reserved symbols.

  Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area segment setting and effective line setting of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. In the present embodiment, a reserved symbol corresponding to the winning to the first winning opening 964 (Special Fig. 1 reserved symbol) and a reserved symbol corresponding to the winning to the second left winning port 964b (Special Fig. 2 reserved symbol). They are arranged in the winning display order from the left side of the screen and displayed in the sub display area Ds (maximum 8). Due to the structure of the distribution unit 1064 described above, the special figure 1 reserved symbol and the special figure 2 reserved symbol are alternately displayed in the left-handed state.

  In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 reserved symbol and the special figure 2 reserved symbol are displayed in an indistinguishable display mode, but may be displayed in an identifiable manner. Moreover, you may display separately the holding | maintenance symbol displayed corresponding to the special symbol in the variable display on the main display area | region Dm in the predetermined location of the sub display area | region Ds. By configuring in this way, the player can grasp which of the special symbol 1 reserved symbol and the special symbol 2 reserved symbol the game using the reserved symbol is being performed (is it to be performed) This makes it possible to raise interest in the progress of the game. Since other parts have the same configuration as that of the second embodiment described above, description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 108B illustrates an actual display screen. In FIG. 108 (b), seven reserved symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the present embodiment, as described above, the retention storage of the special view 1 and the retention storage of the special view 2 are alternately stored, but they can not be identified by the display of the retention symbol. By displaying the reserved symbols in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery game variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The game can be performed while expecting what kind of privilege will be provided when the jackpot is won.

  In addition, you may display the aspect of the hold | payment symbol displayed so that identification with the hold memory of special figure 1 and the hold memory of special figure 2 is possible. Further, it may be identifiably displayed whether the lottery game currently fluctuating is based on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the player to grasp a privilege in the case of a big hit in advance, and to give a sense of expectation to the changing effect.

  FIG. 109 is a view exemplifying a display screen showing a normal hold effect during period A of FIG. In FIG. 109 (a), the fourth reserved symbol from the left is variably displayed as a “push” symbol (notification pending symbol), and when the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, FIG. It is displayed variably to the "△" symbol shown in (b). The detailed contents are the same as those of the second embodiment described above and thus will not be described. In the present embodiment, the variable display content (“Δ” symbol) of the holding symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery game corresponding to the holding symbol that is variably displayed. However, the display is variably displayed. You may determine based on the result of the lottery game corresponding to the holding symbol currently displayed before and behind the holding symbol. When determining in this way, the display content after the variable display may be a display content that causes the player to expect that there is a chance in the vicinity of the suspending display that is variably displayed, such as an “arrow” symbol.

  Further, it may be configured such that the suspended symbol once variably displayed is variably displayed again after a time. In this way, even if the content of the variable display is content that cannot be expected, there is a possibility that it will be changed to content that can be displayed again and can be expected, so the lottery game corresponding to the reserved symbol It is possible for the player to have an expectation until the is executed.

  FIG. 110 is a view exemplifying a display screen showing eight pending effects in period B of FIG. 107. FIG. 110 (a) shows a state in which eight holding symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are changed to notification holding symbols, and the player presses the frame button 22 ( Operation), the notification suspension symbols displayed on the left side are changed in order (see FIG. 110B). The detailed contents are the same as those of the second embodiment described above and thus will not be described. In this embodiment, the notification hold symbol is changed sequentially from the left each time the frame button 22 is pressed once, but when the frame button is pressed once, a plurality of notification hold symbols are variably displayed or variably displayed. The order may be set randomly. By doing this, it is possible to provide game characteristics to the player's operation (depression of the frame button 22) for changing the notification holding symbol.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a display screen showing eight pending effects and additional effects during period B in FIG. 107. FIG. 111 (a) shows a state after the notification hold symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are all changed by operating the frame button 22. In the present embodiment, when a notification is made to confirm that there is a pending storage in which the success / failure determination result is a big hit among the eight pending storages, using "eight wins !!!!" It is set to be displayed, and the display of “big hit !!!!?” Shown in this figure informs that there is a possibility that there is a hold memory in which the determination result is a big hit in the eight hold memories. It is

  FIG. 111 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing a state in which three pending storages are digested and two pending storages are newly added from the state shown in FIG. 111 (a). As illustrated, in FIG. 111 (a), although "Hello! !!!?" Was displayed using eight holding symbols, since three holding memories were digested, it corresponds to digested holding memories. The holding symbol ("Don't hit") that was displayed has disappeared from the display screen. In addition, the hold symbols displayed corresponding to the two newly generated hold memories during this period are displayed as two notification hold symbols in the secondary display area Ds.

  In this way, with respect to a new reserved memory that occurs while the reserved symbol effect by the eight-hold effect is performed, it is an additional prize that makes it appear that the eight-hold effect is continued instead of the normal reserved symbol effect. The presentation will be performed. Specifically, a notification hold symbol (“push” symbol) is displayed as a hold symbol corresponding to the new hold memory (see FIG. 111B). As for the notification suspension symbol, the display mode of the suspension symbol is changed by the operation of the frame button 22 as in the case of the eight suspension effect described above. Specifically, for example, when there is a pending storage in which a yes / no determination result is a big hit in any of the two pending saved storages, the notification pending symbol corresponding to the pending storage is displayed in the frame button 22 When changing it by the operation, the last "?" Of the character string "see jack !!!?" (See FIG. 111 (a)) displayed in the eight-reserve effect is changed to "!" Change itself to "!" In addition, when the two newly stored pending is a failure of the success or failure judgment result, without changing the "big hit !!!?" Character string displayed in the pending eight production, notification hold symbol Changes to "?" By doing this, it is possible to associate the hold symbol corresponding to the new hold storage generated during the eight hold effects with the eight hold effects as well, and the player can hold the eight hold effects as well. In order to generate a holding ball, it is possible to continue the firing of the game ball and play the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the notification mode (“?” Or “!”) Of the rightmost character (the character corresponding to the reserved symbol that is digested last) among the character strings displayed by the eight reserved effects. Because it is configured to suggest the result of the determination of success or failure, even in the additional prize effect, the effect of changing one character using the holding symbol corresponding to one holding memory is performed, but in the hold 8 effect In the case of adopting a notification mode that suggests a yes / no determination result by using a plurality of characters, a plurality of characters may be changed using a holding symbol corresponding to one holding storage in the additional prize effect, or plural A plurality of characters may be changed using a reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved memory.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbol is displayed as an 8-character string by the eight-hold effect, that is, the variable display is changed to the number of characters corresponding to the number of the reserved symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reserved symbols may be combined and displayed in a variable manner so as to form one notification mode by using eight reserved effects.

  Moreover, in the eight reservations effect of this embodiment, although the alerting mode which suggests a determination result is displayed with the character corresponding to the reservation symbol digested lastly among eight reservation symbols. Not all of the last saved symbols, but all of the characters on the right side of the character string displayed by the eight-hold effect (the characters corresponding to the last symbols saved in the second half among the eight reserved symbols) Or you may display an alerting | reporting aspect using either.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing a special continuation effect in period C of FIG. 107. FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which the holding symbol corresponding to the last holding memory is digested among the eight holding memories used for the eight holding effect, that is, the third symbol display device 81 The five “?” Displayed in the sub display area Ds are displayed by the above-described additional winning effect. In this state, if there are five or more reserved memories, “Please press!” Is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device. When the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, the mode of the reserved symbol displayed as “???” is changed again. Specifically, for example, in a case where there is a determination result in which the determination result is a big hit in any one of the hold memories corresponding to the hold symbols displayed as “???” in FIG. As shown in FIG. 112 (b), it is changed to five characters “congratulations”. In this way, when the number of pending storage (the number of pending symbols displayed) at the end of the display of the pending symbol by eight pending effects is more than a predetermined number (five in this embodiment), it is more special. Since the reserved symbol effect is performed, it is possible to urge the player to continuously launch the game ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, since special continuation presentation is performed using a plurality of suspension symbols displayed as "?" By additional prize production, for example, the character which shows that the big hit is decided by additional prize production is It is preferable to set a small ratio to be displayed, and set many characters to be displayed to indicate that the jackpot has been determined by the special continuation effect. By doing in this way, in the special continuation effect performed after the additional winning effect, it is displayed that the determination result that is a big hit is included in the determination result that is stored on hold (see FIG. 112 (b)). It is possible to increase the frequency that can be performed, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to see the special continuation effect.

  In addition, in the special continuation effect, in addition to the character string (message) based on the determination result of the determination result of the success / failure stored on hold, information for acquiring a large amount of points accumulated by the player is displayed, An effect of providing a privilege of displaying the gaming state (certain change or normal) of the player may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to prompt the player to continuously fire the game ball in order to receive benefits other than the determination result.

  Note that at the timing when it is determined whether or not the special continuation effect is to be performed (the boundary between the period B and the period C in FIG. 107), the number of pending storages (five in this embodiment) serving as a condition for performing the special continuation effect If it is stored on hold, the emphasis character (“!”, “Celebration”, etc.) that emphasizes the character string (“congratulations”) that has been changed by the special continuation effect for the reserved symbol corresponding to the surplus storage memory. It is good to change to. By doing this, it is possible to perform an effect without giving a sense of incongruity, without changing the display content displayed by the special continuation effect even if the number of surplus storages is indefinite.

  Moreover, when performing special continuation presentation, it may be made to be performed after changing temporarily the holding symbol currently displayed as "?????" to a notification holding symbol. By doing in this way, it can be emphasized that the special continuation effect is a pending symbol effect using a plurality of pending symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described additional prize-winning effect is performed even while the special continuation effect is being performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal holding symbol is changed to the notification holding symbol prompting the player to operate the frame button 22, and then the notification holding symbol is changed based on the frame button 22 operation. , Based on the result of the determination of the status contained in the eight pending storage, it is made to display the pending symbol (result display pending symbol) that makes one meaning by a plurality of pending symbols, but there is no limitation to this, for example The characters ("large", "I", "Ri", etc.) displayed by varying the notification holding symbol may be displayed in another part of the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this manner, even if the hold symbol used for the eight hold effect is digested by the progress of the game, the character string displayed as a result of the eight hold effect can be maintained. In this case, the character string displayed in another place may be erased at a timing at which all the retention symbols used for the eight retention effects are digested.

  In addition, as the dynamic display of the third symbol, when an effect to be stopped temporarily during the fluctuation time and then restarted (so-called, a pseudo continuous effect or a development effect to super reach) is performed, It is good to change the hold symbol which has become a result display hold symbol by operation to a notification hold symbol, and to make eight hold effects again. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a reserved symbol effect corresponding to the dynamic display effect of the third symbol that makes one lottery game appear in a plurality of lottery games.

  As described above, when performing effects to re-execute the on-hold symbol effect interlockingly with the dynamic display of the third symbol, the display contents by the first result display on-hold symbol are included in the result of the pass / fail judgment included in eight on-hold memories. On the other hand, the expectation level of the jackpot is low, and the holding symbol display corresponding to the result of the judgment is performed in the eight holdings performed again, or the result display displayed in the eight holdings performed again in advance It is preferable to set the display content based on the hold symbol to a higher expectation than the display content based on the initial result display hold symbol. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation where the display content is changed to a display with a lower degree of expectation than the reserved symbol effect of the place as a result of reworking the reserved symbol effect.

  Also, eight reserved symbols may be used to display a character string that suggests that the third symbol such as "Keisuk !!!!" or "Motnight !!" is to be restarted. . By doing this, it becomes possible to notify the player of the game content other than the result of the determination of the qualification included in the eight pending storages using the pending symbol, and providing a gaming machine rich in gaming characteristics. It becomes possible.

  Furthermore, there is an effect that the third symbol currently displayed dynamically at that time is restarted, with the result of determination of success or failure included in the eight pending storages, the result of lottery of the third symbol dynamically displayed at that time, and Among the judgment results as to whether or not there is a “chance !!!!” or “chance” that the player may be given an advantageous state based on any one result or a combination of two or more results. It may be displayed with an abstract character string such as “Marine Chan!”. By doing this, it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming characteristics.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the condition for performing the eight-holding effect is the case where the number of eight stored memories is stored, but a predetermined number may be stored, or seven.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol is changed to the notification hold symbol as a notification for prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 while pointing to the reserved symbol that changes due to the reserved symbol effect. You may perform by another display, without changing an aspect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the notification display symbol is always displayed in the same display mode ("push" symbol) regardless of the result of the determination of the on-off result stored, and the result display reservation symbol displayed by operating the frame button 22 The contents of the display mode ("big hit !!!!") of are changed based on the result of the pass / fail judgment stored on hold. This allows the player to actively participate in the game because the player can see the effect suggesting the result of the determination that is stored on hold for the first time by operating the frame button 22. It is possible to prevent getting bored early. Note that a plurality of notification hold symbols may be provided on the basis of the hold determination result. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to provide a multiple-stage expectation degree easily by combining the display mode of the notification hold symbol and the display mode of the result display hold symbol.

  Next, details of the composite display effect described above in the second embodiment will be described using FIGS. 113 to 117. FIG. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the location which overlaps with 2nd Embodiment mentioned above. FIG. 113 is a time chart for illustrating the flow of combined display effect. With reference to FIG. 113, a series of flows for variable display in which the composite display effect is used will be described.

  First, when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the start of the variation of the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a frame button effect preparation period (for example, 10 seconds) starts, and the frame button The player is informed that an effect of operating 22 is started (see FIG. 114 (a)). Then, after the third symbol is in the reach display mode, the frame button operation effective period (for example, 10 seconds) is set, and a display for causing the player to operate the frame button 22 is performed, and the frame button 22 within the frame button operation effective period. Detects the situation where the key is pressed (operated) (see FIG. 114 (b)). If the frame button operation under a predetermined condition is performed within the frame button operation effective period after the frame button operation effective period has elapsed, the process shifts to the PUSH effect that is a composite display effect (see FIG. 115B).

  On the other hand, when the frame button operation under the predetermined condition is not performed within the frame button operation effective period, the process shifts to the normal effect period in which the normal super reach effect is performed (see FIG. 115 (c)). When the current change is a reach loss, the third symbol comes off and stops in a mode without being shifted to the combined display effect regardless of the contents of the frame button operation within the frame button operation effective period.

  The PUSH effect is divided into a first half part (period of FIG. 113 (d)) and a second half part (period of FIG. 113 (e)), and a game for collecting "push" symbols displayed on the display screen in the first half part Perform (Figure 116 (a)), display the "push" symbol synthesized and displayed corresponding to the "push" symbol collected in the second half part (Figure 116 (b)), and press the frame button 22 (operation) Change the "push" symbol into a number symbol by doing. After that, the combination of the number symbols displayed on the display screen is temporarily stopped, and the symbols are determined after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  As shown in FIG. 113, the combined display effect in the present embodiment has the same variation time as the other predetermined super reach effects. Furthermore, the image data from the start of the change of the third symbol to the development of super reach (image data used in the period of FIGS. 113 (a) and (b)) and the change of the third symbol from temporary stop to determination Image data (image data used in the period of FIG. 113 (f)) is configured so as to be able to divert image data of other predetermined super reach effects. By doing this, it is not necessary to prepare image data to be used from the start of fluctuation to symbol determination for each super reach effect, and it becomes possible to reduce the amount of image data. In addition, it is configured such that an out-of-reach effect can be performed using image data used in the periods (a), (b), and (f) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 114 (a) is a view exemplifying the display screen in the period of (a) shown in FIG. This display screen is displayed during the frame button effect preparation period for informing the player in advance that the effect of operating the frame button 22 is performed, and the player forgets to operate the frame button 22. Is a display to prevent

  FIG. 114 (b) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen for the period (b) shown in FIG. This display screen is displayed during the frame button operation effective period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid. The display screen prompts the frame button 22 to be repeatedly hit, the continuous hit mission achievement condition “50”, and the current A status display (“1/50”) indicating the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is “1”. Note that the present embodiment has a function of increasing the number of pressings by continuously pressing the frame button 22 for a predetermined time. In addition, you may display the remaining time of a frame button operation effective period (continuous hit mission period).

  FIG. 115 (a) is a view exemplifying a display screen of the period (c) shown in FIG. This display screen is a screen displayed during the normal effect period in which transition to a continuous hitting mission can not be achieved during the frame button operation effective period, and the contents thereof are shown in FIG. 43 (a) of the second embodiment described above. Since it is the same as in FIG.

  FIG. 115 (b) is a view exemplifying a display screen of the period (d) shown in FIG. About the display content of this display screen, since it is the same as FIG.43 (b) of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, description is abbreviate | omitted. Although not shown, values (number of acquisitions, acquisition points, expected big hit) based on the "push" symbol acquired during this period (for example, 15 seconds) are displayed in a color or text in a predetermined area of the display screen .

  FIG. 116 (a) is a view exemplifying a display screen of the second half period of (d) shown in FIG. The display content of this display screen is the same as that of FIG. 44 (a) of the second embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, although six "push" symbols are stop-displayed in this figure, the number of "push" symbols to be stop-displayed is different because the stop mode of the symbol row is different. As described above, the number of "push" symbols displayed in the stop mode indicates the expectation of the jackpot in the variable display, and the larger the number of "push" symbols displayed in the stop display, the higher the expectation level of the jackpot. Is set in advance. In other words, a plurality of variation patterns for performing a composite display effect with different numbers of “push” symbols to be stopped are provided, and “push” to be stopped and displayed is smaller than a variation pattern in which the number of “push” symbols to be stopped is small. The variation pattern with a large number of symbols is set so that the percentage of success or failure judgment results being a big hit is larger.

  FIG. 116B is a diagram exemplifying a display screen for the period (e) shown in FIG. 113. The display contents of this display screen are the same as those in the second embodiment described above with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the blank symbol is changed to the “push” symbol, and the effect of combining and displaying the “push” symbol is performed. However, the blank symbol is changed to various characters and made to correspond to the characters You may comprise so that a text (message) may be synthesized and displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to combine the characters displayed by the player at the timing when the blank symbol is changed to various characters, and to predict the sentences to be composite-displayed, in the later game. It is possible to give a sense of expectation. In addition, when such a configuration is used, it is preferable that the text is synthesized and displayed using a part of the displayed characters, rather than being synthesized and displayed using all the various displayed characters. By doing this, it is possible to make the player predict sentences of various patterns. In addition, in order to be able to identify the characters that are always used, if the character mode (color, size, etc.) that is always used is different from other characters, It is possible to give a hint of the text to be created, and it is possible to more enjoy predicting the text to be created in the composite display.

  FIG. 117 is a display screen of the period (f) shown in FIG. In this display screen, when the player presses the frame button 22, the composite display symbol stops at the combination of the third symbol (main symbol) indicating the determination result. In this figure, the result of the judgment is stopped by the combination of "777" indicating that the jackpot is a big hit, and is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. During the period of (f) shown in FIG. 113, the state is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped at “777” (slightly shaken), and is completely stopped at the end of the period of (f) shown in FIG. It will be in the state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern having the same variation time has a variation pattern for performing the push effect and a variation pattern (normal super reach variation pattern) for which the push effect is not performed. On the basis of the result of determining the achievement condition, either a variation pattern for performing a push effect or a variation pattern for not performing a push effect is set. In other words, since the push effect is included as the variation pattern, it is easy to easily replace the subsequent effect according to the result of the continuous hit mission. In addition, since the player who wants to experience the push effect needs to achieve the consecutive hitting mission, the player will actively participate in the game, and the motivation of the game can be enhanced.

  Next, details of the time presentation described above in the second embodiment will be described using FIGS. 118 to 121. FIG. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the location which overlaps with 2nd Embodiment mentioned above. In addition, in this embodiment, it has the function which can set the period which performs time production. By providing this function, it is possible to intentionally produce a time effect (synchronous effect) while performing a conventional time effect (synchronized effect) that has been produced with a sense of unity by synchronizing the effects executed by a plurality of pachinko machines 10. It is possible to vary (extend) the period during which the (synchronized effect) is performed, and to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

  FIG. 118 is a time chart for illustrating the flow of time presentation. A series of flows relating to time presentation will be described with reference to FIG.

  In this embodiment, it has a function capable of setting a period for performing time effect (details will be described later), and in FIG. 118 (a), the first time effect is performed for 5 minutes after the power is turned on. In FIG. 118 (b), the first time effect after power-on is set to be performed for 8 minutes. Further, the eight-minute time rendition shown in FIG. 118 (b) is divided into the first five minutes and the remaining three minutes, and the first five minutes is set as the rendition mode B which is a time rendition period, and the remaining five minutes are set. Three minutes is set as the effect mode D which is a special time effect period. By setting in this way, during the first 5 minutes in which time effect is performed, effects are performed as the same time effect period (effect mode B) in the case where the time effect period is 5 minutes and in the case where it is 8 minutes. Is possible. Then, when the production mode B ends (when the time production elapses for 5 minutes), the production mode C is entered if the production mode C or the production mode D is entered. And control to shift to the effect mode D.

  In the time effect of the second embodiment described above, the condition that does not shift from the effect mode B to the effect mode A which is the normal game period, that is, the condition to shift to the effect mode C is in the hold storage at the end of the effect mode B The judgment result includes a jackpot judgment result, and among the gaming machines in which the production mode B is executed, the number of gaming machines that shift to the production mode D is extremely small, and the production mode C There is a problem that the player is not interested in the variable display of the third symbol, because the fact that the transition to is in itself notifies that there is a big hit in the hold memory.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the technique described in the second embodiment described above, the condition for shifting to the effect mode D as the condition for not shifting from the effect mode B to the effect mode A that is the normal game period, That is, since the case where the period during which the time effect is performed is set to 8 minutes in advance is added, the number of gaming machines that shift from the effect mode B to other than the effect mode A can be increased. In addition, by unifying the contents of the effects in the effect mode C and the effect mode D, when the player switches from the effect mode B to the effect mode (C or D) other than the effect mode A, the player will immediately hit the jackpot. It becomes possible to raise expectation.

  FIG. 119 (a) is a diagram illustrating the display screen during the time effect period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state where two minutes have elapsed since the time effect was started. The “remaining 180 seconds” displayed on the upper right of the screen is the number of seconds remaining until 5 minutes have elapsed since the start of the time presentation. That is, the same display is performed when 5 minutes is selected as the time effect period and when 8 minutes is selected. The other contents are the same as those in FIG. 46 of the second embodiment described above, and thus the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 119 (b) is a view exemplifying the display screen during the time effect period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state (remaining 3 seconds) in which 4 minutes and 57 seconds have passed since the time effect was started. . In addition, since it becomes the same display mode as FIG. 46 (b) of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above also when 5 minutes are chosen as a time production period, and when 8 minutes are chosen, about the content of a display Will not be described.

  FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram illustrating a display screen at the end of the time effect period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state where five minutes have elapsed since the time effect was started. In addition, since it becomes the same display mode as FIG. 47 (a) of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above also when 5 minutes are chosen as a time production period, and when 8 minutes are chosen, about the content of a display Will not be described.

  FIG. 120B is a diagram illustrating a display screen during the time effect extension period or the special extension effect period shown in FIG. 118. If it is during the time effect extension period, the super fish school time will continue until the fluctuation display that becomes the big hit ends, and if it is during the special extension effect period, the super fish school time will continue for 3 minutes. Therefore, when the number of remaining seconds is displayed, the player can easily grasp whether the current super fish school time is in the time effect extension period or in the special extension effect period, so the main screen "Remaining? Seconds" is displayed in the upper right of the screen. By displaying in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player may become a big hit each time the variable display performed during the super school time is performed. Other display contents are the same as those in the second embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 47B, and thus the description of the display contents is omitted.

  Figure 121 is a special symbol in the pending storage or change stored at that time among the time effect period end or special extension effect period end shown in FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the display screen when not set. As described above, since the image when the super fish school time ends is made common regardless of the state after the end of the time effect period or after the end of the special extension effect period, the volume of the image data can be reduced. it can. The display contents are the same as those in FIG. 48 of the second embodiment described above, and thus the description of the display contents is omitted.

  In addition, in the time production in this embodiment, during the time production period (during production mode B), without giving a production that suggests transition to production mode C or production mode D at the end of the time production period, until the end If the player is expected to have an expectation, but the acceptance judgment is performed based on the information stored on hold immediately before the end of the time effect period, and if the acceptance decision result is a pending storage with a big hit, that is, the time effect period If it is determined that the game shifts to a time rendering extension period (rendering mode C) after the end and it is determined that a jackpot will be made, a rendering may be provided to indicate that effect.

  In addition, when a time effect of 5 minutes or more is set in advance, that is, when transitioning to a special extension effect period (effect mode D) after the end of the time effect period, an effect may be provided to indicate that effect. In this case, the content of the suggestion effect is a content that suggests that it will continue for 5 minutes or longer, and preferably a suggestion content that cannot be determined whether to shift to the effect mode C or the effect mode D. For that purpose, when the timing to execute the suggestion effect is near the end of the time effect period, that is, the fluctuation stop timing of the third symbol whose acceptance determination result corresponds to the pending storage of the big hit passes the time effect period (for example, the big hit When the fluctuation time is one minute, it is preferable that the remaining time of the time presentation period is within 59 seconds.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control unit 110 and part of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control unit 113. And a part of the ROM 234 (representation) in the display control device 114 is changed (added) and that it is clearly indicated that the RTC 292 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113; The point is the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

  This block diagram is different from the block diagram (FIG. 49) showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment described above in that the RTC 292 is clearly connected to the audio lamp control device 113. Since other points are the same, description thereof is omitted. As described above, this RTC 292 is used as a clocking means for performing time presentation.

  As other changes, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are changed (added). This will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 to 148. Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  The contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 123B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110. .

  The ROM 202 in the present embodiment is the same as the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 of the second embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the RAM 203 in the present embodiment has at least a change execution flag 203i and a change order storage area 203j in addition to the RAM 203 in the second embodiment.

  The fluctuation execution flag 203i is a flag used to determine whether the fluctuation is executed in the special view 1 or the fluctuation in the special view 2. This fluctuation execution flag 203i is set in the fluctuation execution determination processing (S4004 in FIG. 127) executed in the special symbol fluctuation processing 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) (see S4105 and S4107 in FIG. 127). And it is referred in order to distinguish fluctuation execution in special design fluctuation processing 2 (S120 in Figure 126) (refer to S4005 and S4010 in Figure 126), when fluctuation execution decision processing (S4004 in Figure 127) is executed, it is off (See S4101 in FIG. 127).

  The variation order storage area 203j is an area for storing a winning order for each reserve data stored in the special symbol 1 reserve ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserve sphere storage area 203b. Eight storage areas are set in the change order storage area 203j, and are stored in the previous storage area in the order of winning. In addition, the storage area is also shifted based on the start of variation of the special symbol. The fluctuation order storage area j stores the winning order in the start winning process 2 (S121 in FIG. 130) (see S4407 and S4414 in FIG. 130). Then, it is referenced in the variation execution determination process (4004 in FIG. 126) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) (see S4102 to S4104 and S4106 in FIG. 127).

  Next, contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition to the ROM 222 in the second embodiment described above, the ROM 222 in the present embodiment has at least a presentation time selection table 222 b (see FIG. 124A). In addition to the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, the RAM 223 in this embodiment includes a special continuation effect flag 223t, an additional effect flag 223u, an eight effect counter 223v, a special continuation effect counter 223w, an identification number storage area 223x, It has at least an effect time storage area 223y and an activation flag 223α (see FIG. 124 (b)).

  The effect time selection table 222b is a table that is referred to when selecting a period during which a synchronous effect (time effect) is performed, and is used in the effect time setting process (S4904 in FIG. 145). The effect time selection table 222b has a plurality of data in which the period (time effect period) in which the synchronous effect (time effect) is performed is different, and corresponds to the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x described later By selecting the time effect period, different time effect periods are selected. Therefore, for example, by giving the same identification number to adjacent gaming machines, it is possible to start the synchronized effect at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, all of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are selected by selecting a predetermined time presentation period from among the plurality of time presentation periods included in the presentation time selection table 222b based on the assigned identification number. Synchronous effects are executed at the same timing, and an effect with a sense of unity is executed, or among some pachinko machines 10, the timing at which only some of the pachinko machines 10 are intentionally produced is different, It is possible to perform a certain production.

  The special continuation effect flag 223t is turned on when the condition for performing the special continuation effect is satisfied in the setting processing of eight during effect (S4806 in FIG. 143). Then, when the value of a special continuation effect counter, which will be described later, becomes 0 (S4809 in FIG. 143). When the special continuation effect flag is turned on, the special continuation effect is performed on the held symbol (S4605 in FIG. 136).

  The additional effect flag 223u is turned on (S4802 in FIG. 143) when the condition for performing the additional effect is established in the eight effect setting process (S1353 in FIG. 143). Then, when the value of the eight continuation effect counter, which will be described later, becomes 0, the number of held pieces stored is 4 or less, and when the value of the special continuation effect counter becomes 0 (see FIG. 143). S4810, S4812). When the additional effect flag 223u is turned on, an additional effect is performed on the held symbol (S4607 in FIG. 136).

  In the eight effect counter 223v, when the eight effect flag 223i is turned on, 8 is set in the value of the counter (S1553 in FIG. 139). Then, when the fluctuation start flag 223e is on in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S1352 in FIG. 140), the value of the counter is decremented by 1 (S1654 in FIG. 140). The eight effect counter 223v determines a period during which eight effects are performed. In the case of this embodiment, the counter value is set to 8, and when a new change is started, the value is decremented by one. Then, by determining that the value of the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not all the reserved symbols (eight) corresponding to the eight effects have been digested.

  In the present embodiment, effects (eight effects) are performed using eight holding symbols, but when performing effects using other than eight (for example, seven) holding symbols, this counter Set the value to 7

  The special continuation effect counter 223w is set to 5 when the special continuation effect flag 223t is turned on in the eight effect setting process (S4807 in FIG. 143). Then, when the fluctuation start flag 223e is on in the fluctuation display setting process 2, the value of the counter is decremented by 1 (S1655 in FIG. 140). The special continuation effect counter 223 w is for defining a period during which the special continuation effect is performed, and in the case of this embodiment, the value of the counter is set to 5 and the value is decremented by 1 when a new change is started. By determining that the value of the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not all the retained symbols (five pieces) corresponding to the special continuation effect have been digested.

  In the present embodiment, although the effect (special continuation effect) is performed using five suspension symbols, the effect (special continuation effect) is performed using the suspension symbols other than five (for example, six) The value of this counter may be set to 6.

  The identification number storage area 223x stores the identification number input in the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1351 in FIG. 134) (S4506 in FIG. 135). ). Then, the identification number stored in the start-up process 2 is cleared (S1209 in FIG. 131). The identification number storage area 223x stores the identification number input by the operator in the identification number input process for setting the period (time) in which the time effect (synchronization effect) is performed using the RTC 292. It is used. When the operator does not input the identification number, the initial value stored in the identification number storage area 223x in the initial setting process of the RAM 223 (S1210 in FIG. 131) is used.

  In the present embodiment, an identification number can be assigned to each gaming machine by operating the frame button 22 for a predetermined time after power activation. Then, time effect (synchronization effect) using the RTC 292 is performed by reading from the effect time selection table 222 b stored in the ROM 222 the effect time (time when synchronous effect is performed) corresponding to the assigned identification number. It is possible to set a period.

  When the effect time is read from the effect time selection table 222b, it is read based on two parameters of the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x and the time data (date, day of week, etc.) acquired from the RTC 292 It is good to do so. By doing this, even if the identification number is the same, it is possible to change the period in which the synchronization effect is performed by changing the date, and it is possible to reduce the work of giving the identification number.

  The effect time storage area 223 y stores the effect time selected in the effect time setting process (S 4905 in FIG. 145). Then, the effect time stored in the start-up process 2 is cleared (S4504 in FIG. 135). This effect time storage area 223y is used to store an effect time which is a period for performing a synchronized effect based on the RTC 292. Based on the effect time stored in this storage area, a synchronized effect (time effect) is stored. Will be done.

  The activation flag 223α is set to ON by the time setting process 2 executed in the startup process 2 of the sound lamp control device (S1262 in FIG. 132). Then, by the identification number input process, it is set to off when a predetermined time (20 minutes) has elapsed since the activation flag was turned on or when an identification number input operation is performed (S4504 in FIG. 135). This activation flag 223α is used for performing processing (identification number input processing) that enables operation only for a predetermined time after the power of the gaming machine is activated, and the activation flag 223α is turned on. The identification number can be entered only when the

  Next, the effect time selection table 222b stored in the ROM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 (a) schematically shows an effect time selection table 222b, and FIG. 125 (b) schematically shows an effect time table selected by the effect time selection table 222b. It is.

  The presentation time selection table 222 b is used to set specific presentation time data out of a plurality of presentation time data stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, and in the present embodiment, The specific effect time data is set by using, as parameters, an identification number that can be set and input by the operator and day of the week data that is time information acquired from the RTC 292.

  The day of the week data includes items for event 1 and event 2 separately from days of the week from Sunday to Saturday. This is an item for a special day such as a holiday or anniversary. The date of the year corresponding to the event 1 or the event 2 is set so that the event item is used in preference to the item of the day of the week (Sunday to Saturday).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125 (b), the timetable of each effect time will be described. FIG. 125 (b) shows a time table for each effect time selected by the effect time selection table 222b. The presentation time is set to different timetables from “I” to “XI”. “A”, “B”, and “D” described on the time table are effect modes set in the period, and indicate effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode D, respectively. . The number described below is the time (minutes) indicating the period.

  Among the effect modes, effect mode A is a period in which a normal effect is performed, and effect mode B and effect mode D are periods in which a time effect (synchronous effect) is performed. In particular, the effect mode D is set so that the transition frequency is lower than that of the effect mode B, and during the effect mode D, an effect that provides information that may be advantageous to the player is executed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting that there is a possibility of shifting to the effect mode D by starting the time effect (synchronization effect).

  In addition, the effect mode C is a effect mode that shifts only when there is a jackpot in the holding memory when the effect mode B and the effect mode D are ended, that is, whether the effect mode shifts according to the game lottery result or not However, the description is omitted in FIG. 125 (b). Actually, after the production mode B and the production mode D, both the production mode A and the production mode C are set. It is set so that the rendering mode is selected appropriately according to the result.

  In the present embodiment, “I” to “VIII” are effect times selected using normal items (Sunday to Saturday) in the day-of-week data, and special items (event 1, event 2) in the day-of-week data. "X" and "XI" are assigned as the production times selected when using ().

  Here, the production time “I” will be described. The production time “I” is a time table in which the production mode B (time production (synchronous production)) is executed for 5 minutes after the production mode A (normal period) is executed for 55 minutes, and is repeated.

  Next, the presentation time "II" will be described. In the presentation time "II", after the presentation mode A (normal period) is executed for 55 minutes, the presentation mode B (time presentation (synchronization presentation)) is 5 minutes, and the presentation mode D (time presentation (synchronization presentation)) is 3 Minutes, that is, a time effect (synchronous effect) is executed for a total of 8 minutes. Then, after performing the effect mode A for 52 minutes, the effect mode B is performed again for 5 minutes.

  The effect time "I" and the effect time "II" are set so that the time for which the time effect (synchronous effect) is performed is different. Similarly, the presentation time “I” to “VIII” are set so that the time period in which the time presentation (synchronization presentation) is performed is different (there is a part that is the same in part). However, regardless of which rendering time is selected, the timing at which time rendering (synchronous rendering) is started is set to be the same. In the above-described effect time “I” and effect time “II”, the period of effect mode A is made different so that the time effect (synchronous effect) starts 55 minutes and 115 minutes after the start. . By configuring in this way, even if various rendering times are selected, by matching the timing at which time rendering (synchronization rendering) is started (timing to switch from rendering mode A to rendering mode B) A certain performance can be executed. Also, since the player cannot grasp whether the current time production is set to 5 minutes or 8 minutes at the timing when the time production starts, is the time production extended? It is possible to see the time production while enjoying whether or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In this embodiment, the day of the week data includes stage times “X” and “XI” which are stage times selected only when a special item such as “event 1” or “event 2” is referred to. . As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the two performance times “X” and “XI” are set to be clearly different from the other performance times. Synchronous rendering occupies half the time of the whole, and in the rendering time "XI", all the time is regarded as time rendering (synchronous rendering).

  In this way, when normal items (day to soil) are used as day-of-week data, the player is not noticed as much as possible about the difference in the period in which the time effect is performed (the player is not aware of the time effect at the start of the time effect). However, when special items (event 1, event 2) are used as day-of-week data, a production time that can clarify the period in which the time production is performed is set.

  In the present embodiment, the rendering time is set as described above, but another method may be used as a setting method of the rendering time. For example, the production time corresponding to the identification number may be selected without using day-of-week data in the production time selection table. When such a configuration is used, when the date has been changed by referring to the time information acquired from the RTC 292, the content of the production time assigned corresponding to the identification number is changed. Thus, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, when the operator does not set the identification number, the identification number “I” stored as an initial value in the identification number storage area 223x of the RAM 223 is used, but the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is With reference to this, when it is determined that the date has changed, the identification number stored as the initial value in the identification number area 223x may be changed. By doing this, it is possible to change the period during which the time effect is performed without performing the input operation of the identification number, and the work of the operator can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the synchronous rendering is performed by referring to the time information acquired from the RTC 292. However, any configuration may be used in place of the RTC 292, as long as a period for performing the synchronous rendering can be set. It may be used.

  As another configuration, for example, a timer that measures an elapsed time from the time of power-on is provided, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a configuration that can be set to enter a predetermined period during which a synchronous effect can be executed, or a frame button 22 A configuration is conceivable in which predetermined information is input by operating, and a predetermined period of time during which a synchronized effect can be executed based on the input predetermined information.

  Specifically, in order to synchronously display on the other pachinko machine 10 the presentation mode (the presentation mode stored on hold) scheduled to be executed on the specific pachinko machine 10, the display mode of the particular pachinko machine 10 The third symbol display device 81 outputs, as a password that can be input to the pachinko machine 10, production information including information indicating the production mode that is reserved and stored. The player inputs the password to the other pachinko machine 10, and the other pachinko machine 10 sets a specific effect mode based on the effect information included in the input password. Then, by causing the player to execute the effect mode set at an arbitrary timing, it becomes possible to synchronize with the effect mode to be executed by the specific pachinko machine 10.

  When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to use RTC 292 to include information indicating the time at which the effect mode stored and stored in the effect information described above is actually executed. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to enjoy the production mode synchronized with the specific pachinko machine 10 and the other pachinko machine 10 at that time simply by inputting the password to the other pachinko machine 10.

  Further, it is preferable that the effect information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not a password but a two-dimensional information code that is information that can be acquired by an external device (mobile terminal). If comprised in this way, it will become possible to acquire the production | presentation information with a portable terminal, and to perform the production | presentation aspect synchronized with the pachinko machines which are distant by transmitting production | presentation information to a distant player by communication.

  In addition, what is synchronized in this way is not limited to the effect mode that is reserved and stored, but may be an effect mode that is a big hit. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 (following pachinko machine) that synchronizes with the rendering mode of the pachinko machine 10 (main pachinko machine) that is the origin of synchronization, the synchronous pachinko machine performs synchronization production only when it is not playing a game The display area of the third symbol display device 81 may be divided and displayed even during the special symbol game.

  By using such a configuration, the player can set the predetermined period in which the synchronous effect can be performed, so that, for example, the player can freely experience the synchronous effect, and it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the game. It becomes.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130. The present fourth embodiment is different from the above-described second embodiment in the order in which the holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the holding balls of the special symbol 2 are digested. That is, in the second embodiment described above, control is performed such that the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially digested with respect to the reserved ball of the special symbol 1. Control is performed to digest the reserved balls of design 2 in the order of winning. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, special symbol variation processing 2 (S120) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S120). This special symbol variation process 2 (S120) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the third symbol display performed in the first symbol display device 37. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S4001). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S4001: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not big hit (S4001: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S4002), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not changing (S4002: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (the fluctuation display of the special symbol The number of holding times N2) is acquired (S4003). Next, it is determined whether the change is executed with the holding ball of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) or the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2). A change execution determination process is performed to set the flag 203i (S4004). The variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  It is determined whether the variable execution flag 203i set by the variable execution determination process (S4004) is variable execution in FIG. 1 (S4005). It is determined whether or not the execution flag 203i is the variation execution of FIG. 2 (S4010). If the execution flag 203i is not the variation execution of FIG. 2 (S4010: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation execution flag 203i is fluctuation execution in the special figure 1 (S4005: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S4006), and the special symbol changed by calculation A holding ball number command indicating the value of the 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set (S4007). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S4007, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S4008). In the processing of S4008, processing is performed to shift data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S4009). In addition, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4005, if the variation execution flag 203i is not variation execution of the special figure 1 (S4005: No), it is determined whether the variation execution flag 203i is variation execution of the special figure 2 (S4010), variation execution flag If 203i is the variation execution of special figure 2 (S4010: Yes), processing similar to the processing about a reserve ball of special figure 1 mentioned above is performed about a reserve ball of special figure 2.

  Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is decremented by 1 (S 4011), and the holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e changed by the calculation is set (S4012). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of S4012, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S4013), and the special symbol for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 is started. Two fluctuation start processing is executed (S4014). The special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4002, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S4015). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If has not passed (S4015: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S4016), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S4015 (S4015: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4017). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S4009) described later with reference to FIG. 128 or a special symbol 2 variation start process (S4014) described later with reference to FIG. 129. When this special symbol 1 variation start process or special symbol 2 variation start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thus, the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. More specifically, in the case of the first special symbol jackpot, it is determined whether to be the jackpot A or jackpot B according to the value of the first hit classification counter C2, the jackpot of the second special symbol In this case, it is determined whether to be the big hit A or the big hit B according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit A, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit B. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S4017 is finished, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol change start process (this lottery result) is a special It is determined whether it is a jackpot of symbols (S4018). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S4018: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S4019), and the process proceeds to S4022.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4018, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the special symbol (S4018: No), it is determined whether the value of the time counter 203g is greater than 0 (S4020). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S4020: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4022. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S4020: No), the process of S4021 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4022.

  In the processing of S4022 executed after the processing of S4019, S4020, or S4021, the lighting of the LED which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the processing of S4017 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set in order to synchronize the change stop of (S4022).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the change execution determination process (S4004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the change execution determination process (S4004). This variation execution determination process (S4004) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 126) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and includes the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. The effect pattern (the change effect pattern) of the change effect performed by the display device 81 is set to the value of the various counters stored in either execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. It is a process for determining whether to execute based on.

  In the fluctuation execution determination process, the fluctuation execution flag 203i is first set to 0 to perform initialization (S4101), and data of the fluctuation order storage area 203j is acquired (S4102). Thereafter, the data in the fluctuation order storage area 203j is shifted (S4103). In the process of S4103, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the variation order storage area 203j is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → holding third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → The data in each area is shifted in the fifth area, the seventh area, the sixth area, and the eighth area, the seventh area, and so on. After the data is shifted, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (S4104).

  When it is determined in the process of S4104 that the execution area data is special figure 1 (S4104: Yes), the variable execution flag 203i is set to variable execution in special figure 1 (S4105), and this process ends. Then, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 2.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution area data is not the special figure 1 (S4104: No), it is determined whether or not the execution area data is the special figure 2 (S4106). When it is determined in the process of S4106 that the execution area data is special figure 2 (S4106: Yes), the variable execution flag 203i is set to variable execution in special figure 2 (S4107), and this process ends. Then, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 2.

  If it is determined in the process of S4106 that the data of the execution area is not the special figure 2 (S4106: No), there is no holding ball to be subjected to fluctuation execution, so this processing is ended with the fluctuation execution flag 203i kept in the initial state. Return to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S4009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing special symbol 1 variation start processing (S4009). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S4009) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (see FIG. 126) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1 of the first special symbol stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection Each value of the counter C3 is acquired (S4201), and it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S4202). Specifically, when the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0, it is determined that the probability changing is being performed, and when the probability changing counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the probability changing is not being performed. If it is determined in the process of S4202 that a definite change is in progress (S4202: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the high probability of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S4203), and the process of S4205 Move to Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value (FIG. 52A) at the high probability of the first random number table 202a. The determination is made by comparing the current values (hit values) one by one (S 4203). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0-9”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “10-399”, it is determined that it is out of place (see FIG. 52A). .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation is not definite (S4202: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value and the small hitting determination value at the low probability of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S4204), and the processing of S4205 Move to Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value (FIG. 52A) at the high probability of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. The determination is made by comparing one by one with the current value (hit value) (S4204). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is “7”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “0-6” or “8-399”, it is determined that it is out of place (FIG. 52 (a) )reference).

  Next, a prize information command including the lottery result is set (S4205), and the process proceeds to S4206. In the process of S4206, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S4203 or S4204 is a big hit. When it is determined that the lottery result acquired in the process of S4203 or S4204 is a big hit (S4206: Yes), the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S4201. Further, the display mode is set (S4207), and the process proceeds to the process of S4208.

  More specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the big hit type selection table 202b, and the big hit (big hit A, big hit B) of the two types of special symbols Among them, it is determined which is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), if it is in the range of "60 to 99", the jackpot B (16R normal jackpot) is determined (see FIG. 52B).

  In the process of S4207, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S4208). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S4208, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53D). Specifically, if it is a big hit, normal reach (30 seconds) if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, and super reach (60 seconds) if it is in the range of “51 to 179”. If it is in the range of “180 to 198”, it becomes a fluctuation pattern of special reach (90 seconds) (see FIG. 53B).

  In the process of S4206, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S4206: No), a display mode of out is set (S4209). In the processing of S4209, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is set. The stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the above. For example, as the stop type, “front / rear out of reach”, “reach other than out of front / rear”, “complete out”, and the like are defined.

  Next, the outlier fluctuation pattern is determined (S4210). It is determined based on the out (normal) selection table 202d2 at normal time (when the probability changing counter 203 is 0), and based on the out (probability) selection table 202d3 at the time of probability change (when the probability changing counter 203g is greater than 0). It is determined. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S4208 and S4210, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and symbol fluctuation such as normal reach or super reach is performed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the variation time. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53D). Specifically, if it is completely out of the range when it is not in the midst of a certain change, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 98”, it is short out (7 seconds), and if it is in the range of “99 to 198”. If it is a reach, if the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", if it is in the range of normal reach (30 seconds) and if it is in the range of "150 to 197", super reach (60 If it is “198”, it will be a special reach (90 seconds).

  When the processing of S4208 and S4210 is finished, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S4208 and S4210 is set (S4211). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processes of S4208 and S4210 is set (S4212). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 67). Will be sent. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S4212 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S4014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S4014). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S4014) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 59) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In this special symbol 2 change start process, similarly to the special symbol 1 change start process (S4009), the first special symbol random number counter C1 of the second special symbol and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a are determined by the process of S4301. Based on the lottery result. Except for the processes of S4307 and S4309, the same process as the process of S4009 is performed on the execution area data in the reserved sphere storage area of the second special symbol, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The process of S4307 is executed when the lottery result acquired in the process of S4303 or S4304 is a big hit (S4306: Yes). In the process of S4307, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 2 selection table 202e2 (FIG. 54C) (S4307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S4307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C). Specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the entire range of values), a fluctuation pattern of B (0.5 seconds) per unit time is obtained (see FIG. 54 (c)).

  Further, the process of S4309 is executed when the lottery result acquired in the process of S4303 or S4304 is out of place (S4306: No). In the processing of S4309, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 2 short time variation pattern table 202e2 (FIG. 54C) (S4309). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S4309, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C). Specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the entire range of values), the variation pattern of the short time deviation B (0.5 seconds) is obtained (see FIG. 54 (c)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130, start winning process 2 (S121) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S121). This start winning process 2 (S121) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 58), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first starting port 63a. It is a process for performing hold processing of values indicated by various random number counters.

  When the start winning process 2 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first start hole 63a (start winning) (S4401). Here, the entry of the first starting opening 63a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first start opening 63a (S4401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S4402). . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S4403).

  And if there is no winning in the first starting opening 63a (S4401: No) or if there is a winning in the first starting opening 63a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first starting port 63a (S4401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S4403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S4404). And the ball holding number command which shows the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S4405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S4405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are used as special symbols. The special figure 1 is stored in the first area of the variation order storage area 203j (S4407), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4408. In the process of S4407, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referred to. If the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the fluctuation order storage area 203j in the above-described fluctuation execution determination process (S4004), the start opening fluctuates the first special symbol as in the present embodiment, and the second special symbol. Even when there are two types of fluctuations with those changing the design, the fluctuation can be started in the order of winning on the starting opening.

  In the process of S4408, it is determined whether or not the ball has won in the second starting opening 63b (starting combination) (S4408). If it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 63b (S4408: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e performs the same processing as when the first starting port 63a was won.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S4409), and if the value is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) ( (S4410: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S4411), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S4412). Then, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b (S4413), and the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203j Special figure 2 is set up (S4414), and it shifts to processing of S4415. The determination of the first area in S4414 is performed in the same manner as the process of S4407.

  If there is no winning in the second starting opening 63b (S4408: No), or if there is a winning in the second starting opening 63b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S4410: No), prefetch processing is executed (S4415), and this processing is terminated as it is.

<Control Process Performed by the Audio Lamp Controller in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 146, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The fourth embodiment is different from the above-described second embodiment in the contents of eight hold effects, a combined display effect, and a time effect (synchronization effect). Other parts are the same, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 131, the start-up process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the start-up process 2. The start-up process 2 is a process performed when the sound lamp control device 113 is powered on, as in the second embodiment described above. In the startup process 2, the processes from S1201 to S1211 are executed as in the second embodiment. Thereafter, the time setting process 2 (S1251 in FIG. 132) is executed, and the process proceeds to the main process 2.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 132, time setting processing 2 (S1251) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the time setting process 2 (S1251). This time setting process 2 (S1251) is a process executed in the start-up process 2, and based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, sets the time (time) at power on (power on) and starts the power. This is a process for turning on the activation flag 223α for executing a process performed only for a predetermined time from the hour.

  In the time setting process 2, as in the second embodiment described above, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 which is clocking means (S1221). Thereafter, based on the acquired time information, the activation time is set in the set time storage area 223j (S1261), and the activation flag 223α is set on (S1262).

  By executing this process and setting the activation flag 223α to ON, it is possible to perform a process (identification number input process (see FIG. 135)) that can be operated only for a predetermined time after the power is turned on.

  Next, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing main processing 2. The main process 2 is executed after the start-up process 2 of the audio lamp control device 113 is completed. In the main process 2, the processes from S1301 to S1306 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 is executed (S1351). Details of the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1351) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 2 (S1351) is executed, the processes of S1308 to S1312 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. Thereafter, the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) is executed. The variable display setting process 2 (S1352) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) is executed, the eight effect setting process (S1353) and the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354) are sequentially performed. Then, after that, the processing of S1317 to S1321 is executed as in the second embodiment described above. The eight effect setting process (S1353) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 144 for the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354), and FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 134, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2. This frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S1351) is executed in the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (in the second embodiment described above) In addition to the same contents as S1307) in FIG. 80, this is a process for inputting an identification number used to set a period (time effect period) for performing a synchronized effect, which will be described later.

  In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2, first, identification number input processing (S1851) is executed.

  Here, the identification number input process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing identification number input processing (S1851).

  In the identification number input process (S1851), first, it is determined whether or not the symbol is changing (S4501). If it is determined that the symbol is changing (S4501: Yes), the present process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol is not changing (S4501: No), it is determined whether the activation flag 223α is set to ON (S4502). If the activation flag 223α is not set to ON (S4501: Yes), this process is completed.

  On the other hand, when the activation flag 223α is set to ON (S4501: No), it is determined whether 20 minutes have passed since the activation (S4503). This determination is made by comparing the activation time (S1261 in FIG. 132) set in the set time storage area with the current time information acquired from the RTC 292. Then, if 20 minutes have elapsed since the start, the start flag is set to OFF (S4504), and this process is completed. On the other hand, if 20 minutes have not elapsed from the time of activation, it is determined whether or not there is an identification number input operation (S4504).

  Here, the identification number input operation will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute a predetermined input operation using the frame button 22, and after the power is turned on, within a predetermined time (within 20 minutes in the present embodiment), and the third When the symbol variation is not performed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 (for example, during the demonstration screen display), when the frame button 22 is pressed once, an identification number input screen is displayed. By inputting “desired input” displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 after inputting a desired identification number on the identification number input screen, it is possible to execute the input of the identification number. In addition, as a method of inputting the identification number, a plurality of input numbers may be displayed on the display screen, and any of them may be selected, or a plurality of numbers from 0 to 9 displayed on the display screen may be used. It is possible to input an identification number by selecting it. Also, “random” is displayed on the display screen, and a predetermined identification number is automatically selected from a plurality of identification numbers by selecting “random”. The method may be used.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined time after the power activation is set to 20 minutes, but this is the time during which the identification numbers can be input to all the pachinko machines 10 even if a plurality of power supplies of the pachinko machine 10 are activated simultaneously. The time may be set as appropriate.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the period during which the identification number can be input is set to a predetermined time after the power is turned on, but this is intended to prevent the player from entering the identification number during the game. As long as the purpose can be achieved, other methods may be adopted, for example, by pressing a switch provided at a position where the player can not operate (for example, the back of the gaming machine). It is configured so that the identification number input operation screen is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, or it is determined that the time information timed by the RTC 292 is outside business hours, and only the hours outside business hours are displayed. An identification number input operation screen may be displayed. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to prevent the player from entering an identification number.

  Returning to FIG. 135, the description will be continued. If the identification number input operation has not been performed in S4505, the process ends. That is, if the identification number input operation is not performed in a state where the predetermined time has not elapsed since the power was turned on, there is a possibility that the identification number input operation may be performed until the predetermined time elapses. This determination is repeated until elapses.

  On the other hand, when the identification number input operation is performed (S4505: Yes), the input identification number is stored in the identification number storage area 223x (S4506), and the activation flag 223α is set to off (S4504). Finish.

  In the identification number input process described above, the identification number, which is a parameter necessary for setting a period (time effect period) in which the synchronization effect to be described later is performed, is limited within a predetermined time after power on. The period during which synchronous rendering is performed is changed based on the identification number set by this processing. Therefore, the store side can easily input the identification number and prevents the player from easily entering the identification number. Therefore, the store side intentionally assigns the same identification number to the adjacent platforms. When it is intended to perform synchronous rendering related to each other, it is possible to reliably perform desired synchronous rendering without the player changing the identification number set by the store.

  Here, returning to FIG. 134, the description will be continued. After the identification number input process (S1851) is executed, the processes from S1811 to S1813 are performed in the same manner as the process performed in the second embodiment described above, and the hold effect flag is set to ON in S1813. If not, an eight-holding effect process (see S1852 in FIG. 136) described later is executed, and then a button effect process (see S1853 in FIG. 137) described later is executed. On the other hand, when the hold effect flag is set to ON, the processes of S1814 and S1815 are executed as in the process performed in the second embodiment described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the eight hold effect process (S1852) will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the eight hold effect process (S1852). In the eight hold effect process (S1852), eight effects performed when eight balls are stored, special continuation effects continuously performed thereafter, and eight effect and special continuation effects are performed. It is processing to execute the effect when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) while the additional effect to be carried out is being performed, and the holding symbol is “push” symbol (notice holding symbol) It is processing to perform an effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 operated when displayed.

  In the eight hold effect process (S1852), first, it is determined whether or not the eight effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4601). If the eight effect flags 223i are not set to on (S4601: No), it is next determined whether or not the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to on (S4602). If the special continuation effect flag 223t is not set to ON (S4602: No), it is next determined whether or not the additional effect flag is set to ON (S4603). If the additional effect flag is not set to ON (S4603: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the eight effect flags 223i are set to ON (S4601: Yes), the corresponding eight pending effects are executed (S4604), and the process proceeds to S4603. In addition, it is in the middle of eight effects, and the notification display symbol is not displayed, that is, the notification display symbol ("push" symbol shown in FIG. 110 (a)) is already displayed by operating the frame button 22. When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing after the change to the symbol (the “big hit !!!!?” Symbol shown in FIG. 111 (a)), the production is not performed on the reserved symbol, but is expected by voice. A so-called roaring effect is performed in which the degree is expressed, or the color of a reserved symbol (for example, “big hit !!!!?”) That has already been changed by eight effects is changed.

  When the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON in S4602 (S4602: Yes), the corresponding special continuation effect of suspension is executed (S4605), and the process proceeds to S4603. In the special continuation effect (while the special continuation effect flag 223t is on), when the operation input of the frame button 22 is already performed after the holding symbol is changed by the operation of the frame button 22, the above-described Similar to the eight effects, the turning effect is performed based on the operation of the frame button.

  When the additional effect flag 223u is set to ON at S4603 (S4603: Yes), the corresponding additional effect flag for holding is set to OFF (S4606), and the corresponding additional effect for holding is executed (S4606) S4607).

  As described above, in the eight hold effect (S1852) executed during the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1351 in FIG. 134), various flags (eight effects at the timing when the frame button 22 is operated) Since the effects executed based on the setting status of the flag 223i, the special continuation effect flag 223t, and the additional effect flag 223u) are different, the player can experience various effects only by performing the same operation. It becomes.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the button effect process (S1853) will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the button effect process (S1853). This button effect process (S1853) is a process for setting a display effect when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) during composite display effect, and based on the button continuous hitting mission displayed in FIG. 114 (b). This is processing corresponding to pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 and pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 based on the “push” symbol displayed in FIG. 116 (b).

  In the button effect process (S1853), first, it is determined whether or not the button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4701). If the button effect flag 223r is not set to ON (S4701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4701: Yes), next, whether or not the stop effect for button effect (“push” symbol in FIG. 116 (b)) is stopped or not It is determined (S4702).

  Here, the button effect flag 223r will be described. The button effect flag 223r is turned on by a button effect selection process 2 (see FIG. 142) described later, and is turned on when the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the composite display effect. Is set.

  In S4702, if the button effect stop symbol is after stop (S4702: Yes), a display command indicating a combined effect mode corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set (S4703). That is, it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 this time is to operate the “Push” symbol displayed in FIG. 116B, and the “Push” symbol is changed to a numeric symbol. Set the display command.

  On the other hand, if the button effect stop symbol is not after the stop (S4702: No), it is determined whether the button operation effective period has passed (S4705). The button operation effective period is a period indicated by (b) in FIG. 113 and is measured by a counter (not shown). Here, if the button operation valid period has elapsed (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether the button pressing condition is achieved (S4706). In the present embodiment, pressing the button 50 times is a button pressing condition (see FIG. 114B).

  If the button pressing condition has not been achieved (S4706: No), the button effect flag is set to OFF (S4704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the button pressing condition has been achieved (S4706: Yes), this process is terminated. That is, when the button operation effective period has elapsed, if the button pressing condition has not been achieved, the combined display effect is not continued, and the normal effect period is reached after the period (b) of FIG. 113 ends ( In order to shift to c), the button effect flag is set to OFF so that the button effect process is not performed.

  Here, the process returns to S4705 and continues the description. If the button operation effective period has not elapsed in S4705 (S4705: No), the number of button presses is stored (S4707), and this processing ends.

  The button effect process has been described above. In this process, when the composite display effect is selected by the button effect selection process 2 (see FIG. 142), the button operation valid period before the stop of the button effect stop symbol is displayed. It is determined whether or not the button has been pressed a sufficient number of times to achieve the button pressing condition (during the button hitting mission), and the button pressing is performed after the button effect stop symbol ("push" symbol) has stopped. When being done, processing is performed to set a display command for changing the stop effect for button effect to a number pattern. If the button press condition cannot be achieved, the button effect flag is set to OFF, and the normal effect pattern (see FIG. 115A) is displayed without stopping the button effect stop symbol. Will be.

  Referring to FIG. 138, notice selection processing 2 (S1454) executed in command determination processing (S1312) in main processing 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by MPU 221 in audio lamp control device 113. ). FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process 2 (S1454). The advance notice selection process 2 (S1454) is a process of setting the notice for display command based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 and the effect mode set by the synchronization effect management process 2 (see FIG. 144) described later.

  In the advance notice selection process 2 (S1454), first, similarly to the advance notice selection process executed in the second embodiment described above, the processes from S1501 to S1507 are executed. Here, if it is determined in the process of S1505 that the effect mode C is not set, it is determined whether the effect mode D is set (S1541). When the effect mode D is not set (S1541: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the effect mode D is set (S1541: Yes), the game state notice effect is selected based on the result of the judgment and the effect counter (S1542), and the notice command for display showing the selected notice effect. Is set (S1543). Then, the process ends.

  Here, the display notice command to be set when the effect mode D is set will be described. In the effect mode D, effects are set only when the period during which synchronous effect (time effect) is performed is longer than normal (five minutes) by the effect time setting process (see FIG. 145) (eight minutes). It is a mode. During such an effect mode D, a notice effect that can be advantageous to the player is performed so that the player is satisfied that the player has entered the effect mode D. For example, it is not related to the notice effect that informs that the current game situation is changing, the notice effect that does not appear in another effect mode, or the result of the direct game, but the player has accumulated There may be a notice effect including information that can acquire a large amount of points (points for raising the level of the character) and information that can acquire a privilege video (information display that can be read by a mobile phone).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, winning command reception process 2 (the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) performed by MPU 221 in voice lamp control device 113 (S1312) is executed. S1461) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process 2 (S1461). The winning command reception process 2 (S1461) is a process performed when the winning command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received.

  In the prize command reception process 2 (S1461), first, the processes of S1511 and S1512 are executed as in the prize command reception process (S1411 of FIG. 73) executed in the second embodiment described above, and an additional effect It is determined whether the flag is set to ON (S1551). When the additional effect flag is not set to ON (S1551: No), the processes of S1514 to S1522 are executed as in the second embodiment described above.

  On the other hand, when the additional effect flag is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the additional effect is set (S1552), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the variation display setting process 2 (S1352) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1352).

  In the variable display setting process 2 (S1352), the processes of S1601 and S1602 are performed in the same manner as the variable display setting process (S1313 of FIG. 74) executed in the second embodiment described above. Then, variation pattern selection processing 2 is executed (S1651).

  Here, fluctuation pattern selection processing 2 (S1651) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651). This variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651) is based on the current effect mode and the value of the acquired effect counter, similarly to the variation pattern selection process (S1603 in FIG. 75) executed in the second embodiment. This is the process of selecting and setting the fluctuation pattern.

  In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651), first, similarly to the variation pattern selection process (S1603) executed in the second embodiment described above, the processes of S1611 and S1612 are executed. When the effect mode A is set in S1612 (S1612: Yes), the button effect selection process 2 is executed (S1661). The button effect selection process 2 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the effect mode A is not set in S1612, S1614 and S1615 are executed as in the variation pattern selection process (S1603) executed in the second embodiment described above. Then, if the rendering mode B is not set in S1614 (S1614: No), it is then determined whether the rendering mode C is set (S1662).

  If it is determined that the effect mode C is set (S1662: Yes), the change pattern is selected and set from the change pattern selection table of the corresponding time effect extension period. On the other hand, when the rendering mode C is not set (S1662: No), the current rendering mode is D, so a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table of the special extension rendering period corresponding to the rendering mode D Set

  Here, with reference to FIG. 142, button effect selection processing 2 (S1661) will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing button effect selection processing 2 (S1661).

  In the button effect selection process 2, first, the processes of S1621 and S1622 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. Then, in the process of S1622, when the fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table is a button effect, the number of times the button is pressed is set (S1671). The number of times the button is pressed is the number of times the button is pressed in order to achieve the button hitting mission (see FIG. 114B) performed during the composite display effect, and is set to 50 in this embodiment. . In the present embodiment, the number of button presses is set to 50, and the mission achievement condition during the composite display effect is used. However, as a mission imposed during the composite display effect (condition setting for reaching the Push effect), the number of button presses is increased or decreased. Alternatively, the frame button may be operated at a predetermined timing.

  And after performing the process of S1623 and S1624 similarly to 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, this process is complete | finished.

  As described above, in addition to the processing of the button effect selection process (S1613 in FIG. 76) performed in the above-described second embodiment, the button effect selection process 2 is a push effect performed during the composite display effect. The button press frequency is set as the condition setting for reaching. By performing this condition setting, even if the button effect is selected as the variation pattern, the player operates the frame button 22 and shifts to the push effect unless the set condition (50 button presses) is achieved. Since there is no such thing, the player can enjoy the pachinko machine 10 because he / she actively operates the frame button 22 to see a special performance and participates in the gaming machine.

  Further, when the player feels that he / she wants to see a normal performance, it is not necessary to press the button. Depending on the player's mood, it is possible to select a later production.

  In this embodiment, the number of button presses is set to 50. However, it is preferable that the number of button presses can be changed each time a button effect is selected as a variation pattern. In addition, even if the button pressing frequency set as the condition setting is achieved, it does not shift to the push effect without fail. For example, when the lottery result of the game is a big hit, it shifts to the push effect without fail, but the lottery result of the game is lost In the case, it is possible to shift to the push effect only with a predetermined probability (30%). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to raise the expectation to the jackpot only by shifting to the push effect, and the player can more actively participate in the game using the operation of the frame button 22.

  In addition, by making it possible to change the number of button presses set as the condition setting, because the lottery result has been lost to the player, it has not shifted to the push effect, or the condition has not been achieved and the push effect has been achieved. It can be difficult to grasp whether it has not been migrated. Also, by setting the number of times the button is pressed, which is set as the condition setting, to one, it is possible to provide a surprising effect.

  In addition, when setting the number of times of button pressing, for example, it is preferable to provide the number of times set only when the lottery result of the game is a big hit. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the game result is a big hit at a display timing of an effect different from usual, and to pay attention to the effect of the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), the blank symbol is changed to a "push" symbol, and the effect of compositely displaying the "push" symbol is performed, but the blank symbol is changed to various characters. It may be configured to change and display sentences (messages) corresponding to the characters in combination. With such a configuration, it is possible to combine the characters displayed by the player at the timing when the blank symbol is changed to various characters, and to predict the sentences to be composite-displayed, in the later game. It is possible to give a sense of expectation. In addition, when such a configuration is used, it is preferable that the text is synthesized and displayed using a part of the displayed characters, rather than being synthesized and displayed using all the various displayed characters. By doing this, it is possible to make the player predict sentences of various patterns. In addition, in order to be able to identify the characters that are always used, if the character mode (color, size, etc.) that is always used is different from other characters, It is possible to give a hint of the text to be created, and it is possible to more enjoy predicting the text to be created in the composite display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the eight effect setting processing (S1353) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the eight effect setting process (S1353). The eight effect setting process (S1353) is a process of performing various settings relating to a reserved symbol effect (see FIGS. 110 to 112) performed based on the number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved memories).

  In the eight effect setting process (S1353), first, it is determined whether the eight effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4801). When the eight effect flag 223i is set to on (S4801: Yes), the additional effect flag 223u is set to on (S4802). As described above, the additional effect flag 223 u is a flag that is used when determining whether or not the additional winning effect is to be performed. Then, it is determined whether the value of the eight effect counter 223v is larger than 0 (S4803). The eight effect counter 223v is a counter for counting the number of times of symbol variation after the eight effects using the reserved symbols are executed as described above, and if the value is greater than 0, the eight effects continue It represents the state.

  When the value of the eight effect counter 223v is larger than 0, that is, in the state where eight effects are continuing (S4803: Yes), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the eight effect counter 223v is not larger than 0, that is, if the value of the eight effect counter 223v is 0 (S4803: No), the eight effect flag 223i is set to OFF (S4804). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of holds is greater than 4 (S4805).

  If the number of held pieces is more than 4 (S4805: Yes), the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4806), then 5 is set to the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w (S4807), and this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when the number of holdings is not more than 4 (in the case of 4 or less) (S4805: No), the additional effect flag 223u is set to OFF (S4811), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to S4801, the description will be continued. If the eight effect flag 223i is not on (S4801: No), it is determined whether the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to on (S4808). If the special continuation effect flag 223t is not set to ON (S4808: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4808: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is greater than 0 (S4809).

  If the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is greater than 0 (S4809: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is not larger than 0 (when the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is 0) (S4809: No), the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to OFF (S4810). The additional effect flag 223u is set to OFF (S4811). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, in the setting process during the eight productions, when determining whether to perform the eight productions, the special continuation production, and the additional prize production performed based on the number of retained symbols (the number of stored memories). Various flags to be referenced are set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the synchronized effect management process 2 (S1354) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the synchronized effect management process 2 (S1354). This synchronous production management process 2 (S1354) is a process of setting the production mode (A to D) based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. The synchronous production management process executed in the second embodiment described above. One effect mode to be set is added to (S1314).

  In synchronization effect management process 2 (S1354), an effect time setting process (S1751) is first executed. In the effect time setting process (S1751), the time setting process 2 (S1251 in FIG. 132) executed in the start-up process 2 (FIG. 131) executed after the power is turned on by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Using the activation flag 223α set to ON and the identification number stored in the identification number storage area in the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. This is a process of setting the production time.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 145, the rendering time setting process (S1751) will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the effect time setting process (S1751).

  In the presentation time setting process, first. It is determined whether or not the production time has already been set (S4901). If the effect time has already been set (S4901: YES), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the production time is not set (S4901: No), it is next determined whether the activation flag is set to ON (S4902). If the activation flag is set to ON (S4902: YES), this process ends. On the other hand, when the activation flag is not set to ON (S4902: No), the process proceeds to S4903 described later.

  That is, in S4902, it is possible to determine that the period during which the identification number can be assigned to the pachinko machine 10 has elapsed by looking at the state of the activation flag 223α, and to assign the identification number to the pachinko machine 10. The production time is set after a long period of time has passed. In the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135), when the activation flag is turned off without inputting the identification number, the identification number stored as the initial setting in the identification number storage area 223x is used.

  After it is determined in S4902 that the activation flag is not set to ON, the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x is acquired (S4903), and the effect time corresponding to the identification number is selected for the effect time selection table Select from (222b). Then, the selected effect time is stored in the effect time storage area 223y (S4905), and this process ends.

  The production time selection table (222b) used in S4904 is created based on the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x and the time information acquired from the RTC 292, as described above with reference to FIG. The presentation time can be selected with reference to the data. By using such a presentation time selection table 222b, it is not necessary to change the identification number every day if you want to change the presentation time every day because the time for which the presentation time is provided is changed only by changing the day of the week. It is possible to reduce the change work.

  Moreover, although two event days are set other than normal day-of-week data based on the time information acquired from RTC292, if it is a parameter that can be created based on the time information acquired not only by this but according to RTC292 Other parameters may be referenced. Examples of other parameters include a parameter that separates even days and odd days, a parameter that identifies holidays, and a parameter that identifies dates having the same month and day.

  In this embodiment, the effect time is set with reference to two parameters of day data and an identification number, but the effect time may be set with reference to three or more parameters. By doing in this way, a more complicated combination can be provided easily.

  In the present embodiment, an identification number can be input as a parameter that can be set by the operator, so that a predetermined plurality of units (for example, adjacent pachinko machines 10) can be synchronized with the same timing (time). In addition to this, parameters that can be set by the operator may be provided.

In the present embodiment, parameters (day of the week data) based on time information acquired from the RTC 292 are used as parameters set by the pachinko machine 10, but other parameters may be provided. For example, parameters based on the game information (the number of jackpots and number of balls) of the previous day of the pachinko machine 10 may be set. Good. By configuring in this way,
In addition to the frame button 22, an input means such as a touch panel type input means or a selection button (cross button) for selecting information displayed on the display screen is used as a means for the operator to set and input parameters. It may be provided in the machine 10. By providing such an input means, it is possible to prepare a complicated setting input. Further, such input means may be used for display effects of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. After performing the effect time setting process (S1751 in FIG. 145), the processes from S1701 to S1705 are performed in the same manner as the synchronous effect management process (S1314 in FIG. 77) executed in the second embodiment described above. finish. On the other hand, if the effect mode is not set to the effect mode A in S1702, it is determined whether the effect mode is set to the effect mode B or the effect mode D (S1752).

  If it is determined that the mode is not the production mode B or the production mode D (S1752: No), the processing of S1709 and S1710 is performed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the production mode B or the production mode D (S1752: Yes), whether or not the time information (data) acquired from the RTC 292 is the time information after 4 minutes and 57 seconds have elapsed from the start of the time production. (S1753).

  In S1753, the elapsed time may be calculated by comparing the time production start time and the current time, or the time table of the production time (see FIG. 125 (b)) 4 minutes 57 in advance. The timing after the second may be set, and it may be determined whether the timing (time) has passed. Further, a configuration may be used in which a timer that starts timing from the timing at which the time effect is started is provided without acquiring time information from the RTC 292, and the timer counts 4 minutes and 57 seconds using the timer.

  When the time information acquired from the RTC 292 has not passed 4 minutes 57 seconds from the start of the time effect (S1753: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the time information acquired from the RTC 292 has passed 4 minutes 57 seconds from the start of the time effect (S1753: Yes), it is determined whether the current time effect period is 5 minutes (S1754).

  If the time effect period is 5 minutes (S1754: Yes), that is, if the effect mode is the effect mode C, the process of S1708 is performed as in the second embodiment described above, and the process ends. On the other hand, when the time effect period is not 5 minutes (S1754: No), that is, when the effect mode is the effect mode D, the extension effect setting process 2 is executed (S1755), and this process ends.

  Next, the extension effect setting process 2 (S1755) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the extension effect setting process 2 (S1755). The extension effect setting process 2 is a process that is executed when the time effect period is not 5 minutes, that is, when the time effect period is 8 minutes, in order to extend the time effect period of 5 minutes. This is a process for making necessary settings.

  In the extension effect setting process 2 (S1755), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S5001). If it is determined that the jackpot is being won (S5001: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S5002), the effect mode is set to effect mode A (S5003), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S5001: No), it is determined whether the time effect period (synchronization effect period) has ended (S5004). If the time effect period has not ended (S5004: No), it is then determined whether five minutes have elapsed since the start of the time effect (S5005). When 5 minutes have not elapsed since the time effect was started (S5005: No), a re-change effect is set (S5008), and this process is terminated.

  That is, S5008 is determined in S1753 of FIG. 144 that 4 minutes and 57 seconds have elapsed since the start of the time effect, and 5 minutes have passed since the time effect was started in S5005 of FIG. 146. This is a process performed when it is determined that the time effect is not present, and is a process of setting a re-variation effect performed between 4 minutes 57 seconds and 5 minutes after the start of the time effect.

  The re-variation effect is the same as that of the second embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that five minutes have elapsed since the start of the time effect at S5005 (S5005: Yes), the extension effect flag is set to ON (S5006), and then the effect mode is the effect mode D Is set (S5007), and the process ends.

  Returning to S5004, the description will be continued. If it is determined in S5004 that the time effect period has ended (S5004: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S5009), and then the effect mode is set to effect mode A (S5010). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011).

  The winning information storage area 223a stores the determination result that is stored on hold and the determination result that is currently changing, and a maximum of nine determination results are stored.

  If there is no jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011: Yes), the time until the big hit change is calculated, and that time is set as the extension effect time in the extension effect time storage area 223q. It sets (S5012).

  Thereafter, a re-change effect is set (S5013), the extended effect flag 223p is set to ON (S5014), and the effect mode is set to effect mode C (S5015). Then, the process ends.

  The synchronous production management process 2 described above is the synchronous production management executed in the second embodiment described above in that the extended production setting process 2 is performed as a process related to the production mode D newly added in the present embodiment. The processing is different from the processing (S1314 in FIG. 77), and the other processing is the same.

  In this embodiment, even if the production mode D, that is, the time production period is 8 minutes, as in the other production modes, when the time production approaches 5 minutes (after 4 minutes and 57 seconds have elapsed), FIG. As shown in (a), the sign display mode in which the effect design is displayed with a slight shaking for 3 seconds (up to 5 minutes) is displayed. Therefore, the effect when the time effect period elapses 5 minutes can be made the same as the other pachinko machine 10 in which the effect mode B is set, and the sense of unity of the effect can be enhanced. Further, after the plurality of pachinko machines 10 perform the re-variation effect at the same timing, only the pachinko machine 10 for which the effect mode C or the effect mode D is selected performs the extension effect, and therefore the effect mode C or the effect A player who is playing the pachinko machine 10 in which the mode D is selected can feel the sense that his / her pachinko machine 10 has been selected and can immerse himself in superiority.

  In the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above, the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is used in the control related to the synchronous effect so that a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can provide a sense of unity. However, for example, in the case of enjoying the synchronization effect with only two adjacent units, the predetermined operation is performed by simultaneously performing the predetermined operation on the frame button 22 without using the RTC 292. The time effect may be started from. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enjoy the time effect at any time you like and to control the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In addition, although the effect data (display mode) dedicated to time effect is used in this embodiment, the effect data for time effect is set from among the effect data (effect data in the normal state) also used outside the time effect period. You may use it. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the amount of effect data. In the case of using such a configuration, it is preferable to provide means for limiting the production data set as the production data for the time production so that it is not displayed outside the time production period (normal state). In addition, the synchronization methods of the effect modes described above may be combined respectively.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device 114 in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148, among the controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the respective controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment described above are different. The point will be described. In this embodiment, eight commands are produced in the processing when the command regarding the special continuation effect or the additional effect is received in the hold command process 2 (S2461 in FIG. 147) and the effect command process 2 (S2463 in FIG. 148). The point of difference is that a process when an effect command related to a special continuation effect or an additional effect is received is added. The same parts as the respective controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 147, pending command processing 2 (S2461) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of the hold command process 2 (S2461).

  When the hold command process 2 (S2461) is executed, the processes from S2801 to S2807 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. If it is determined in S2805 that the received command is not an effect of eight (S2805: No), it is determined whether the received command is a special continuation effect (S2851). If it is determined that the received command is a special continuation effect (S2851: Yes), the corresponding holding symbol is changed to a special continuation effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2852).

  On the other hand, if the received command is not a special continuation effect (S2851: No), it is determined whether the received command is an additional effect (S2853). If it is determined that the received command is not an additional effect (S2853: No), the setting of other hold display is executed (S2807), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the received command is an additional effect (S2853: Yes), the corresponding reserved symbol is changed to the additional effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2854). Then, the setting of other hold display is executed (S2807), and this processing is ended. In addition, a change to an additional production pattern is changing to the "?" Symbol shown in FIG. 111 (b).

  The hold command processing 2 in the present embodiment is configured to process and set the received command related to the number of held and the received command related to the effect using the hold symbol at different timings. In other words, even if both a command related to the number of hold and a command related to the effect using the hold symbol are stored in the command buffer area, the command determination process (S2302 in FIG. 86) is performed after the command related to the hold number is first processed. After looping, perform processing of the command related to the effect using the hold symbol. By configuring in this way, when the reserved symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the normal reserved symbol is once displayed, and the displayed reserved symbol is then the effect symbol. It is possible to reliably perform display that changes. Therefore, the player can visually grasp that the number of reserved symbols has increased and the increased reserved symbols have changed to production symbols.

  The above-described configuration can achieve further effects by being executed with eight effects performed in the present embodiment. That is, eight effects performed in the present embodiment are effects that can be executed when the number of held pieces reaches eight, and one effect aspect (character string) is displayed using eight held symbols. (FIG. 111 (a)). When performing such a holding symbol effect, if the process of displaying the eighth holding symbol and the process of displaying eight effects are simultaneously performed, the seven symbols are displayed on the third symbol display screen. There was a risk that the display would be suddenly displayed so as to switch to eight effects. If the hold display is changed in this manner, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize that the eighth hold symbol has occurred. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, even if both the command related to the number of reserved items and the command related to the production using the reserved symbols are stored in the command buffer area, first, after processing the command related to the reserved number, The command determination process (S2302 in FIG. 86) is looped, and then the command process related to the effect using the reserved symbol is performed, so that the time lag between the command process related to the reserved number and the command related to the effect using the reserved symbol Can be provided, and the above-described problems can be prevented.

  It should be noted that the period for displaying the eighth reserved symbol only needs to be such that the player can recognize the increased display of the reserved symbol (20 milliseconds or more). If necessary, the eighth reserved symbol is displayed. You may provide the process which provides time delay (it delays the timing which displays 8 effects) after displaying it until it displays 8 effects.

  Moreover, it is good to include the display data in which eight normal hold symbols are displayed at the beginning of the display data regarding the eight effect symbols set in the display data table in S2806 of FIG. By doing so, it is possible to reliably display eight normal reserved symbols when processing and displaying commands related to eight effects.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the effect command process 2 (S2463) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing effect command processing 2 (S2463). This effect command process 2 is the addition of processes corresponding to commands for eight effects, special continuation effects, and additional effects to the effect command process (S2413 in FIG. 90) executed in the second embodiment described above. Since other parts are the same, description thereof is omitted.

  First, when the effect command process 2 (S2463) is executed, the effect command process (S2413) executed in the second embodiment described above is performed. The processing from S2901 to S2904 is executed. If it is determined in S2903 that the effect is not a pseudo extension effect (S2903: No), it is determined whether the received command is one of eight effects, a special continuation effect, or an additional effect (S2951). . If none of the eight effects, the special continuation effects, or the additional effects (S2951: No), the processes from S2907 to S2912 are executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined at S 2951 that the received command is any of eight effects, special continuation effects, or additional effects (S 2951: Yes), eight effects corresponding to the commands, special continuation effect Or set the display data table of the additional effect in the display data table buffer.

  In the present embodiment, the technology for setting various effects display related to the variation of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 has been described. Only may be performed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. By doing this, the player can play a game intensively in order to feel some sense of discomfort, and the motivation for the game can be enhanced.

  In addition to the effect display related to the variation of the third symbol, various effect displays may be set based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. For example, in the effects relating to the jackpot game, the start timing of the jackpot video and jackpot sound to be executed may be controlled by the time information acquired from the RTC 292. Specifically, the award game executed when the result of the determination made based on the ball entering the winning entrance (entrance entrance) is a determination result that provides a predetermined privilege (big hit) , A timing at which a bonus effect (a jackpot video, jackpot voice (BGM), etc.) provided as a bonus game is started is set to a predetermined timing (for example, 00 seconds per minute) based on time information acquired from the clock means (RTC292). Control). By configuring in this way, even if the adjacent pachinko machine 10 is a big hit with a slight time difference (for example, a time difference of about 30 seconds), the big hit effect (video and audio) executed during the big hit game is synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect with a sense of unity even during the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, by synchronizing the timing of the effect that informs the gaming state after the jackpot game that is performed during the jackpot game (the effect that informs whether or not it will be in a promiscuous state after the jackpot game is finished), a more integrated effect can be achieved. It becomes possible to offer.

  Further, in the case where the effect during the jackpot game is synchronized based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, even if the contents of the effect (video or audio) during the jackpot game are different between the adjacent pachinko machines 10. Good. For example, by providing a female pattern and a male pattern as voices during the big hit game, effects of different contents are combined by the synchronization effects during the big hit game, and it is possible to provide a more integrated effect.

  In the present embodiment, a technique based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is used in order to execute an effect with a sense of unity in the adjacent pachinko machine 10, but other techniques may be employed. For example, an informing unit that informs the pachinko machine 10 of information based on the game in an identifiable manner (information indicating that the jackpot game is being played or information indicating that the determination result of whether or not the hit determination result is a big hit is stored in a light-emitting manner. Display unit) and a detection unit (light detection sensor) for detecting a notification mode of the notification unit, and information notified to the notification unit by the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the pachinko machine 10 adjacent to the pachinko machine 10. Even when the detection unit detects information based on the game of the adjacent pachinko machine 10 can be determined, and based on the result of the determination, it is possible to execute an effect in which the adjacent pachinko machines 10 are synchronized with each other. Good. With this configuration, for example, in the adjacent pachinko machine 10, it is possible to execute an effect such that one of them is a big hit in a synchronized manner.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 149 to 159, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the display control related to the fourth embodiment described above in which the configuration of the distribution unit 1164 is related to the third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen) is the third embodiment. It differs from a form, About another structure, it is the same as each embodiment mentioned above. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The difference between the configuration of the distribution unit 1164 of the fifth embodiment and that of the fourth embodiment will be described in detail. The configuration is such that the balls that have entered the distribution unit 1164 are distributed in three directions, and the through gate 67 (1067). In that the distribution unit 1164 is provided.

  In addition, to describe in detail the difference from the third embodiment in the display control of the fifth embodiment, the pseudo variable display is displayed on the sub liquid crystal based on the determination result of the propriety determination result stored on hold. The display control is different from the point that the display contents displayed on the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal can be switched.

  FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 149, below the variable display device unit 80 provided on the front surface of the game board 13, a distribution unit 1164 in which a ball can enter is disposed. The balls that have entered the distribution unit 1164 are configured to be distributed to a first winning port 1964a, a left second winning port 1964b, or a through gate 1067, which will be described later.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 150, the configuration of distribution unit 1164 will be described. FIGS. 150 (a) and 150 (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 1164. FIG. Since the structure of the two distribution members 1900 and 1950 provided in the distribution unit 1164 is the same as that of the distribution member 900 used in the above-described fourth embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. For convenience of describing this embodiment, different reference numerals are given.

  First, the flow when a sphere enters the distribution unit 1164 will be described with reference to FIG. The ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 passes through the ball sensor 1164, and the ball is stored in the storage portion 1900c of the first distribution member 1900 provided in the upper part of the distribution unit 1164. It flows down while rotating 1900 clockwise, is guided to the guiding member 1900z2, and is accommodated in the accommodating portion 1950c of the second distributing member 1950.

  The balls accommodated in the accommodating portion 1950c of the second distribution member 1950 flow down while rotating the second distribution member 1950 clockwise by its own weight, and enter the first winning opening 1964a. Next, the ball that has entered the sorting unit 1164 is housed in the housing portion 1900a of the first sorting member, flows down while rotating the first sorting member 1900 counterclockwise, is guided to the guiding member 1900z1, and the through gate 1067 is passed through. pass. The ball having passed through gate 1067 passes through a hole (not shown) provided on the surface of gaming board 13 and flows down to the back surface of pachinko machine 10.

  Then, the ball that has entered the sorting unit 1164 is housed in the first sorting member housing portion 1900c, flows down while rotating the first sorting member 1900 clockwise, is guided to the guiding member 1900z2, and is second sorted. The member 1950 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 1950a.

  The ball housed in the housing portion 1950a of the second distribution member 1950 flows down while rotating the second distribution member 1950 counterclockwise by its own weight, and enters the left second winning opening 1964b. Then, the ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 passes through the through gate 1067 along the same path as the flow passing through the through gate 1067 described above.

  As described above, the distribution unit 1164 used in the present embodiment repeatedly distributes the balls that have entered the balls in the order of the first winning port 1964a → the through gate 1067 → the second left winning port 1964b → the through gate 1067. Is configured as.

  In this way, by providing a plurality of winning holes and through gates in one distribution unit 1164, it becomes possible to make the installation space of various devices (winning holes, through gates, etc.) provided on the game board surface compact. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 which improves the interest of the further game by performing decoration and production using the vacant space on the game board surface.

  Furthermore, in the distribution unit 1164 in this embodiment, two distribution members having the same configuration as the distribution member 900 used in the distribution unit 1064 of the fourth embodiment described above are provided, so that the balls are distributed in three directions. Therefore, it is possible to use the same sorting member for the two-way and three-way ball distribution in the distribution unit according to the game play of the pachinko machine 10, thereby reducing the cost. It becomes possible.

  Although the distribution unit 1164 in this embodiment uses a configuration in which the ball distribution destination is changed according to the weight of the flowing ball, it is also possible to use a configuration in which the ball distribution destination is changed using an electrical drive source. Good.

  In the distribution unit 1164 in the present embodiment, the ratio of distribution to the first winning port 1964a, the second left winning port 1964b, and the through gate 1067 is. Although one-to-one-to-two is used, a configuration may be used in which all of the components are uniformly distributed.

  In this embodiment, a ball detection sensor 1164 that detects a ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 is provided. This is used for control to detect a clogged ball in the distribution unit 1164, and a ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 within a predetermined time passes through the through gate 1067, the first winning port 1964a, or the left second winning port. This control is performed by determining which one of 1964b has entered the ball. Each of the through gate 1067, the first winning opening 1964a, and the left second winning opening 1964b is provided with a detection sensor (not shown) that detects that a ball has entered (passed).

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to discover an act of illegally operating the sorting members 1900 and 1950 provided in the sorting unit 1164 and guiding the ball that has entered the sorting unit 1164 to a specific location, the through gate 1067 is used. The order of entering (passing) the first winning opening 1964a or the left second winning opening 1964b is memorized and compared with the entering order mechanically distributed by the distributing unit 1164. Judging.

  In addition, when the detection sensor which detects the ball | bowl which entered the left 2nd winning hole 1964b and the right 2nd winning hole 640 collectively is provided, a ball | bowl can enter the right 2nd winning hole 640. In a gaming state (during time reduction, during probability change, etc.), control is performed so as not to perform the above-described fraud discrimination. By doing so, it is possible to easily find the act of restricting the rotation of the sorting members 1900 and 1950 and causing the game ball to continuously enter a specific location (for example, the second left winning opening 1964b). it can.

  Moreover, in order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent act, it is preferable that the ball is allowed to flow down only when the sorting members 1900 and 1950 are rotated. Specifically, in the distribution unit 1164 shown in FIG. 150 (a), there is formed a location where the distance between the top of the wall surface constituting the accommodating portion of the distribution member and the inner wall of the distribution unit 1164 is less than one ball. The distribution unit 1164 may be configured to With this configuration, the ball cannot flow down within the sorting unit 1164 unless the sorting member rotates, and therefore the act of causing the ball to flow down to a specific location with the turning of the sorting member restricted. Can be prevented.

  Next, effect control displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 151 is a time chart for explaining a flow related to a special symbol variation effect performed using a third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and a spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen) described later. As shown in FIG. 151, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment displays the fact that the game ball has won a prize at the entrance, and the main variation (variation based on the variation pattern command) displayed in variation linked with the variation of the special symbol. It is configured to be able to execute the prior pseudo-variation that is variably displayed based on the winning command shown.

  First, the variation period of the special symbol shown in FIG. 151 is a period in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the first symbol display device 37. The fluctuation period of the special symbol corresponding to each of the prize 1 to the prize 5 described later is shown as the fluctuation 1 to the fluctuation 5. The number of reserved balls for a special symbol is the number that holds the determination result of the special symbol, and the ball wins a prize at the first entrance or the second entrance when the special symbol is fluctuating or a big hit game. Increase and decrease with the start of new special symbol fluctuations.

  The winning combination indicates whether or not the ball has won the first ball entry or the second ball entry. In FIG. 151, for convenience of explanation, the ball that has won the first place is shown as prize 1, following prize 2, prize 3, prize 4, and prize 5.

  The 1st entrance or the 2nd entrance is configured to determine whether or not the jackpot game is won when the ball enters, and to pay out the winning ball. Is not performed when the number of entering balls exceeds the number of pending storages. On the other hand, the payout of the winning balls is executed for all entering balls. Here, a ball enters each ball entry port, and indicates what can receive a payout of a winning ball as a ball entry, and a ball enters each ball entry port and wins a thing that can receive a hit or not judgment of a big hit game And show the explanation below.

  On the lower side of the time chart in FIG. 151, the third symbol fluctuation 1 which is the fluctuation display of the third symbol dynamically displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) From FIG. 3, the third symbol variation 5 is shown.

  The third symbol variation is composed of a main variation corresponding to the variation of the special symbol and a prior pseudo variation corresponding to the reception timing of the winning command, and this variation is displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device on the third symbol display device 81. At 670, it is configured to be able to execute pre-simulation.

  Pre-pseudo variation means that the variation content of the third symbol is determined based on the information included in the winning command, and the period before the actual variation is started (the remaining variation time of the variation display where the variation has already started, The third symbol is fluctuated in a pseudo manner using a period in which the variation time corresponding to the reserved symbol stored in advance is combined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151, winning of a ball and fluctuation timing of the third symbol will be described. First, when a winning 1 occurs when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0, the special symbol variation (variation 1) is started, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the main variation of the third symbol. (This variation of the third symbol variation 1). Then, when winning 2 occurs while the variation 1 is being performed, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol increases to 1. Based on the occurrence of the winning 2, the preliminary pseudo variation of the third symbol variation 2 is started on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen). Thereafter, when winning 3 occurs, the number of special symbol holding balls increases to 2 and the prior pseudo-variation of the third symbol variation 3 is generated, but the ball liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) continues the third symbol variation 2 The prior pseudo-variation is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the preliminary simulated variation is duplicated, the preliminary simulated variation corresponding to the reserved symbol selected by the player is displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and the player does not select the reserved symbol. Then, it is configured to display, in the spherical liquid crystal device 670, the prior pseudo-variation corresponding to the reserved symbol for which this variation starts. In the drawing, the case where the player does not select the hold symbol will be described. Therefore, even at the timing when the winning 3 is generated, the prior pseudo fluctuation of the third symbol fluctuation 2 based on the winning 2 where the main fluctuation is started next is displayed.

  Note that the method of displaying the prior pseudo-variation on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) is not limited to the display method of the present embodiment, and, for example, even if a plurality of all the prior pseudo-variations can be displayed simultaneously It is also possible to display one selected by the player from among a plurality of pre-simulated changes displayed simultaneously. Further, only when the player selects the prior pseudo-variable display, the prior pseudo-variable may be displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen), or when the player does not select the prior pseudo-variable display. Alternatively, a pre-pseudo-variation display may be displayed that corresponds to the held symbol for which the jackpot expectation level is high (pre-reading effect).

  When the variation 1 of the special symbol ends and the timing at which the variation 2 starts, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol decreases by one, and the third symbol variation 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (main screen). Main fluctuation of the third symbol fluctuation 3 is started in the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen). At this timing, the third symbol variation 2 is switched from the preliminary pseudo variation performed in the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen) to the main variation performed in the third symbol display device. In order to eliminate a sense of incongruity in the switching of the display, an effect of fading out the variation display of the prior pseudo variation is performed in accordance with the timing when the prior pseudo variation is completed (the timing when the previous main variation is stopped). By doing this, it is possible to continue without discomfort the effect of the prior pseudo-variation performed by the spherical liquid crystal device 670 and the effect of the main fluctuation performed by the third symbol display device. Moreover, the uncomfortable feeling is also eliminated by making the background in which the third symbol variation is performed the same between the prior pseudo variation and the main variation. The same processing is performed thereafter.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 152 and FIG. 153, a display screen on which the prior pseudo variation of the third symbol variation and the main variation are performed will be described. FIG. 152 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the main variation is performed in the third symbol display device 81 as the main screen and the prior pseudo variation is performed in the spherical liquid crystal device 670 as the sub screen.

  The third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as the main screen) displays the variation of the third symbol in the main display area Dm and displays the reserved symbol in the sub display area Ds as in the second embodiment described above. Etc., and the description of the same content is omitted.

  On the main screen in the present embodiment, a mark (black circle) is displayed on the reserved symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds so that the reserved symbol corresponding to the pre-pseudo fluctuation currently being performed can be identified. Yes. In FIG. 152 (a), it is displayed that the prior pseudo-variation corresponding to the reserved symbol “1” is being performed in the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (hereinafter referred to as a sub screen). By using such a configuration, the player can easily grasp which reserved symbol corresponds to which of the reserved symbols among a plurality of reserved symbols. In addition, the reserved symbol “3” is displayed in a mode different from the other reserved symbols, indicating that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high.

  Further, "screen switching push" is displayed on the right side of the sub display area Ds. This is a display for notifying the player that the display contents of the main screen and the sub screen can be switched. The configuration for switching between the main screen and the sub screen will be described later.

  FIG. 152 (b) is a schematic view showing a state in which a preliminary pseudo change is performed on the main screen and a main change is performed on the sub screen. FIG. 152 (b) is displayed in the image and sub-symbol displayed in the main symbol by operating the frame button 22 and executing the screen switching operation in the state where FIG. 152 (a) is displayed. Images are switched. Specifically, the image data displayed on the main display area Dm of the main screen is switched between the image data displayed on the sub-screen and the sub-display area Ds is displayed as shown in FIG. ). In this manner, by switching the contents displayed on the main screen and the sub screen by the operation of the player, the player can select an effect that he / she is interested in and can view the effect on the main screen It becomes like this.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, the main screen has a size about six times that of the sub screen, and the variable display displayed on the main screen is overwhelming. Can be provided. In pachinko machines equipped with screens of different sizes, using this configuration, the player is interested in a variety of changes displayed simultaneously (main change and prior pseudo change). Since the display can be selected and the selected variation display can be displayed on the main screen, a desired effect can be provided to the player on a more powerful screen.

  FIG. 153 (a) is a schematic view showing a state in which a preliminary pseudo change is performed on the main screen and a main change is performed on the sub screen. FIG. 153 (a) is one in which the player changes the target of the prior pseudo change from the holding symbol "1" to the holding symbol "3" in the state where FIG. 152 (b) is displayed. The reserved symbol that is subject to prior pseudo-variation is configured to be selectable by the player operating the frame button 22, and a mark (black circle) is placed on the reserved symbol “3” selected by the player. Is attached.

  The main screen displays a pre-pseudo fluctuation corresponding to the reserved symbol “3”, and a mode “chance!” Indicating that the expectation of jackpot is high.

  FIG. 153 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the main variation using the reserved symbol that is the target of the prior pseudo variation selected in FIG. 153 (a) is performed on the main screen. As shown in the figure, the main variation using the reserved symbol selected as the target of the prior pseudo variation starts, and when the pre pseudo variation ends, the main variation is displayed on the main screen. The display contents of the display screen are configured to be switched automatically. In addition, an aspect “chance!” Indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high, which is displayed from during the preliminary pseudo change display, is continuously displayed also in the present change display. By configuring in this way, even if the pre-fluctuation change changes to the main change, it is possible to provide an effect with continuity and prevent the player from being confused. .

  In this figure, since there is no reserved symbol, the preliminary pseudo-variable display is not performed on the sub screen. As described above, when the prior pseudo-variable display is not performed, it is preferable to use the sub screen as an effect of the main variation display displayed on the main screen.

  As described above, the prior variation display and the main variation display executed on the main screen and the sub screen have been described using the schematic diagrams of the respective screens, but the following can be considered as effects displayed on each screen. .

  First, even if the display time of this variation display is set to be short, that is, the variation time of the special symbol is set to be short, sufficiently inform the player whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. In order to make it possible to select, the pre-pseudo-fluctuation effect that shows the expected degree of the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol (for example, the comment display effect that suggests the stop symbol of the third symbol or the character equipment is selected and determined) Expected result suggestion effect, and in this variation effect, a result display effect is provided as an effect to display the lottery result (an effect that the third symbol stops or an effect that the character attacks the enemy) .

  Even if this variation time is set to be short in order to increase the efficiency of the game by performing such an effect, by performing the expectation suggestion effect by the prior pseudo variation effect, the player can draw the special symbol lottery result You can wait while enjoying what is displayed.

  Second, when the display mode of the hold symbol displayed on the third display device 81 is selected, in order to allow the player to experience the effect desired by the player for a long time. The display mode (for example, displaying a plurality of characters) that suggests the content of the displayed prior pseudo-variation is displayed, and when the player selects a desired reserved symbol, the character displayed in the selected reserved symbol appears. The effect to be displayed is displayed in advance pseudo-variation.

  By performing such an effect, the player can enjoy the desired effect as the prior simulated change effect while performing the lottery game of the special symbol as usual. In addition, since the desired effect is provided by using the prior pseudo-change effect instead of the actual effect, it is possible to experience the desired effect for a long time.

  In addition, it is possible to achieve further effects by setting so that the character that appeared in the prior pseudo-variation effect also appears in the main variation effect using the reserved symbol corresponding to the prior pseudo-variation effect Become.

  As mentioned above, although the prior pseudo | simulation fluctuation | variation production of this embodiment was demonstrated, you may employ | adopt structures other than the structure mentioned above if it is a structure which produces the same effect.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the display of the sub display area Ds is displayed on the main screen without switching so that the player is not confused, but the display of the sub display area Ds may also be switched. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the processing load on generation of image data in the display control device 114.

  Note that the prior pseudo variation used in the present embodiment includes not only the variation of the third symbol but also the mode displayed in the main display area Dm with the variation of the third symbol. Story development, changes in background image, etc. are also included.

  Further, the operation of switching between the main screen and the sub screen may be configured to be effective only within a predetermined period. For example, it is preferable to be able to switch the screen only while the third symbol corresponding to this variation is performing high-speed variation. By doing this, switching of the screen is not performed in a period in which the processing relating to the game is concentrated (the period in which the processing relating to the stop display of the third symbol is performed), and the processing load on the control device can be reduced.

  Further, in a state where the prior pseudo fluctuation is being executed on the sub-screen, it may be configured to be able to select a reserved symbol that is a target of the prior pseudo fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, the preliminary pseudo variation effect corresponding to the reserved symbol of the special symbol is executed on the sub-screen. However, for example, the preliminary pseudo variation effect corresponding to the reserved symbol of the normal symbol may be performed. In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which the start winning of the special symbol and the start winning of the normal symbol are regularly distributed like the distribution unit 1164 described in the present embodiment, the reserved symbol of the normal symbol is displayed. Since it is possible to maintain the predetermined number, it is possible to enjoy the prior pseudo fluctuation effect.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the point that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is connected to the display control device 114 and the content of the RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are changed with respect to the third embodiment described above. Is different. Since the other points are the same as those of the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

  This embodiment is different from the third embodiment described above in that it clearly indicates that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is connected to the display control device 114. Further, in the present embodiment, a ball entry sensor 1164a shown in FIG. 150 is newly provided, but is handled as part of various switches 208.

  FIG. 155 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. The present embodiment is different from the above-described third embodiment in that a switching flag 233 o is provided in the RAM 233 of the display control device 114.

  The switching flag 233o is a flag used to determine whether to switch the display between the main screen (third symbol display device 81) and the sub screen (spherical liquid crystal device 670), and is a command executed by the display control device 114. In the determination process 2, when it is determined that there is a switching command, it is set to ON (S2556 in FIG. 158), and in the command determination process 2, the identification number corresponding to the pre-pseudo-variable effect is assigned. If it is determined that there is a variation pattern command, it is set to off (S2554 in FIG. 158).

<Control Process Executed by the Audio Lamp Controller in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The fifth embodiment is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that a preliminary pseudo variation setting process is executed in the main process. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, main processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the main process 3 in the fifth embodiment. This main process 3 executes the processes of S1301 to S1354 in the same manner as the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) in the fourth embodiment described above, and then performs the prior pseudo variation setting process (S1355) added in the present embodiment. Run. Then, as in the main process 2 described above, the processes of S1317 to S1321 are executed, and this process is repeated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the prior pseudo variation setting process (S1355) will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the prior artificial fluctuation setting process (S1355). The prior artificial fluctuation setting process (S1355) is a process of setting the prior artificial fluctuation to be displayed on the main screen and the sub screen based on the winning command and the operation of the player.

  When the pre-pseudo-variation setting process (S1355) is set, it is first determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received (S5101). If the special symbol winning command has not been received (S5101: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if a special symbol winning command has been received (S5101: Yes), based on the winning command, the pre-pseudo pseudo variation effect is selected (S5102).

  In S5102, it is analyzed whether the information included in the winning command is jackpot, missed super reach, or missed, and a predetermined variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the analysis result. Note that the variation pattern selection table 222 of the present embodiment also stores a plurality of variation patterns of prior pseudo variation effects. Then, the selected fluctuation pattern is temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, it is determined whether there is a selection of a holding symbol (S5103). This is to determine whether or not the player is selecting and operating a reserved symbol for which a pre-pseudo-variable effect is to be executed from among a plurality of reserved symbols, and can be selected by operating the frame button 22 doing.

  If it is determined in S5103 that the reserved symbol is not selected (S5103: No), the identification information corresponding to the oldest reserved symbol and the pre-pseudo variation effect are set (S5107). The oldest pending symbol is the pending symbol corresponding to the oldest pending storage among the information stored pending, that is, the special symbol whose fluctuation is started after the currently moving special symbol is stopped It is a holding symbol corresponding to a symbol.

  Further, the identification information is given so that individual winning information can be identified, and is information that allows various commands created based on a single ball winning at the entrance to be linked. And is attached to the header of each command. A command (held ball number command, winning command) created in the start winning process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 by this identification information, and a special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60) ) Commands having different transmission timings such as commands (variation pattern commands, stop type commands) created in (1) can be linked by the MPU 211 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S5103 that the reserved symbol has been selected (S5103: Yes), identification information corresponding to the selected reserved symbol and a prior pseudo-variable effect are set.

  Next, it is determined whether a switching operation has been performed (S5105). This is to determine whether or not an operation to switch the display content between the main screen and the sub screen has been made, and if it is determined that there is no switching operation (S5105: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a switching operation (S5105: Yes), a switching command is set (S5106), and this process is terminated.

  Next, command determination processing 2 (S 2352) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S2352). The command determination process 2 (S2352) is a process executed in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114. The V interrupt process is the same as that in the second embodiment described above. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  Further, the processing from S2404 to S2417 executed in the command determination processing is executed in the other command processing (S2553) in the command determination processing 2, and the description of the contents is omitted.

  When the command determination process 2 (S2352) is executed, the processes from S2401 to S2403 are performed similarly to the command determination process executed in the second embodiment described above. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command to which identification information corresponding to the prior pseudo variation presentation is given (S2551). If it is determined that there is no variation pattern command to which identification information corresponding to the prior pseudo variation effect is given (S2551: No), it is then determined whether there is a switching command (S2552). If there is no switching command (S2552: No), other command processing is executed (S2553), and this processing is looped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2551 that there is a display variation pattern command to which identification information corresponding to the prior pseudo variation effect is given (S2552: Yes), the switching flag 233o is set to OFF (S2554). ), The pre-pseudo fluctuation effect is ended (S2555). Then, the process proceeds to S2552.

  If it is determined in S2552 that there is a switching command (S2552: Yes), the switching flag 233o is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2553.

  By setting the switching flag 233o by the command determination processing 2 described above, it is possible to switch the display content between the main screen and the sub screen in the drawing processing described later. Also, in order to end the pre-pseudo variation effect using the identification information given to the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, in the gaming machine in which the variation time of the special symbol changes depending on the number of symbols retained at the beginning of the variation Even if it is, it becomes possible to execute the prior pseudo-variation just before the start of this variation.

  Next, the drawing process 2 (S2356) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the drawing process 2 (S2356). The drawing process 2 (S2356) is a process performed to switch display contents between the main screen and the sub screen.

  In the drawing process 2 (S2356), first, a first drawing list is generated (S3901). The first drawing list is a drawing list relating to the fluctuation display (this fluctuation display) of the third symbol performed corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol. Next, a second drawing list is generated (S3902). The second drawing list is a drawing list related to the variation display (preliminary pseudo variation display) of the third symbol set based on the special symbol winning command.

  Then, it is determined whether the switching flag 233o is set to on (S3903). If the switching flag 233o is set to ON (S3903: Yes), the first drawing list and the drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller with the output destination as the sub screen (S3904). Then, the output destination is the main screen, and the second drawing list and drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller (S3905). That is, when the player operates the frame button 22 to switch the display content between the main screen and the sub screen, the switching flag is set to ON, and an image based on the first drawing list generated in S3901 is displayed on the sub screen. The image based on the second drawing list generated in S3902 is displayed on the main screen.

  Thereafter, the drawing target buffer flag is updated (S3906), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the switching flag 233o is not set to ON (S3903: No), the first drawing list and drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller with the output destination as the main screen (S3907). Then, using the output destination as a sub-screen, the second drawing list and drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller (S3908), and the process proceeds to S3906.

  By using the above-described prior pseudo-variation, it is possible to solve the problems of the prior art described below.

  Heretofore, there has been an effect of changing the mode of the holding symbol based on the information included in the winning command. By using this conventional technology, it is possible to notify the player that there is a high expectation that the determination result of the success / failure determination result is a big hit among the reserved symbols stored on hold, Until the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the retention memory with high expectation which is the jackpot starts, it was necessary to keep watching the fluctuation display of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of other special symbols. In recent years, there are also pachinko machines that can receive a lot of pass / fail judgments by shortening the variation time of special symbols, but with such pachinko machines, the third symbol corresponding to the variation of special symbols There is a problem that the fluctuation display of the becomes short, and it is lacking in the fun of the game.

  In order to perform the prior pseudo-variation before the main fluctuation corresponding to the prize command is started, the expectation degree which is the jackpot is raised in the present embodiment based on the information included in the prize command in order to solve the problem described above. After receiving a winning command corresponding to high pending storage, display a preliminary pseudo-variation created based on the information included in the winning command even from when the main variation corresponding to the winning command is started. And the player can view the variation display of the third symbol based on the retention memory with high expectation of the jackpot from the time when the main variation of the third symbol based on other suspension memory is performed It becomes possible to become interested in the variable display of the third symbol. Furthermore, by setting the special symbol variation time short, even if the main variation time of the third symbol is shortened, the variation time of the third symbol based on one prize is lengthened by providing a preliminary pseudo variation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined and implemented.

  You may comprise combining each embodiment mentioned above and the one part or all part of the modification. Moreover, although comprised with several control apparatus, you may make it comprise not only it but one integrated control apparatus.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Projection Operation Unit 400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable between a retracted position and a rotating position. A base-side displacement member that is disposed on the base-side displacement member and is formed so as to be displaceable between a reference position and an overhanging position projecting outward from the base-side displacement member with respect to the reference position. A displacement member, and a first operation for rotating the proximal displacement member between the retracted position and the rotational position, and the relative displacement member with respect to the proximal displacement member at the reference position and the extended position. A game machine A1 that is capable of executing a second action that is displaced between each other.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine that produces an effect by rotating a displacement member around a base end side rotatably supported (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-92634). For example, paragraphs 0175 to 0189, see FIG. 83)). According to this gaming machine, by rotating the displacement member in one direction, the distal end side of the displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position which is the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, while the displacement member is in a direction opposite to the one direction. By rotating in the other direction, the displacement member is retracted out of the display area (retreat position) of the liquid crystal display device. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the outer shape of the displacement member is small, it is difficult for the player to sufficiently see the displacement member at a predetermined position on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, when the outer shape of the displacement member is large, a large space is required outside the display area (retracted position). The gaming machine A1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and the player can fully view the displacement member at a predetermined position while suppressing the space required for the retracted position. An object is to provide a gaming machine.

  That is, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is disposed on the base side displacement member that is formed to be rotatable between the retracted position and the rotation position, and the reference position and the reference position are disposed on the base side displacement member. And a first operation for rotating the base side displacement member between the retracted position and the rotation position, and a relative displacement member formed displaceably between the overhanging positions projecting outward from the base side displacement member. Since the second operation of displacing the relative displacement member relative to the base displacement member between the reference position and the extended position can be executed, the base displacement member at the retracted position is rotated by the first operation. When disposing at the position, the relative displacement member at the reference position is disposed at the projecting position by the second operation, so that the relative displacement member can be projected outward from the base side displacement member. Therefore, since the displacement member can be enlarged as a whole by that amount, the displacement member can be sufficiently viewed by the player at the rotational position, and the rendering effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  On the other hand, when the base side displacement member at the rotation position is arranged at the retracted position by the first operation, the relative displacement member by the extended position is arranged at the reference position by the second operation, whereby the base of the relative displacement member is arranged. The outward protrusion from the side displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, since the displacement member can be reduced in size as a whole, the space required to accommodate the displacement member can be suppressed at the retracted position. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other parts and devices.

  The second operation may be performed at least until the second operation is arranged at the retracted position (that is, until the first operation is completed). Thus, at least a portion of the first operation and at least a portion of the second operation may be performed in an overlapping manner.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a front member that is disposed in front of a moving plane of the displacement member and that has an opening, and the relative displacement when the base-side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position by the first operation. When at least a part of the member is visible to the player through the opening of the front member, and the relative displacement member is disposed at the extended position by the second operation, the front member of the relative displacement member A game machine A2 characterized in that the area visible to the player through the opening is enlarged.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the relative displacement member evacuated to the withdrawal position is first caused to appear at the opening of the front member by rotational movement (first operation), and the relative displacement In addition to making the player visually recognize only a part of the member, next, a linear motion (second operation) performs an effect of enlarging the region where the player can visually recognize the relative displacement member through the opening of the front member. Can.

  In the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is disposed slidably on the base side displacement member, and the second operation is performed by setting the relative displacement member to the reference position and the overhang relative to the base side displacement member. A gaming machine A3 that is slid and displaced between positions.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is slidably disposed on the base side displacement member, and the second operation is performed with respect to the base side displacement member. Since the slide displacement is performed between the reference position and the extension position, for example, the relative displacement member is stretched from the reference position as compared with the case where the second operation is a mode in which the relative displacement member is rotated relative to the base displacement member. The space required for displacing to the exit position can be reduced, and a space for disposing other parts and devices can be secured accordingly. In addition, since the displacement mode of the relative displacement member by the second motion can be made different from the displacement mode of the base displacement member by the first motion, the effect of performing the first motion and the second motion Can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A3, the relative displacement members are disposed on the base side displacement members in a posture along the longitudinal direction of each other, and the direction of the slide displacement is the direction along the longitudinal direction of each other A game machine A4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the relative displacement members are disposed in a posture in which the longitudinal directions of the base side displacement members are aligned with each other. Since it is set as the direction along the longitudinal direction, the displacement member can be expanded and contracted as a whole by the slide displacement along the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member with respect to the base side displacement member. Therefore, in the rotational position, by enlarging the displacement member as a whole by extension, the player can be sufficiently visually recognized, and the rendering effect can be sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, at the retracted position, the displacement member can be made smaller as a whole by shortening, so that the space required to accommodate the displacement member can be suppressed, and a space for arranging other parts and devices is secured. can do.

  Further, according to the gaming machine A4, the relative displacement member evacuated to the retracted position is first caused to appear from the side of the opening of the front member by rotational movement (first operation), and a part of the relative displacement member The player is made to visually recognize only the player, and then it is made to project toward the inside of the opening of the front member by the linear motion (second operation), thereby effecting the relative displacement member to enlarge the visible region of the player. be able to. Therefore, the visible area of the relative displacement member can be enlarged by the movement form (linear movement) different from the movement form (rotational movement) at the time of appearance, and the visual observation area is enlarged by the unexpectedness due to the change of the movement form It is possible to make the player feel a sense of speed by being played and a sense of unity of the combined action by being performed continuously while being combined. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that cannot be achieved with a configuration in which the relative displacement member simply protrudes and retracts with respect to the opening of the front member only by linear motion (a configuration in which the retracted position and the extended position are reciprocated).

  The gaming machine A4 includes transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is disposed at a position overlapping the displacement member disposed at the retracted position in a front view A game machine A5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacing member is provided, and the transmitting means is in front view with the displacing member disposed at the retracted position. Since they are disposed at the overlapping position, the dead space formed on the back side of the displacement member disposed at the retracted position can be effectively utilized as the disposition space of the transmission means.

  In the gaming machine A5, the drive means, the transmission means and a holding member for holding the displacement member are provided, the drive means and the displacement member are disposed on one side of the holding member, and the displacement member is in the longitudinal direction A game machine A6 arranged at the retracted position with the drive means positioned on an extension of the above.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the driving means and the displacement member are disposed on one side of the holding member, so for example, driving on one side and the other side across the holding member Compared with the case where the means and the displacement member are respectively disposed, the size in the direction connecting the one surface side and the other surface side of the holding member can be reduced. Furthermore, since the displacement member is disposed at the retracted position in a posture in which the drive means is positioned on the extension of the longitudinal direction, the displacement member and the drive means can be linearly arranged. Therefore, the space required as a retracted position can be efficiently suppressed.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member, and a holding member for holding the transmission means, the transmission member driving the drive means A predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position is pivotally supported at a position eccentric to the rotation member rotated by receiving a force and the rotation center of the rotation member, and the one side position is rotated by the holding member And a link member pivotally supported so that the other side position is connected to the relative displacement member of the displacement member, and the rotation member is rotated between the first rotational position and the intermediate rotational position. As the base side displacement member is rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member in accordance with the displacement of the link member, the first operation is performed, and the rotation member is rotated between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position. If the rotation is Gaming machine A7, wherein a relative displacement member of the displacement member in association with the displacement of the click member is displaced relative to the base-side displacement member, the second operation is performed.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the link member pivotally supports a predetermined position between the one-side position and the other-side position at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and the one-side position is pivoted to the holding member. Since the other side position is connected to the relative displacement member of the displacement member, the rotation member is rotated by the driving force of the drive means, so that the rotation of the rotation member is changed to the relative displacement member of the displacement member via the link member. It can be transmitted. In this case, when the rotation member is rotated between the first rotation position and the intermediate rotation position, the base side displacement member can be rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member in accordance with the displacement of the link member. Can perform an action. On the other hand, when the rotation member is rotated between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position, the relative displacement member of the displacement member can be displaced relative to the base side displacement member in accordance with the displacement of the link member. Can do That is, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, two different operations of the first operation and the second operation can be performed by one driving means, so that the component cost can be reduced. This can reduce the product cost accordingly.

  In addition, the transmission means may have a structure in which a gear is provided at one side position of the link member, and a gear provided on the outer periphery of the rotation member is meshed with the gear to displace the link member. The space required to arrange the members and the link members is increased. On the other hand, in the gaming machine A6, since the predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position of the link member is pivotally supported by the rotating member, the rotating member and the link member can be arranged in an overlapping state in a front view, The space required for disposing the rotating member and the link member can be suppressed by the overlap.

  Furthermore, since the relative displacement member and the holding member are connected via the transmission member, the swing of the relative displacement member can be suppressed by using the rigidity of the holding member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement trajectory of the displacement member when the proximal displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation is disposed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps in front view. A game machine A8 comprising a decorative member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, when the base side displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation, at least the displacement member and the decoration member in front view It can be crossed in part, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A8, in the displacement member, one longitudinal side of the base displacement member is the rotation center in the first operation, and the relative displacement members are longitudinal directions of each other on the front side of the base displacement member. And the second operation slide-displaces the relative displacement member between the reference position and the overhanging position with respect to the base-side displacement member, and the decoration member The displacement movement at the rotation tip side of the displacement member when the proximal displacement member is rotated by the first operation is disposed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps in the front view, and the first operation causes the base displacement member to rotate. When the side displacement member is disposed at the rotational position, the overlap in a front view with the displacement member is not formed, and the relative displacement member is such that the rotation center side is on the front side rather than the rotation tip side Gaming machine A9, characterized in that it is location shape.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member has a shape in which the rotation center side is located on the front side rather than the rotation tip side, that is, Since the rotation tip side is shaped to be located behind the back side, the contact between the relative displacement member and the decorative member can be suppressed when the base side displacement member is rotated by the first operation. In this case, since the displacement member has the longitudinal direction one side of the base side displacement member as the rotation center in the first operation, the rotating tip end which is the free end tends to swing back and forth during the first operation and contacts the decorative member Are likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration of the gaming machine A9 is particularly effective.

  On the other hand, when sliding the relative displacement member from the reference position to the overhanging position by the second operation, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member has the front side closer to the rotation center than the front end side By adopting the shape located on the side, the relative displacement member can be disposed more forward (side closer to the player) and the force can be increased accordingly.

  In the gaming machine A9, the shape in which the rotation center side of the relative displacement member is located on the front side rather than the rotation tip side of the relative displacement member is an arbitrary shape from the rotation tip side to the rotation center side. It may be changed stepwise, or may be changed gradually in a straight line or a curved line.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, the pin member provided on one of the base displacement member or the relative displacement member and the other of the base displacement member or the relative displacement member so as to be able to slide displace the pin member A slide groove for receiving and enabling slide displacement of the relative displacement member relative to the base side displacement member, wherein the position at which the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is the relative position relative to the pin member A gaming machine A10 that is on the distal side in the sliding direction of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A6 to A9, the position at which the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is the sliding direction leading end side of the relative displacement member than the pin member Therefore, the location where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be brought closer to the distal end side in the sliding direction of the relative displacement member. In other words, the location where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be moved away from the location where the proximal displacement member is pivotally supported by the holding member. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the relative displacement member from shaking in the front-rear direction.

<About the concept of the invention taking the complex operation unit 500 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a driving unit that generates a driving force; a driven member that is driven and displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit; and a holding member that holds the driven member in a displaceable manner. A driven member connected to the driven member in a displaceable manner; and a displacement defining means for defining a displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member. The displacement defining means allows the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member. By defining, when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the driven member is relatively displaced with respect to the driven member.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the liquid crystal display from the projecting position and the projecting position of the liquid crystal display device, for example, by the driving force from the driving means. There is known a gaming machine which produces effects by displacing a displacement member between a retracted position where it is retracted out of the display area of the device (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-200790 (eg, paragraph 0095, FIG. 11 to 15)). According to this gaming machine, a change is imparted to the displacement mode of the displacement member by switching the output direction of the driving means or making the output intermittent. However, since the conventional gaming machine described above is configured to change the output of the driving means, there is a problem that the control is complicated, while the displacement member is displaced according to the change in the output of the driving means. Since only the speed is changed and the displacement direction remains constant, there is a problem that a sufficient change is not given to the aspect of the displacement. The gaming machine B1 is made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can change the displacement mode of the displacement member while keeping the output of the driving means constant. Do.

  That is, according to the gaming machine B1, when the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, the displacement regulating means regulates the displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member, thereby displacing the driven member. Accordingly, the driven member can be driven while being displaced relative to the driven member. That is, even when the driven member is displaced, for example, in a linear or circular arc-like constant trajectory, the driven member can be displaced on a trajectory different from that of the driven member. Further, since the change of the aspect of the displacement is formed by relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member, even if the driven member is displaced at a constant speed, it is different from the driven member. The track can displace the driven member. Therefore, a change can be given to the aspect of displacement of the driven member while keeping the output of the drive means constant.

  In the gaming machine B1, the displacement defining means is a first groove portion formed in a groove shape in one of the driven member or the holding member, and is guided along the first groove portion and the other of the driven member or the holding member And a first guided portion formed on the gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the displacement defining means includes the first groove portion and the first guided portion, and the first guided portion is guided along the first groove portion. The displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member can be defined. Therefore, the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the outline (shape) of the first groove by driving the driven member by the driving force of the driving means and displacing the driven member. That is, by setting the contour (shape) of the first groove portion, the aspect of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be set arbitrarily. As described above, since the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-like portion (first groove portion) and the portion (first guided portion) guided to the portion, the structure is simplified and the product cost is reduced. At the same time, the reliability and durability of the movable part can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driven member is at least rotatably connected to the driven member, so when the driven member is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member. The relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be changed, and the player can recognize a strong change in impression as a change in the displacement mode.

  In the gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slide-displaceable state, so that the driven member is relatively moved with the displacement of the driven member. When displacing, not only the relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can not only be changed by rotation, but also the relative position of both can be changed by slide displacement. It is possible to increase the variation of change that can be given.

  In the gaming machine B4, the displacement defining means is guided along a second groove portion formed in a groove shape in one of the driven member or the holding member and along the second groove portion, and the other of the driven member or the holding member And a second guided portion formed on the gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the displacement defining means includes the second groove portion and the second guided portion, and the second guided portion is guided along the second groove portion. The displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member can be defined. Therefore, the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, so that the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the contour (shape) of the second groove portion. That is, by setting the contour (shape) of the second groove, the aspect of the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. In particular, when the driven member is connected to the driven member so as to be rotatable and slidable, the guide structure is a combination of the first groove portion and the first guided portion, and the combination of the second groove portion and the second guided portion. By providing both of the guide structure, it is possible not only to increase the variation of the change that can be given to the aspect of the displacement, but also to make such displacements two even when the displaceable directions of the driven member with respect to the driven member are multiple. Since guidance can be performed by the guide structure, it is possible to suppress the instability of displacement and to improve the reliability as the movable member.

  In the gaming machine B5, as in the case described above, the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-shaped part (second groove part) and the part guided by the part (second guided part). Can be simplified to reduce the product cost and to improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

  In the gaming machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the driven member is configured such that the second guided portion is rotatable and slide-displaced. The driven member has a groove-shaped connecting groove portion which is inserted in a possible state, and the driven member can be rotatably and slidably displaced on the driven member by inserting the second guided portion into the connecting groove portion. A game machine B6 characterized by being connected.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the second groove is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the second guided portion is the driven member. By being inserted into the connection groove, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidably displaceable state, so that the driven member is held by being guided to the second groove and guided to the second groove. Both the role of defining the displacement with respect to the member and the role of connecting the driven member to the driven member so as to be capable of relative displacement can be used by being inserted into the connection groove. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost, and the structure can be simplified to improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

  In the gaming machine B6, at least a portion of the holding member in which the second groove portion is formed is interposed between the driven member and the driven member, and the driven member is the second groove portion of the holding member. A game machine B7, comprising: an abutting portion that abuts on a peripheral edge of the disc, and the abutting portion is formed in a circular shape concentric with the second guided portion.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B6, the driven member includes an abutting portion that abuts on the periphery of the second groove portion of the holding member, and the abutting portion is the second guided portion The contact area between the contact portion and the holding portion (periphery of the second groove portion) is formed even if the driven member is rotated with respect to the holding member (second groove portion). It is possible to suppress the support reaction force from changing. As a result, the driven member can be displaced in a stable state.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the holding member can be displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the driven member can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member. In this state, the driving means, the driven member and the driven member are formed so as to be able to be held.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the holding member is capable of displacing the driven member by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement of the driven member Accordingly, the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member are formed so as to be able to be held in a state in which the driven member is displaceable, so that the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member are held by the holding member Can be united as As a result, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost when assembling the unit itself and the manufacturing cost when assembling the unit into the gaming machine main body and assembling the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine B8, the first groove portion is formed in the holding member, and the first guided portion is formed in a driven member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8, the first groove portion is formed in the holding member and the first guided portion is formed in the driven member, so that the first groove portion is formed. It is easy to secure space. That is, a space for forming the first groove portion is made by using the dead space of the holding member that must be formed in a relatively large outer shape in order to hold the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member into a unit. Can be secured. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the contour (shape) and the extension length of the first groove portion can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the aspect of the displacement can be increased accordingly.

  In the gaming machine B9, the displacement defining means includes a second groove portion formed in a groove shape in the holding member, and a second guided portion formed in the driven member while being guided along the second groove portion. The holding member includes a first opposing portion and a second opposing portion facing each other with the driven member interposed therebetween, and the first groove portion is formed in one of the first opposing portion or the second opposing portion. And the second groove portion is formed in the other of the first opposing portion or the second opposing portion.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, the first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion of the holding member facing each other across the driven member. Since the second groove is formed in the second groove, the first groove and the second groove can be formed without considering the formation position of the other. That is, when forming both the first groove and the second groove in one of the first opposing portion and the second opposing portion, it is necessary to form the first groove and the second groove so as not to cross each other. , Freedom is limited. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in both of the first groove and the second groove, the outline (shape) and the extension length can be set without considering the positional relationship with the other. The degree of freedom can be increased, and the variation variation that can be imparted to the aspect of displacement can be increased accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the gaming machine B11 is characterized in that at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a radius at a starting end or a terminal end larger than a reference value.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the load is reduced at the initial stage of starting the driving by the driving means of the driven member in the stopped state, and the driving is smoothed. You can get started.

  Any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7 includes a shielding member that shields the driven member invisible, and at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a portion of the driven member outside the area of the shielding member. The gaming machine B12 is characterized in that a radius in a corresponding region is made smaller than a reference value during a period from when the entire driven member is exposed outside the region of the shielding member until the driven member starts to be exposed.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the movement of the driven member can be made faster in the range where the shielding member partially shields the driven member. The effect that the member suddenly appears or the effect that the driven member is quickly hidden by the shielding member can be performed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Rotation Operation Unit 600 as an Example>
A holding member, a first rotating body and a second rotating body rotatably disposed on the holding member, and a drive means for applying a rotational driving force to the first rotating body and the second rotating body In the gaming machine, a gaming machine C1 characterized in that the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape and is concentrically fitted to the first rotating body.

  Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that produces an effect by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-30847 (see, for example, paragraph 0162, FIGS. 42 to 46)). According to this gaming machine, a plurality of rotating bodies arranged apart from each other on the left and right are rotated in synchronization in the same direction to give a sense of unity to the effects. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to associate the rotations with each other and cause the player to recognize the rotations, since the plurality of rotation bodies are disposed separately to the left and right. There was a problem that the effect of the production could not be fully exhibited. The gaming machine C1 is made in order to solve the above-described problems, and makes it easy for the player to recognize the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies by associating the rotations of the rotating bodies with each other. It aims at providing the gaming machine which can fully exhibit the effect of.

  That is, according to the gaming machine C1, the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape and is externally fitted concentrically with the first rotating body, so that the first rotating body and the second rotating body are connected to each other. It can be rotated concentrically. Accordingly, the rotation of the first rotator and the rotation of the second rotator can be associated with each other so that the player can easily recognize them, and as a result, the effect of rendering by rotating each of the plurality of rotators can be sufficiently exhibited. Can.

  In the gaming machine C1, a gaming machine C2 characterized in that the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, so that an effect member or the like can be disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect of rotating the first rotating body surrounding the periphery of the effect member and the second rotating body surrounding the periphery of the first rotating body around the effect member. As a result, an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be more effectively performed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body includes a main body portion inserted into the holding member, and one side flange portion projecting outward in a flange shape on one side in the axial direction of the main body portion; A second flange that projects outwardly on the other side in the axial direction opposite to the side flange, and is opposed to the first flange with the holding member interposed therebetween. A game machine C3 externally fitted on the main body of the first rotary body and disposed between the one side flange portion of the first rotary body and the holding member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body is formed on the main body portion to be inserted into the holding member and on one side and the other side in the axial direction of the main body portion A second flange that is externally fitted to the main body of the first rotor, and the one flange and the holding member of the first rotor. And the holding structure of the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the holding member can be simplified.

  That is, according to the above configuration, since the main body portion of the first rotating body is inserted through the holding member, the first rotating body can be rotatably held by the holding member. Further, the other side flange portion of the first rotating body is brought into contact with the holding member, so that the displacement of the first rotating body in one axial direction can be restricted, and the one side flange portion of the first rotating body performs the second rotation. The displacement of the first rotating body in the other axial direction can be regulated by contacting the body and the second rotating body contacting the holding member.

  Furthermore, since the second rotary body is externally fitted to the main body portion of the first rotary body, the second rotary body can be rotatably held by the holding member via the main body portion of the first rotary body. Further, the second rotating body is brought into contact with one side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the other flange portion of the first rotating body is brought into contact with the holding member, whereby one axial direction of the second rotating body is made. The displacement of the second rotary body can be regulated, and the displacement of the second rotary body in the other axial direction can be regulated by the second rotary body being in contact with the holding member.

  The gaming machine C3 includes a first gear and a second gear which are disposed on the holding member and transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, and the first rotation A gaming machine C4 characterized in that gears provided on the body and the second rotating body are engaged with the first gear and the second gear, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the first gear and the second gear disposed on the holding member and transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. The first and second rotating bodies are provided with gears that are meshed with the first gear and the second gear, respectively, on the outer peripheral surface. Thus, the structure for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive means to the first and second rotating bodies can be simplified. In particular, when the main body portion of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape and a production member or the like is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the main body portion, the first gear is provided on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. The structure in which the second gear is meshed with the second gear is effective.

  In the gaming machine C4, the second gear is disposed on one side of the holding member, and the first gear is disposed on the other side of the holding member opposite to the one side. Is engaged with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the other side flange portion of the first rotary body, and the second gear is engaged with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotary body A gaming machine C5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the second gear is arranged on one side of the holding member and the first gear is arranged on the other side of the holding member opposite to the one side. And the second gear is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotary body while the first gear is engaged with the gear provided on the outer peripheral surface of the other side flange portion of the first rotary body. Since the first gear and the second gear are engaged with each other on one side of the holding member, for example, the first gear and the second gear are engaged as compared with the case where the first rotating body and the second rotating body are engaged respectively. The structure for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive means to the first and second rotating bodies via the gear can be simplified.

  Further, the first gear and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body with which the first gear is engaged are arranged with the one side flange portion and main body portion of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. By being arranged on the other side opposite to the one side of the holding member, the player can view the one side of the holding member from the front side with the first gear and the other flange portion of the first rotating body. It can be shielded by the holding member. That is, the structure that shields the first gear and the other flange portion of the first rotating body from being invisible can be simplified using the holding member.

  In either the gaming machine C4 or C5, first transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first gear, and second transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the second gear. And a game machine C6 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4 or C5, the first transmission means and the second transmission means for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive means to the first gear and the second gear are provided. The one rotating body and the second rotating body can be rotated by one driving means. In this case, the rotational driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the first gear by the first transmission means and to the second gear by the second transmission means by different transmission paths. Therefore, for example, by setting the number of gears and the reduction ratio for each transmission path, even if the two rotating bodies are rotated by one driving means, the two rotating bodies (first rotation) The rotation modes of the body and the second rotating body) can be varied. As a result, an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be more effectively performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member includes a cylindrical portion which is formed in a cylindrical shape and protrudes to the one side, and the first holding member is provided on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. A gaming machine C7, wherein the main body portion of the rotating body is rotatably disposed on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member includes a cylindrical portion that is formed in a cylindrical shape and protrudes to one side, and the cylindrical shape of the holding member The main body of the first rotating body is rotatably disposed on the inner circumferential side of the portion, and the second rotating body is rotatably disposed on the outer circumferential side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. It can be externally fitted to the main body portion of the first rotating body via the cylindrical portion. That is, not only the first rotating body but also the second rotating body can be held by the holding member. Thereby, since the arrangement positions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be defined with reference to the holding members, gears engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, The positional relationship between the first gear and the second gear disposed in the holding member can be defined with reference to the holding member. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the meshing of the gear and the first gear and the second gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of each of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. As a result, it is possible to suppress uneven wear of the gears and suppress drive resistance.

  In the gaming machine C7, the first rotating body includes a plurality of protruding portions that protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion, extend in the axial direction of the main body portion, and are scattered at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. A game machine C8 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C7, the main body of the first rotating body is protruded from the outer peripheral surface of the main body and extended in the axial direction of the main body and at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. Since the plurality of projecting portions spaced apart are provided, the contact area between the main body portion of the first rotating body and the cylindrical portion of the holding member is limited to the projecting portion, and the main body portion of the first rotating body is It can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

  In addition, it is preferable that a protrusion part is curved by the circular arc shape from which the shape of the cross section cut | disconnected by the plane orthogonal to the axial direction of a main-body part becomes convex outward. The contact area between the inner surface of the cylindrical portion of the holding member can be suppressed, and the main body portion of the first rotating body can be rotated more smoothly on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. It is.

  In the gaming machine C8, the main body of the first rotary body is formed in a tubular shape, and the first rotary body is protruded from the inner peripheral surface of the main body and extends in the axial direction of the main body. A game machine C9 comprising: a plurality of inner protrusions disposed at positions in phase with the protrusions.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8, the main body of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotating body protrudes from the inner circumferential surface of the main body and the axial direction of the main body And a plurality of inward projections which are disposed in the same phase as the projections (that is, on the back side of the area where the projections are formed). When molding with a resin mold, the shape of the main body of the first rotary body can be made uniform (symmetrical) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side, and the formability can be ensured. .

  In the gaming machine C9, in the first rotating body, the main body portion is divided in the axial direction, the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are fastened to positions corresponding to the protruding portions. A gaming machine C10 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the first rotating body has the main body portion divided in the axial direction, and the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are projecting portions In other words, since the projecting portion also serves as a screw fastening portion for fastening the screw, the strength of the screw fastening portion can be ensured.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10, it is disposed on one side of the holding member, and is formed at a position overlapping with the rotation locus of at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body in front view A gaming machine C11 comprising a light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the gaming machine is disposed at one side of the holding member at a position overlapping the rotation trajectory of at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body in front view Since the light emitting means is provided, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated concentrically, the light emitted by the light emitting means is played on the rotation locus of at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. Can be made visible to That is, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body at a position overlapping the light emission by the light emitting means, and as a result, an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies is more effectively performed. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body includes a first portion in which the light emitting means is formed in a region where a rotation locus overlaps the light emitting means in a front view and the first portion. A game machine C12 characterized in that a second portion in which the light emitting means is formed so as not to be visible is alternately arranged in the circumferential direction.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body allows the light emitting means to be visible in a region where the rotation locus overlaps the light emitting means in front view Since the first portion to be formed and the second portion on which the light emitting means is formed to be invisible are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the first and second rotating bodies are rotated when the first and second rotating bodies are rotated. As the portion and the second portion alternately pass in front of the light emitting means, the player can intermittently visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means. That is, while rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body, it is possible to perform an effect of associating intermittent light emission of the light emitting means with the rotation, and as a result, an effect of rotating a plurality of rotating bodies, respectively. Can be done more effectively.

<Feature D group> 8 hold production (excited time)
An acquisition unit that acquires information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, a storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the determination condition Based on a predetermined trigger, a determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination, a display unit for displaying an identification symbol corresponding to the one piece of information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied, and It is determined to be variable by means of symbol variable means for changing the display mode of the identification symbol, variable determination means for determining the identification symbol which can be varied by the symbol variable means, and the variable determination means Variable notification means for notifying the identification symbol, and the variable determination means is such that the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. In particular, based, the symbol varying means gaming machine is characterized in that what determines different the identification symbols and the normal time as the identification symbols which can be varied by D1.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed along with the game ball winning to the starting opening, and a fluctuation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. And when winning in the starting opening, the game machine which remembers the right of the drawing to a fixed number and reports the number with a design is proposed (for example, JP, 2013-13528, A). However, in this type of pachinko machine, when the lottery content that is stored on hold is determined and notified first, the willingness to win at the starting port will decline thereafter, and the game is stopped and the lottery result is awaited. There was a problem that the game was played and the player was bored. The gaming machine D1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Based on the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the judgment condition, the judgment of acceptance is executed by the judgment means. The identification symbol corresponding to the one information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is established is displayed by the display unit. Based on a predetermined opportunity, the display mode of the identification symbol is varied by the symbol varying means. The identification symbol that can be varied by the symbol variable means is determined by the variable determination means. The identification symbol determined to be variable by the variable determination means is notified by the variable notification means. The variable determination means is different from the normal time as a identification symbol that can be varied by the symbol variable means based on the fact that the number of information stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. The symbol is determined by the variable determining means. Thereby, the player can be urged to play a game so that the information is stored up to a predetermined number or more. Therefore, the player's willingness to play the game can be increased, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be reduced.

  The gaming machine D1 includes an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation determination means that determines that the operation means has been operated. The predetermined operation is triggered by the operation determination means by the operation means. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that it is determined that it has been operated.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the operation determining means determines that the operating means operable by the player has been operated. A predetermined trigger is triggered when it is determined by the operation determining means that the operating means has been operated. This can increase the enjoyment of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the variable determining means variably determines the plurality of identification symbols based on the fact that the number of pieces of information is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. A game machine D3 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, based on the fact that the number of pieces of information is a predetermined number or more, the plurality of identification symbols can be variably set by the variable determining means Since it is determined, there is an effect that it is possible to urge the player to play a game so as to store a predetermined number or more of information.

  In the gaming machine D3, when the variable determining means is determined to be variable with respect to a plurality of the identification symbols, a predetermined order is determined based on determining that the operation is determined by the operation determining means. A game machine D4 characterized in that the identification symbol of 1 is displayed by being changed by the symbol variable means.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, when it is variably determined for the plurality of identification symbols by the variable determination means, it is determined that the operation is determined by the operation determination means. Since one identification symbol is variably displayed by the symbol variable means in a predetermined order based on the above, there is an effect that the notification can be made intelligibly to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the symbol variable means is provided with a priori pass / fail judgment means for executing a judgment on the basis of the information stored in the storage means before the judgment condition is satisfied. The game machine D5 is characterized in that the information corresponding to the identification symbol to be varied is variably displayed in a notification mode based on the result of the success or failure judgment by the prior judgment device.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exerted. That is, on the basis of the information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is established, the on / off determination is performed by the prior yes or no determination unit. The information corresponding to the identification symbol to be varied is displayed by being varied by the symbol varying means in a notification manner based on the result of the validity determination by the prior validity determining means. As a result, the player can be notified of the result of the judgment of the success or failure prior to the notification of the result of the judgment of success. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play a game with an interest in the display mode changed by the symbol variable means.

  In the gaming machine D5, when a plurality of the identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determination means, any one of the information corresponding to the identification symbols which are variably determined. A gaming machine D6 characterized by being displayed by being changed by the symbol changing means in a notification mode based on the determination result determined by the priori success or failure determination means.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D5, when the plurality of identification symbols are variably decided by the variable deciding means, the information corresponding to the identification symbols variably decided Among them, since any information is variably displayed by the symbol variable means in the notification mode based on the determination result determined by the prior determination unit, it is known before the determination result is displayed as the identification symbol. It has the effect of being able to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine D6, when a plurality of the identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determining means, a plurality of the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner to display one notification mode. A gaming machine D7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, when the plurality of identification symbols are variably decided by the variable deciding means, the plurality of identification symbols are variably displayed. Since the notification mode of is displayed, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by variously changing the notification mode.

<Characteristic D 'group> 8 hold effects 2 (exciting time)
Based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the acquisition means capable of acquiring information, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and if the determination condition is satisfied, the information stored in the storage means A determination unit that performs determination based on the information; a display unit that displays at least an identification symbol corresponding to the information before the determination is performed by the determination unit out of the information stored in the storage unit; The display means when the number of the information before the determination by the determination means among the information stored in the storage means is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the trigger of A game machine D'1 comprising: symbol variable means for changing a display mode of at least the predetermined number of the identification symbols displayed on the display mode to a predetermined display mode.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start opening, and a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. And when winning in the starting opening, the game machine which remembers the right of the drawing to a fixed number and reports the number with a design is proposed (for example, JP, 2013-13528, A). However, in this type of pachinko machine, when the lottery content that is stored on hold is determined and notified first, the willingness to win at the starting port will decline thereafter, and the game is stopped and the lottery result is awaited. There was a problem that the game was played and the player was bored. The gaming machine D′ 1 is made in order to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage. .

  According to the gaming machine D′ 1, information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit. When the determination condition is satisfied, the determination unit performs the determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit. The display means at least displays the identification symbol corresponding to the information before the execution of the determination by the determination means among the information stored in the storage means. Based on a predetermined trigger, when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage unit before execution of the determination by the determination unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the design variable unit displays the information on the display unit. The display mode of at least a predetermined number of identification symbols displayed is changed to a predetermined display mode.

  Thereby, the player can be urged to play a game so that the information is stored up to a predetermined number or more. Therefore, the player's willingness to play the game can be increased, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be reduced.

  The gaming machine D′ 1 includes an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and an operation determination unit that determines that the operation unit has been operated. The predetermined trigger is controlled by the operation determination unit. A game machine D'2 characterized in that it is determined that the means has been operated.

  According to the gaming machine D'2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D'1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the operation determining means determines that the operating means operable by the player has been operated. Then, the case where it is determined by the operation determination means that the operation means has been operated is taken as a predetermined trigger. This can increase the enjoyment of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine D ′ 2, a variable in which an identification symbol whose display mode changes when the operation determination means determines that the operation means is operated is notified in an identifiable manner before the operation means is operated. A game machine D'3 characterized in that it comprises notification means.

  According to the gaming machine D′ 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D′ 2, the identification symbol that changes the display mode when it is determined that the operation means is operated by the variable notification means is displayed by the variable notification means. Since the notification is made to be identifiable before the operation means is operated, the player can operate the operation means while grasping which display pattern of the identification symbol is variable, and the operator can enjoy the operation of the operation means Can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine D′ 3, the variable notification unit displays a display mode when the operation determination unit determines that the operation unit is operated by changing the display mode of the identification symbol to a variable notification mode. A gaming machine D ′ 4 characterized by informing that the identification symbol that is variable is identifiable before the operation means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine D'4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D'3, the variable notification means performs notification by changing the identification symbol itself to the variable notification mode, so the player can display which identification symbol Has the effect of being able to easily grasp whether it is variable.

  In the gaming machine D′ 4, when the plurality of identification symbols are changed to the variable notification mode by the variable notification unit, the predetermined number is determined based on the determination that the operation determination unit has operated. A game machine D'5 characterized in that the identification symbol of 1 is displayed by being changed by the symbol variable means in the order listed.

  According to the gaming machine D'5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D'4, it is determined that the operation determining means has been operated by the variable notifying means when the plurality of identification symbols are changed to the variable notification mode. Based on this, since one identification symbol is changed and displayed in a predetermined order, there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In any one of the gaming machines D'1 to D'5, it has a prior determination means for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means is performed. The symbol changing means changes a display mode of the identification symbol to a predetermined display mode in a notification mode based on the determination result determined by the prior determination unit. 6

  According to the gaming machine D′ 6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D′ 1 to D′ 5, the following effects are produced. That is, before the determination based on the determination condition is performed, the determination is performed by the prior determination unit based on the information stored in the storage unit. Then, the display mode of the identification symbol is changed to a predetermined display mode in the notification mode based on the determination result by the prior determination means. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the determination result of the prior determination means before the determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play a game with an interest in the display mode changed by the symbol variable means.

  In the gaming machine D′ 6, the predetermined order is an order in which the information corresponding to the identification symbol is stored in the storage unit, and the symbol variable unit is configured to display the display symbol of the identification symbol. A game machine D'7 characterized in that a display mode of an identification symbol corresponding to the second half of the order is changed to the notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine D'7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D'6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the order in which the display mode of the identification symbols is changed by the symbol changing means is the order stored in the storage means, and the display mode of the identification symbols corresponding to the latter half of the order is changed to the notification mode. This can increase the enjoyment of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In any one of the gaming machines D′ 1 to D′ 7, while the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol changing unit is displayed on the display unit, the storage unit newly stores the identification symbol. A game machine D'8 comprising additional symbol variable means for changing the display mode of the identification symbol corresponding to the information to the predetermined display mode based on the predetermined trigger.

  According to the gaming machine D'8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D'1 to D'7, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display mode of the identification symbol corresponding to the information newly stored by the storage unit while the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol variable unit is displayed on the display unit based on the predetermined trigger. , By the additional symbol variable means to change to a predetermined display mode. Thereby, it is possible to urge the player to play the game continuously even after the information is stored up to the predetermined number or more. Therefore, the player's willingness to play the game can be increased, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines D′ 1 to D′ 8, when all the information corresponding to the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol changing unit is determined by the determining unit, Of the information stored in the storage means, when the number of the information before execution of the determination by the determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined second predetermined number, based on a predetermined trigger, A game machine D'9 comprising: second symbol variable means for changing a display mode of at least the second predetermined number of the identification symbols displayed on the display means to a predetermined second mode.

  According to the gaming machine D'9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D'1 to D'8, the following effects are exerted. That is, when all the information corresponding to the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol changing unit is determined by the determining unit, the determination unit executes the determination of the information stored in the storage unit. When the number of pieces of information before being performed is equal to or more than a predetermined second predetermined number, at least a second predetermined number of identification symbols displayed on the display means by the second symbol variable means based on a predetermined trigger Is changed to a predetermined second mode. Thus, after the player has played the game so that the information is stored up to a predetermined number or more, the player can be prompted to play the game again so that the information is stored up to the second predetermined number or more. Therefore, the player's willingness to play the game can be increased, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D'1 to D'9, the predetermined display mode is a combination of the display modes of a plurality of the identification symbols into one display mode. 10

  According to the gaming machine D′ 10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D′ 1 to D′ 9, the display mode of a plurality of identification symbols is combined into one display mode. There is an effect that it is possible to give the display aspect of the present invention a surprise and to increase the player's willingness to play the game.

<Characteristics E group> Blank symbols are changed to push button notices and displayed On the basis of the establishment of the lottery conditions, lottery means for executing a lottery, and the lottery result by the lottery means among a plurality of different main symbols and the main symbols By displaying a plurality of symbol rows composed of sub-patterns different from the symbols side by side, the display means that can be displayed by the stopped and displayed combination of the main symbols of each pattern row and the lottery result specific to the display means In the gaming machine having a privilege giving means for giving the player an advantageous privilege on the basis of the combination of the main symbols indicating the symbol being displayed, the stoppage is made based on that a predetermined condition is established. The sub-design variable means for changing the display mode of the sub-symbol of the displayed symbol sequence and the composite display mode obtained by combining the sub-designs variably displayed by the sub-design variable means are displayed. A combination determining means for determining whether or not to display based on a lottery result by the lottery means, and displaying the combination display mode on the display means based on the determination by the combination determining means to display in the combined display mode. A gaming machine E1 characterized by having a combined display mode display means.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a pachinko machine that draws a lottery in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start opening and displays a variation effect and a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on the liquid crystal screen. Are known. In such production, various patterns of production such as production for giving the player a sense of expectation and production for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, a game machine is proposed in which operation means (switches, etc.) that can be operated by the player are provided in the game machine, and the player can change the performance of the game by operating the operation means. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-075741). In such a pachinko machine, for example, there is one that executes a lottery to change the game effect when the operation means is operated, in order to execute various effects when the player operates the operation means. . However, in this type of pachinko machine, the player's operation changes the game effect at a certain timing and the player has a monotonous impression of the game, and the player gets bored with the game early. There was a problem. The gaming machine E1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by stopping the main symbol between each symbol sequence by displaying a plurality of symbol sequences composed of a plurality of different main symbols and sub-designs different from the main symbol between the symbols. The combination is displayed by the display means. Based on the display of the main symbol combination indicating the specific lottery result on the display means, a privilege advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display mode of the sub symbol of the symbol row stopped and displayed is changed by the sub symbol variable means. Whether or not to display the sub symbol variably displayed by the sub symbol variable means in the combined display mode synthesized is determined by the combination determination means based on the lottery result by the lottery means. The composite display mode is displayed on the display means by the composite display mode display means based on the fact that the composite determination means determines to display the composite display mode. Thus, by displaying the composite display mode, it is possible to provide the player with an effect having a fresh taste. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine E1, when it is determined that the operation means operable by the player, the operation determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated, and the operation determination means, the sub-design variable means The game machine E2, further comprising: an operation variable display means for changing the display mode of the sub-design to a specific display mode when the display mode of the sub-symbol is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the operation determining means determines that the operating means operable by the player has been operated. If it is determined that the operation is determined by the operation determining means, and if the sub-symbol display mode is changed and displayed by the sub-symbol variable means, the display mode is changed to a specific display mode by the operation variable display means. Is displayed. This can increase the pleasure of the player operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine E2, the operation variable display means changes the display mode of the sub symbol to one of the specific display modes out of the plurality of specific display modes based on the lottery result by the lottery means. A game machine E3 characterized by being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E2, the display pattern of the sub-design is changed to one specific display mode among a plurality of specific display modes based on the lottery result by the lottery means. Since it is displayed by the operation variable display means, it is possible to diversify the display mode of the sub-symbols and to provide a player with a fresh effect.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, after the symbol string is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period, the symbol string stopping means for stopping and displaying the symbol string in a predetermined order, and two or more symbols by the symbol string stopping means Dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the symbol sequence when the sequence is stopped and one or more symbol sequences are dynamically displayed, and the predetermined condition is satisfied In such a case, the dynamic display period determining means determines a specific dynamic display period different from the normal time.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exerted. That is, after the symbol row is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period, it is stopped and displayed by the symbol row stopping means in a predetermined order. When two or more symbol sequences are stopped and displayed by the symbol sequence stopping unit and one or more symbol sequences are dynamically displayed, the dynamic display period of the symbol sequence is determined by the dynamic display period determining unit. Ru. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the dynamic display period determining unit determines a specific dynamic display period different from the normal time by the dynamic display period determining unit.

  As a result, it can be determined that the sub-symbol is variably displayed depending on the specific dynamic display period. Therefore, the player can play a game with interest in the dynamic display period. Therefore, there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored with the game can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the combination determination means is configured to easily determine the combination display mode when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. Characteristic gaming machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the composition display mode is easily determined by the composition determining means. It is possible to play the game in expectation of displaying the composite display mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, when the composite display mode is displayed, based on the fact that the operation determining means has been operated by the operation determining means, based on the lottery result by the lottery means A game machine E6 characterized by comprising synthetic variable means for displaying the synthetic display mode variably displayed in a specific display mode.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, when the composite display mode is displayed, based on the fact that the operating means has been operated by the operation determining means, Since the combined display mode is variably displayed by the combined variable means in the specific display mode based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the player can intervene in the game, and the problem of getting bored early in the game is reduced It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine E6, when it is determined by the combination determination means that the display is performed in the combination display mode, the operation means operates the display mode that is variably displayed by the sub-symbol variable means. A game machine E7 characterized by having prohibiting means for prohibiting variable display even if it is judged that it has been done.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, when it is determined to display in the composite display mode by the composition determining means, the display mode variably displayed by the sub symbol variable means Even if it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the means, variable display is prohibited by the prohibition means, so the composite display mode is displayed by operating the operation means before the composite display mode is displayed. There is an effect that it can be determined whether or not.

<Characteristic E 'group> A blank design is displayed as a push button notice 2
A determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a symbol string provided with a plurality of different main symbols and sub-patterns different from the main symbol are displayed as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means. Display means for dynamically displaying the symbol row on the display means; dynamic display period determination means for determining a period in which the symbol row is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; In a gaming machine having a first privilege granting unit that grants a first privilege that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display unit, a predetermined condition is established. The sub-symbol variable means for changing the display mode of the sub-symbol during the dynamic display period, and when the sub-symbol is changed and displayed in a specific display mode by the sub-symbol variable means. Of the dynamic display period Gaming machine E'1, characterized in that the Ri period is one having a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a pachinko machine that draws a lottery in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start opening and displays a variation effect and a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on the liquid crystal screen. Are known. In such production, various patterns of production such as production for giving the player a sense of expectation and production for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, a game machine is proposed in which operation means (switches, etc.) that can be operated by the player are provided in the game machine, and the player can change the performance of the game by operating the operation means. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-075741). In such a pachinko machine, for example, a player who performs a lottery to change a game effect when the operation means is operated to perform various effects when the player operates the operation means. is there. However, in this type of pachinko machine, the player's operation changes the game effect at a certain timing and the player has a monotonous impression of the game, and the player gets bored with the game early. There was a problem. The gaming machine E′1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine E′1, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. As identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, a symbol row in which a plurality of different main symbols and a sub-pattern different from the main symbol are provided is displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means dynamically displays the symbol row on the display means. The dynamic display period determination means determines the period during which the symbol string is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. When identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display unit, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is provided by the first privilege providing unit. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sub-symbol changing means changes the display mode of the sub-symbol during the dynamic display period. When the sub symbol is displayed in the specific display mode, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect by the remaining period of the dynamic display period. Thus, it is possible to provide a fresh-tasting effect using a sub-pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine E′1, the specific effect is a combined display mode in which a plurality of sub-designs having the specific display mode are synthesized after being changed to the specific display mode by the sub-pattern changing unit. A gaming machine E′2, which is an effect to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E'2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E'1, in order to display a composite display mode in which a plurality of sub-patterns that have become a specific display mode as a specific effect are displayed, the player tastes fresh. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a certain effect and to reduce the trouble that the player gets bored with the game early.

  The gaming machine E′1 or E′2 has operation means that can be operated by the player and predetermined condition determination means for determining whether the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the operation of the operation means. A game machine E'3 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine E′3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E′1 or E′2, the predetermined condition determining means determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the operation of the operating means operable by the player. Therefore, the pleasure that the player operates the operating means can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine E'3, when the sub symbol is displayed in the specific display mode, the sub symbol variable means displays the specific display mode based on the operation of the operation means. A game machine E'4 characterized by displaying the sub symbol variably in the composite display mode.

  According to the gaming machine E′4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E′3, based on the operation of the operating means, the sub-design is changed from the specific display mode to the composite display mode and displayed. In order to execute a specific performance, the player must actively operate the operation means, and the player can be prompted to operate the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E′1 to E′4, the display means displays a plurality of the symbol strings as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the plurality of symbol strings are displayed for a predetermined period. And a symbol sequence stop means for stopping and displaying in a predetermined order based on a determination result by the determination means after the dynamic display, and the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. In the case of the game machine E'5, the number of sub symbols stopped and displayed is made different based on the judgment result by the judgment means.

  According to the gaming machine E′5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E′1 to E′4, the following effects are produced. That is, the display means displays a plurality of symbol strings as identification information indicating the determination result by the determining means. After dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol rows for a predetermined period, the symbol row stopping means causes stop display in a predetermined order based on the determination result by the determining means. When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, the number of sub-symbols to be stopped and displayed is made different based on the determination result by the determining means. Thereby, the specific effect using the sub-pattern can be made an effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and a fresh-tasting effect using the sub-pattern can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  When the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, or when the determination result of the determination means is highly likely to be a specific determination result, the number of sub-symbols stopped and displayed by the symbol row stop means is increased. It is good to do. By doing this, when the number of sub-patterns is large, the jackpot expectation level is high, and the player can be interested in a specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In any one of the gaming machines E′1 to E′5, the sub-design variable unit varies the sub-design to the specific display mode when the determination result by the determination unit is the specific determination result. The game machine E′6 is configured to be easily displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E′6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E′1 to E′5, the sub-design variable means displays the sub-design when the judgment result by the judgment means is a specific judgment result. Since it is configured to be variably displayed in a specific display mode, it is possible to play a game expecting the specific display mode to be displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E′2 to E′6, the specific display mode is a display in which the display mode of the sub-design is variably displayed, and the combined effect mode is the specific display mode. It is a character string obtained by combining a plurality of sub-designs that have become display modes, and the specific effect is a combination of at least a part of characters displayed as the specific display mode and displaying the composite effect mode. A game machine E'7 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine E′7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E′2 to E′6, the following effects are produced. That is, the character string as a synthetic rendition mode is displayed by combining a plurality of displayed sub-symbols changed into characters as a specific display mode. A combined effect mode in which at least a part of the characters displayed as the specific display mode is combined is displayed as the specific effect. Thereby, the player can expect the character string displayed as a synthetic | combination display mode by seeing the several character displayed as a specific display mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect having a fresh taste, and to suppress an inconvenience that the player is bored with the game early.

  In addition, among the characters displayed as the specific display mode, it may be possible to partially notify that the character string displayed as the combined display mode is used before the combined display mode is displayed. By doing this, it is possible to provide a hint that predicts a character string to be displayed as a composite display mode, and it is possible to entertain the player.

  The effect storage means for storing a plurality of effects to be executed when the dynamic display is performed in any one of the game machines E'3 to E'7 and the effects stored in the effect storage means When the predetermined condition establishment determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first effect including the specific effect is selected, and the predetermined condition establishment determining means is satisfied. A game machine E'8 comprising: an effect selection unit that selects a second effect that does not include the specific effect when it is not determined.

  According to the gaming machine E′8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E′3 to E′7, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of effects to be executed when dynamic display is performed by the effect storage means. Based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determining means, the first effect or the second effect is selected by the effect selecting means. Thereby, a different effect is selected based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determining means during the dynamic display. Therefore, since only the effect during the dynamic display can be changed based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determination means, there is an effect that the data amount related to the dynamic display can be reduced.

<Feature F group> An extension effect is executed at the end of SPGT A display means capable of displaying an effect mode, and a clock means capable of counting even in a power-off state where the power supplied to the gaming machine is lower than a predetermined voltage value. And an acquisition means for acquiring time information from the time measurement means, an elapsed time determination means for determining the elapsed time based on the time information acquired from the acquisition means, and a predetermined elapsed time by the elapsed time determination means If it is determined that the display mode is switched to the specific display mode and the display mode is displayed until the predetermined period elapses, the switch display unit displays the predetermined mode when the predetermined period elapses. And an extension period setting means for setting an extension period for displaying the specific effect mode in an extended manner when it is determined that it is established. A gaming machine F1.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an RTC (real time clock) is provided in the gaming machine, and based on time data clocked by the RTC, the same effect is executed at the same timing among a plurality of gaming machines. There is known a gaming machine configured to change the display mode or the display mode (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31695). In such a pachinko machine, the display mode is changed when the RTC reaches a preset time. However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that when the period in which the display mode is changed is over, the player's willingness to play decreases and the player gets bored with the game. The gaming machine F1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets bored with a game early.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the effect mode is displayed by the display means. Even when the electric power supplied to the gaming machine is in a power interruption state where the electric power is less than or equal to a predetermined voltage value, the time is measured. Time information is acquired by the acquisition unit from the clock unit. Based on the time information acquired from the acquisition means, the elapsed time is determined by the elapsed time determination means. When it is determined by the elapsed time determining means that the predetermined elapsed time has elapsed, the effect mode displayed on the display means is switched to the specific effect mode and displayed by the switching display means until the predetermined period elapses. When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined period has elapsed, the extension period setting unit sets an extension period in which the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed is extended and displayed. Thereby, since the case where the period when a specific production | presentation aspect is displayed is extended and the case where it is not extended changes with whether predetermined conditions are satisfied, an unexpected production | presentation can be provided to a player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine F1, an acquisition unit that acquires information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, a storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the information based on the establishment of the lottery condition A lottery is executed based on the information acquired by the acquiring unit before the lottery condition is established, and the lottery unit for executing the lottery, the display unit on which identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery unit is displayed And the predetermined condition is configured to be easily established when the information determined as a specific lottery result is stored by the preliminary lottery means. Feature game machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, lottery is performed on the information by the lottery means. Identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. Based on the information acquired by the acquisition means before the lottery conditions are satisfied, the lottery is executed by the preliminary lottery means. The predetermined condition is easily established when information determined as a specific lottery result by the preliminary lottery means is stored. Thereby, it can be anticipated that it is a specific lottery result by extending the period in which a specific production mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be performed in the hope that the period during which a specific effect mode is displayed is extended.

  The gaming machine F2 has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and the elapsed time is determined before the period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed. When the game has elapsed, the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exerted. That is, a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. If the elapsed time has elapsed before the period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed, the identification information is displayed as a temporary stop. Thereby, the dynamic display can be temporarily stopped in accordance with the end timing of the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can determine the end timing in an easily understandable manner.

  In the gaming machine F3, the identification information is displayed in a specific dynamic display mode for a predetermined period until the elapsed time elapses.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the identification information is displayed in a specific dynamic display mode in a predetermined period until the elapsed time elapses, and therefore, it is specified that the elapsed time passes There is an effect that it can be determined in the dynamic display mode of

<Characteristic F 'group> 2 to execute an extension effect at the end of SPGT
Display means capable of displaying an effect mode, predetermined period setting means capable of setting a predetermined period, predetermined period determining means for determining whether the predetermined period is set by the predetermined period setting means, and the predetermined period determining means When the predetermined period is determined, the switching display means for switching the effect mode displayed on the display means to a specific effect mode, and the predetermined period has passed and the predetermined condition is satisfied. And an extension period setting means for setting an extension period in which the period for displaying the specific effect mode is extended and displayed.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine configured to execute the same effect or change the display mode at the same timing among a plurality of gaming machines has been known ( For example, JP-A-2013-31695). In such a pachinko machine, for example, an RTC (Real Time Clock) is mounted, and the display mode is changed when the time information acquired from the RTC reaches a preset time. However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that when the period in which the display mode is changed is over, the player's willingness to play decreases and the player gets bored with the game. The gaming machine F′1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets bored early in a game.

  According to the gaming machine F'1, the effect mode is displayed on the display means. Whether the predetermined period is set by the predetermined period setting means is determined by the predetermined period determination means. When it is determined that it is the predetermined period, the effect mode displayed on the display means by the switching display means is switched to a specific effect mode and displayed. When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined period elapses, the extended period setting unit extends the period for displaying the specific effect mode. Thereby, since the period when a specific production | presentation aspect is displayed changes with establishment of predetermined conditions, the production | presentation which is unexpected can be provided to a player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine F'1, an elapsed time determination to determine an elapsed time based on time counting means capable of counting time, an acquisition means for acquiring time information from the time measurement means, and time information acquired from the acquisition means And the predetermined period setting means sets the predetermined period based on the time information acquired from the time measuring means, and the predetermined period determining means is the time information acquired from the time measuring means. The gaming machine F′2 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the predetermined period is reached.

  According to the gaming machine F′2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F′1, the following effects are produced. That is, the acquisition unit acquires time information from the time measurement unit, and the elapsed time determination unit determines the elapsed time based on the time information. The predetermined period is set by the predetermined period setting unit based on the time information acquired from the clocking unit, and the predetermined period is discriminated by the predetermined period judging unit based on the time information acquired from the clocking unit. As a result, a specific effect mode is displayed based on time information, so that it is possible to display an effect mode having a sense of unity with a plurality of pachinko machines. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine F′2, information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and Determination means for executing determination on information, and pre-determination means for executing determination based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means before the determination condition is satisfied, wherein the predetermined condition is The gaming machine F′3 is configured to be easily established when the information determined as a specific determination result by the prior determination unit is stored.

  According to the gaming machine F′3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F′2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition is stored in the storage means, and the determination on the information is executed by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The determination is executed based on the information acquired by the information acquisition unit before the determination condition is satisfied by the prior determination unit. The predetermined condition is easily established when the information determined as the specific determination result by the prior determination unit is stored. Thereby, it can be anticipated that it is a specific determination result by extending the period in which a specific production mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be performed in the hope that the period during which a specific effect mode is displayed is extended.

  The gaming machine F′2 or F′3 has information input means capable of inputting specific information, and the predetermined period setting means includes the specific information input by the information input means and the time measuring means. Based on the acquired time information, the period for performing the specific effect mode is set to at least a first predetermined period that is the predetermined period and a second predetermined period that is different from the predetermined period. The gaming machine F'4 to be.

  According to the gaming machine F′4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F′2 or F′3, the following effects are produced. That is, specific information is input by the information input means. The predetermined period setting unit sets a period during which a specific effect mode is performed based on the specific information input by the information input unit and the time information acquired from the time measuring unit. Accordingly, it is possible to set a period during which a specific effect mode is performed based on the two pieces of information that can be input and the time information. Therefore, by combining two pieces of information, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns for a period during which a specific effect mode is performed, so that it is possible to provide an unexpected effect. Moreover, even if it does not change the information which can be input, it is effective in the ability to change the period which performs a specific presentation aspect by changing time information.

  In the gaming machine F'4, the predetermined period setting means sets a period longer than the first predetermined period as the second predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine F′5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F′4, the second predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means is set as a period longer than the first predetermined period, so that a specific When the effect mode continues for longer than the first predetermined period, the player can be made to imagine whether the extended period based on the establishment of the predetermined condition or the period set as the second predetermined period. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that the player gets bored with the game early.

  Any one of the gaming machines F′3 to F′5 has a dynamic display period determining means for determining a period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and the period determined by the dynamic display period determining means has elapsed. A gaming machine F'6 having a temporary stop display means for displaying the identification information temporarily and displaying the identification information when the elapsed time has elapsed before performing the game.

  According to the gaming machine F'6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F'3 to F'5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the period for dynamically displaying the identification information is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. If the elapsed time has elapsed before the period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed, the identification information is displayed as a temporary stop. Thereby, the dynamic display can be temporarily stopped in accordance with the end timing of the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can determine the end timing in an easily understandable manner.

  In the gaming machine F'6, when the temporary stop display means displays the temporary stop and the extended period is set by the extended period setting means, a specific effect is produced after the predetermined period has elapsed. A gaming machine F′7 having a specific effect display means for displaying a display mode on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine F′7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F′6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the temporary stop display means is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the extension period is set by the extension period setting means, the specific effect display mode is displayed by the specific effect display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. Display on. As a result, the player for which the extension period has been set is displayed with the specific effect display mode from the state in which the temporary stop display is displayed, so that the player who has been temporarily stopped with the surrounding player is displayed with the surrounding player. Since different specific effect display modes are displayed, a sense of superiority can be felt. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine F'7 is characterized by including indication effect display means for causing the display means to display indication effect suggesting that the extension period is set during the predetermined period. F'8.

  According to the gaming machine F'8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F'7, the suggestion effect indicating that the extension period is set by the suggestion effect display means is displayed on the display means during the predetermined period Therefore, the player's willingness to play a game can be increased, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets bored of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines F'2 to F'8, the clocking means is configured to be capable of clocking even in a state where power is not supplied to the gaming machine. Machine F'9.

  According to the gaming machine F'9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F'2 to F'8, it is possible for the clocking means to clock even in the state where power is not supplied to the gaming machine. The time can always be measured regardless of the power-on state of the gaming machine, and there is an effect that a specific effect mode can be accurately executed based on the time information.

  In any one of the gaming machines F′2 to F′9, the timing unit includes a correcting unit capable of correcting the current time.

  According to the gaming machine F'10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F'2 to F'9, the clocking means can correct the current time by the correcting means, so based on the time information Thus, there is an effect that a specific production mode can be accurately executed.

  In any of the gaming machines F′4 to F′10, the information input means is set with a period in which information can be input, and the gaming machine F′11.

  According to the gaming machine F'11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F'4 to F'10, a period in which information can be input is set by the information input means. By setting it outside the possible period, the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed is not changed during sales, and there is an effect that the specific effect mode can be executed at a desired timing.

  In the gaming machine F'11, the acquisition means acquires the day of the week information as the time information, and the predetermined period setting means changes the time of day when the specific effect mode is displayed because the day of the week information is different. A gaming machine F′12 that is set as described above.

  According to the gaming machine F'12, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F'11, the day information is acquired by the acquiring means, and a specific effect mode is displayed by the setting means for a predetermined period by the acquired day information being different. Since the period to perform is set to be different, there is an effect that it is possible to change the period for performing the specific effect mode by changing the day information without changing the inputable information.

  In any one of the gaming machines F'4 to F'12, the predetermined period setting means is capable of setting a plurality of periods for displaying the specific effect mode in time series. Machine F'13.

  According to the gaming machine F'13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F'4 to F'12, the predetermined period setting means sets a plurality of time periods in which specific presentation modes are displayed in time series. Therefore, there is an effect that the work of setting the period in which the specific effect mode is performed can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine F′13, the acquisition unit acquires time information as the time information, and the predetermined period setting unit can set a period for displaying the specific effect mode from a plurality of different periods. Even if the period for displaying the specific effect mode is made different by the predetermined period setting means, the timing for executing the display of the specific effect mode is unified based on the time information. A game machine F'14 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F′14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F′13, the following effects are produced. That is, the acquisition means acquires time information. The predetermined period setting means enables setting the period for displaying the specific effect mode from a plurality of different periods, and unifies the timing for executing the display of the specific effect mode based on the time information even if different periods are set. Do. Thereby, even if the period for displaying the specific effect mode is different, the timing at which the display of the specific effect mode is performed can be unified, so that the player can execute the display of the specific effect mode The length of the period during which a specific performance mode is displayed cannot be determined depending on the timing. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to play the game while being interested in whether or not the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed is over the predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early effective.

  In the gaming machines F′1 to F′14, a display timing for setting a timing for executing the display of the effect mode displayed on the display unit within a predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting unit. Waiting until the timing set by the display timing setting means, the setting means, the effect mode executing means for executing the effect mode based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the execution of the effect mode by the effect mode executing means A gaming machine F′15, characterized in that the game machine F′15 includes a production mode standby means.

  According to the gaming machine F′15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F′1 to F′14, the following effects are produced. That is, the display timing setting unit sets the display timing of the effect mode displayed on the display unit at a predetermined interval within the predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting unit. The execution of the selection mode performed by the effect mode execution means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is made to stand by until the timing set by the effect mode standby means. Thereby, the effect mode executed within the predetermined period is also executed at a predetermined timing. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect having a sense of unity among a plurality of gaming machines, and it is possible to suppress a defect that a player gets bored with a game early.

  In the gaming machines F′2 to F′14, a display execution time for setting a time for displaying the effect mode displayed on the display unit at a predetermined time interval based on the time information acquired by the acquisition unit. A production mode in which execution of the production mode by the production mode execution means and the production mode execution means for executing the production mode based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the production mode is kept waiting until the time set by the display execution time setting means A gaming machine F'16 comprising a waiting means.

  According to the gaming machine F′16, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F′2 to F′14, the following effects are produced. That is, the display execution time setting means sets the display execution time displayed on the display means at predetermined time intervals based on the time information acquired by the acquisition means. The execution of the selection mode performed by the effect mode execution means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is made to stand by until it is set by the effect mode standby means. Thereby, the effect mode executed within the predetermined period is also executed in a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect having a sense of unity among a plurality of gaming machines, and it is possible to suppress a defect that a player gets bored with a game early.

  Any one of the gaming machines F′1 to F′16 has an operation unit capable of performing a predetermined input operation, and the predetermined period setting unit sets the predetermined period based on the predetermined input operation by the operation unit. A gaming machine F'17 that is to be set.

  According to the gaming machine F′17, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F′1 to F′16, the predetermined period by the predetermined period setting unit is set based on the predetermined operation by the operation unit. There is an effect that the predetermined period can be easily set to the desired period.

  In any one of the gaming machines F'1 to F'17, effect information output means for outputting effect information including at least specific effect mode information based on the specific effect mode displayed on the display means, and output of the effect information Effect information input means capable of inputting information corresponding to the effect information output by means; and specific effect mode setting means for setting the specific effect mode based on the information inputted by the effect information input means; A game machine F ′ 18 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine F′18, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F′1 to F′18, the following effects are produced. That is, the production information output unit outputs production information including at least specific production mode information based on the specific production mode displayed on the display unit. Information corresponding to the effect information is input by the effect information input means. The specific effect mode setting means sets a specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means. As a result, since it is possible to set a specific effect mode to be displayed on another pachinko machine, it is possible to freely synchronize the effect mode. Therefore, the player's willingness to play a game can be increased, and there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored with the gaming machine at an early stage can be reduced.

  In addition, it is good to include the information of the time when a specific effect is displayed on the effect information which this game machine F'18 outputs. By doing in this way, there exists an effect that the time when a specific production | presentation aspect is displayed can be synchronized no matter what timing the specific production | presentation aspect setting means performs.

  In the game machine F'18, the effect information output means is configured to display the effect information on the display means in a mode that can be acquired by an external device.

  According to the gaming machine F′19, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F′18, the presentation information is output in a mode (for example, a two-dimensional information code) that the presentation information output means can acquire by an external device (for example, a portable terminal). Since it displays, there exists an effect that the setting operation | work of the specific effect aspect by a specific effect aspect setting means can be made easy.

<Characteristic G group> Symbol size displayed with fish-eye liquid crystal First display means having a display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in a first display size, and the first display means A second display means having a display area arranged in the vicinity of the display area and configured by arranging a plurality of second pixels each having a second display size smaller than the first display size; Display control means capable of moving and displaying the same symbol data from the display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. Machine G1.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed which provides a novel rendering mode by arranging a plurality of display devices and providing different display modes to the player (for example, JP 2005-270417 A)). However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem in that the control burden that increases the load for display control increases. The gaming machine G1 has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the control load.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the first display means is configured by a display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in the first display size. The second display means is constituted by a display area which is disposed in the vicinity of the display area of the first display means and arranged by arranging a plurality of second pixels of a second display size smaller than the first display size. ing. The same symbol data is moved and displayed by the display control means from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. Thereby, by displaying the same display data on different display means, it is possible to display symbols with different display sizes. Therefore, even when the display size of the symbol is changed and displayed, the load of the control process for changing the display data enlargement rate or the like can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G1, a gaming machine G2 characterized in that the first display size and the second display size are each configured at a predetermined enlargement factor.

  According to the gaming machine G2, since the first display size and the second display size are each configured at a predetermined enlargement factor in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the size of the displayed symbol is a predetermined enlargement. There is an effect that it can be displayed differently by the rate.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, symbol data displayed in common to the first display means and the second display means is image information to be scrolled and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the symbol data displayed in common to the first display means and the second display means is image information to be scrolled and displayed. There is an effect that the symbols can be scroll-displayed across the first display means and the second display means, and a fresh effect can be provided to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a storage unit storing the symbol data to be displayed by the display control unit, and the symbol data acquired from the storage unit, the acquired symbol data is displayed as the display control unit Display data setting means for setting an enlargement ratio to be displayed on the display, wherein the display control means is moved from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. In the game machine G4, the symbol data set with the display data setting means is moved and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are produced. That is, the symbol data displayed by the display control means is stored by the storage means. The display data setting unit sets an enlargement ratio for acquiring the symbol data from the storage unit and displaying the acquired symbol data on the display control unit. When the display control means moves the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means for display, the symbol data of the same magnification set by the display data setting means is displayed. It is moved and displayed by the control means. As a result, the display size of the symbols can be displayed differently between the first display means and the second display means without changing the enlargement ratio. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the load caused by the process of changing the display size of the symbols for display.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first display means has a display area larger than that of the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first display means has a display area larger than the second display means, so that different impressions are displayed to the player There is an effect that can be performed.

  One of the gaming machines G1 to G5 has lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of the lottery conditions, and the display control means dynamically uses the symbol to indicate identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means. A game machine G6 characterized by being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the lottery is executed by the lottery means. In the display control means, identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means is dynamically displayed by the display control means with a symbol. As a result, the lottery result can be discriminated by the design, and the player can be interested in the dynamic display of the design.

  In the gaming machine G6, the symbol indicating the identification information is set by scrolling the data set at a predetermined magnification on the second display means and enlarging the data, and then the symbol is set on the first display means at the magnification. The gaming machine G7 is characterized in that after being moved and displayed with the information, the first display means is scroll-displayed with data set at a predetermined enlargement ratio.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G6, the symbol indicating the identification information is the first display after the data set at the predetermined magnification is scrolled and enlarged by the second display means. Since the display control means scrolls the symbol indicating the identification information with the data set at the predetermined enlargement ratio on the first display means after the information is moved and displayed on the means with the information set at the enlargement ratio, the second display means When the display unit is moved from the display unit to the first display unit for display, when the display is changed with the enlargement factor, the processing for changing the enlargement factor can be reduced.

<Feature G 'group> Symbol size 2 displayed with fisheye liquid crystal
A first display unit having a display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in a first display size; and the first display unit disposed adjacent to the display area of the first display unit. A second display unit having a display area configured by arranging a plurality of second pixels each having a second display size smaller than the second display unit, and the second display unit or the second display unit. And a display control unit capable of moving and displaying the same symbol data on the first display unit.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed which provides a novel rendering mode by arranging a plurality of display devices and providing different display modes to the player (for example, JP 2005-270417 A)). However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that a control burden that increases a load for display control increases. The gaming machine G′1 has been made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the control burden.

  According to the gaming machine G′1, the first display means is configured by a display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in the first display size. The second display means is constituted by a display area which is disposed in the vicinity of the display area of the first display means and arranged by arranging a plurality of second pixels of a second display size smaller than the first display size. ing. The same symbol data is moved and displayed by the display control means from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. Thereby, by displaying the same display data on different display means, it is possible to display symbols with different display sizes. Therefore, even when the display size of the symbol is changed and displayed, the load of the control process for changing the display data enlargement rate or the like can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G ′ 1, a gaming machine G ′ 2 characterized in that the first display size and the second display size are each configured at a predetermined enlargement factor.

  According to the gaming machine G'2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G'1, the first display size and the second display size are each configured at a predetermined enlargement factor, so the size of the displayed symbols Can be displayed differently at a predetermined enlargement ratio.

  In the gaming machine G'1 or G'2, symbol data displayed in common to the first display means and the second display means is image information to be scrolled and displayed. '3.

  According to the gaming machine G'3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G'1 or G'2, the symbol data displayed in common to the first display means and the second display means is an image scroll-displayed Since it is information, the symbols can be scroll-displayed across the first display means and the second display means, and there is an effect that a fresh effect can be provided to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines G′1 to G′3, the symbol data displayed by the display control unit is stored, the symbol data is acquired from the storage unit, and the acquired symbol data is stored. A display data setting unit configured to set an enlargement factor to be displayed on the display control unit; the display control unit is configured to select the first display unit from the first display unit or the first display unit from the second display unit; The game machine G'4 is characterized in that when it is moved to the means for display, the symbol data having the same magnification set by the display data setting means is moved and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine G'4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines G'1 to G'3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the symbol data displayed by the display control means is stored by the storage means. The display data setting unit sets an enlargement ratio for acquiring the symbol data from the storage unit and displaying the acquired symbol data on the display control unit. When the display control means moves the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means for display, the symbol data of the same magnification set by the display data setting means is displayed. It is moved and displayed by the control means. As a result, the display size of the symbols can be displayed differently between the first display means and the second display means without changing the enlargement ratio. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the load caused by the process of changing the display size of the symbols for display.

  In any one of the gaming machines G′1 to G′4, the first display means has a larger display area than the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine G′5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G′1 to G′4, the first display means has a larger display area than the second display means. There is an effect that it is possible to perform display effects with different impressions.

  One of the gaming machines G′1 to G′5 has lottery means for executing lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the display control means displays identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means. A game machine G'6 characterized by dynamically displaying a symbol.

  According to the gaming machine G'6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G'1 to G'5, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the lottery is executed by the lottery means. In the display control means, identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means is dynamically displayed by the display control means with a symbol. As a result, the lottery result can be discriminated by the design, and the player can be interested in the dynamic display of the design.

  In the gaming machine G'6, the symbol indicating the identification information is scroll-displayed and enlarged data set at a predetermined magnification on the second display means, and then the data is displayed on the first display means at the magnification rate The gaming machine G'7 is characterized in that after being moved and displayed with the set information, the first display means is scroll-displayed with data set at a predetermined enlargement ratio.

  According to the gaming machine G'7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G'6, the symbol indicating the identification information is scrolled and enlarged the data set at the predetermined magnification on the second display means. After the display is moved and displayed with the information set at the enlargement ratio on the first display means, the display control means scrolls the symbol indicating the identification information with the data set at the predetermined enlargement ratio on the first display means. Therefore, in the case of moving from the second display means to the first display means and displaying it by changing the enlargement factor, the process of changing the enlargement factor can be reduced and processed.

<Characteristic H group> Pre-pseudo-variation on sub-screen First display means having a specific first display area, second display means having a second display area different from the first display area, acquisition conditions Based on the establishment, it is determined that an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information, a display control unit that displays an effect based on the information on the first display unit or the second display unit, and that a predetermined condition is established. A condition determination unit, and when the condition determination unit determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display control unit displays an effect based on the information in the first display area or the first display area. A gaming machine H1 that is displayed by moving from one of the two display areas to the other display area.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one in which a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided and various effect images are displayed on the display device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-13528). . However, although the above-described gaming machine can display various effect images, since there is only one place where the effect image is displayed, an unexpected game using the effect image is provided. There was a problem that the player could get bored without being able to do it. The gaming machine H1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and by providing a surprising game using the effect image, it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the player. Intended to be provided.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the display control means displays an effect based on the information acquired by the acquiring means on the first display means having the first display area or the second display means having the second display area. Be done. Then, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determining means, the effect displayed in either the first display area or the second display area is moved to the other display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected game, and it is possible to alleviate the player's tiredness.

  In the gaming machine H1, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination means for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means when a determination condition is established, and Dynamic display control means for causing the first display means to perform dynamic display for a predetermined period of time as the effect based on the judgment result by the judgment means, and the storage means before the judgment by the judgment means is performed An advance dynamic display for causing the second display means to perform an advance dynamic display as the pre-judgment means performing pre-judgment based on the stored information and the effect based on the pre-judgment result by the pre-judgment means A gaming machine H2 characterized by comprising control means.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed along with the winning of the gaming ball to the winning opening, and a variable display according to the lottery result is performed, and the right of the lottery is reserved and stored, There is a gaming machine which performs an effect (so-called, pre-reading effect) for changing the display mode during the variable display based on the content of the lottery of the hold storage (for example, JP-A-2012-16499). However, in the gaming machine described above, one display means executes the variable display according to the lottery result and the display of the pre-read effect described above, and performs the pre-read effect corresponding to the specific hold storage Since the effect mainly based on the specific hold storage is forcibly performed, there is a problem that the player is not interested in the variable display for the other hold storage. The gaming machine H1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine which can prevent the player's interest from being lowered while performing an effect based on the holding memory. To aim.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the determination condition is satisfied, the determination unit executes determination based on the information stored in the storage unit, and causes the first display unit to perform dynamic display as an effect based on the determination result. Prior determination is performed by the prior determination means based on information stored in the storage means before execution of determination by the determination means, and dynamic display in advance on the second display means as an effect based on the prior determination result Let me do it. As a result, the dynamic display is displayed on the first display means, and the preliminary dynamic display is displayed on the second display means. Can watch the result of dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display from being lowered.

  In the gaming machine H2, the storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information up to a predetermined number, and is an information selection means for selecting arbitrary information from the plurality of pieces of information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the prior dynamic display control means performs a prior dynamic display corresponding to the information selected by the information selection means.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the storage means stores a plurality of information with a predetermined number as the upper limit, and arbitrary information is selected by the information selection means from the plurality of stored information. The pre-dynamic display control means causes the pre-dynamic display according to the information selected by the information selection means to be performed. As a result, a pre-dynamic display based on information desired by the player is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to relieve the player's boredom.

  In the gaming machine H3, the second display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of prior dynamic displays corresponding to the plurality of information stored in the storage means, and the information selection means A game machine H4 characterized by selecting any prior dynamic display from a plurality of prior dynamic displays displayed on the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H3, the plurality of advance dynamic displays corresponding to the plurality of information stored in the storage unit are displayed on the second display unit, and the plurality displayed Since any pre-dynamic display is selected from the previous dynamic display by the information selection means, there is an effect that the player can easily select a desired pre-dynamic display.

  The gaming machine H3 or H4 has a holding symbol display control means for displaying a holding symbol corresponding to the information before at least the judgment by the judgment means is performed among the information stored in the memory means. The information selection means selects an arbitrary retention symbol from the plurality of retention symbols displayed by the retention symbol display control means, and the prior dynamic display control means selects the information retention means by the information selection means. The game machine H5 is characterized in that it performs a pre-dynamic display corresponding to the reserved symbol.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the following effects are produced. That is, the reserved symbol display control means displays a reserved symbol corresponding to at least information before the determination by the determining means is performed among the information stored in the storage means. An arbitrary reserved symbol is selected from the displayed plurality of reserved symbols by the information selection means, and the prior dynamic display control means performs a pre-dynamic display corresponding to the selected reserved symbol. As a result, any pre-dynamic display can be selected while viewing the displayed reserved symbols. Accordingly, there is an effect that the player can easily select a desired advance dynamic display.

  A gaming machine H6 characterized by having identification means for identifiably displaying the holding symbol selected by the holding symbol selection means in the gaming machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H5, the holding symbol selected by the holding symbol selection means is identifiably displayed by the identification means, so the hold corresponding to the displayed prior dynamic display There is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp which symbol is.

  The gaming machine H5 or H6 is characterized in that it has a reserve symbol display mode variable means for changing the display mode of the reserve symbol to a predetermined display mode that suggests the display content of the prior dynamic display corresponding to the reserve symbol. A game machine H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H5 or H6, the predetermined display indicating the display contents of the prior dynamic display corresponding to the holding symbol by the holding symbol display manner changing means. Since the mode is changed, there is an effect that the player can easily select a desired prior dynamic display.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the game machine includes an information specifying unit that specifies the information used for the determination by the determination unit and the information used for the determination by the prior determination unit, The dynamic display control means satisfies a determination condition in which a determination is made by the determination means based on the one information for a prior dynamic display displayed based on the one information specified by the information specifying means. In such a case, the gaming machine H8 is characterized in that the advance variation display is stopped.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H7, the following effects are produced. That is, information used for determination by the determination unit and information used for determination by the prior determination unit are specified by the information specifying unit. A prior dynamic display displayed based on one piece of information specified by the information specifying unit is stopped when a determination condition is established that a determination unit performs a determination based on the one piece of information by the prior dynamic display control unit. Let Thereby, the preliminary dynamic display based on one information can be stopped at the timing when the dynamic display based on one information is started. Therefore, the prior dynamic display arbitrarily selected by the player can be displayed so as to switch to the dynamic display without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the prior dynamic display from being lowered.

  A gaming machine H9 characterized in that any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8 is provided with switching means for switching the display contents displayed on the first display means and the display contents displayed on the second display means. .

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, in order to switch the display content displayed on the first display means by the switching means and the display content displayed on the second display means There is an effect that the player can display the desired display contents on the desired display means, and the problem that the player can get into the game at an early stage can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine H9, when the prior dynamic display corresponding to the one information selected by the information selection means is displayed by the switching means on the first display means, the switching means When the dynamic display corresponding to the information is started, the dynamic display is switched to display the dynamic display on the first display means.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H9, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the advance dynamic display corresponding to one piece of information is displayed by the first display means by the switching means, the switching means performs the dynamic display corresponding to the one information by the first display means Switch to display. Thereby, when the prior dynamic display corresponding to the information arbitrarily selected by the player is displayed on the first display means, the dynamic display corresponding to the information is continuously displayed on the first display means. Therefore, it is possible to display so that the prior dynamic display can be switched to the dynamic display without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the prior dynamic display from being lowered.

  In any one of the gaming machines H8 to H10, the prior dynamic display includes at least a determination result mode display based on a determination result of the prior determination unit, and corresponds to one piece of information specified by the information specifying unit. The gaming machine H11 is characterized in that the determination result mode display displayed by the prior dynamic display is continuously displayed on the dynamic display corresponding to the one information.

  According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H8 to H10, the following effects are produced. That is, a determination result aspect display based on at least the determination result of the prior determination means is displayed as the prior dynamic display, and the determination result aspect displayed in the prior dynamic display corresponding to the one information identified by the information identification means The display is continuously displayed also on the dynamic display corresponding to one piece of information. Thereby, since the determination result mode display is displayed across the prior dynamic display and the dynamic display, it is possible to perform an effect of continuing the prior dynamic display and the dynamic display without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the advance dynamic display from being lowered.

<Characteristic group I> Synchronous effect Based on the display unit capable of displaying an effect mode, an information input unit capable of inputting predetermined information, and the predetermined information input by the information input unit, a specific effect mode is selected. An effect period setting means for setting a period that can be displayed on the display means, and a specific effect that executes the specific effect mode based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established within the period set by the effect period setting means. A game machine I1 having a mode execution means.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that executes a synchronized effect at a predetermined time (for example, JP-A-2007-252534). However, since the above-mentioned gaming machine performs control to execute synchronous rendering with time, the timing to perform synchronous rendering becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player is bored. The gaming machine I1 has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can alleviate the player's tiredness.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the effect mode is displayed on the display means. Based on the predetermined information input by the information input means, the effect period setting means sets a period in which the specific effect mode can be displayed on the display means. A specific effect is executed by the specific effect mode executing means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period. Thereby, the period which can display a specific production | presentation aspect can be set based on the input predetermined information. Therefore, it is possible to change the setting of the period in which the specific effect mode can be displayed, and to alleviate the boredom of the player. In addition, by inputting the same information as predetermined information to the gaming machines arranged in parallel, it is possible to experience dynamic display at a desired timing, and it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the player. .

  The gaming machine I1 includes clocking means capable of clocking and time information acquiring means for acquiring time information from the clocking means, and the effect period setting means is acquired by the time information acquiring means. A game machine I2 characterized by setting a period in which a specific effect mode can be displayed on the display means based on time information and information input to the information input means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the time information obtained by the timekeeping means is obtained by the time information obtaining means, and based on the time information and the information inputted to the information input means, a period in which a specific effect can be displayed on the display means is set. . Thereby, the period which can display a specific production | presentation aspect can be set based on two information of time information and the information input by the information input means. Therefore, various periods can be set by combining information, and the player's tiredness can be alleviated.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, after the specific effect mode execution timing setting means for setting the timing for executing the specific effect mode within the period set by the effect period setting means, and after the predetermined condition is satisfied A specific production mode execution standby unit for waiting for execution of the specific production mode for a period until the execution of the specific production mode set by the execution timing setting unit. A game machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or the gaming machine I2, the following effects are produced. That is, within the period set by the effect period setting means, the specific effect mode execution timing setting means sets the timing for executing the specific effect mode. After the predetermined condition is established, the specific effect mode execution standby means waits for a specific effect mode to be performed during a period from when the specific effect mode set by the execution timing setting means is executed. Thereby, there exists an effect that the execution timing of a specific production | presentation aspect can be unified.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, among the effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes, and the plurality of effect modes stored in the effect mode storage means, a specification for setting the specific effect mode A gaming machine I4 having a production mode setting means.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are achieved. A plurality of effect modes are stored in the effect mode storage means, and a specific effect mode is set from the effect modes by the specific effect mode setting means. Thereby, since the specific production | presentation aspect which can be displayed within the period set by the production | presentation period setting means is set from several production | generation aspects, it becomes unnecessary to prepare the data for specific production | generation aspects. Thus, the amount of data can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine I4, the specific effect mode setting means sets the specific effect mode based on the time information acquired from the time measuring means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I4, the specific effect mode is easily changed because the specific effect mode is set based on the time information acquired by the specific effect mode setting means from the clock means. It has the effect of being able to

  The gaming machine I4 includes operation means that can be operated by a player, and operation determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated in a predetermined manner. The specific effect mode setting means is the operation determination The gaming machine I6 is characterized in that the specific effect mode is set based on a predetermined operation determined by the means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I4, the predetermined operation is performed by the operating means operable by the player, and the specific effect mode is set based on the predetermined operation determined by the operation determining means Therefore, the effect mode desired by the player can be set to a specific effect mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, a special effect which restricts the effect mode set as the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode setting means, except for the period set by the effect period setting means A game machine I7 characterized by having mode execution restriction means.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the effect mode set as the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode setting means by the specific effect mode execution restricting means Since it is restricted so that it is not executed during a period other than the period set in, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a special feeling of production while eliminating the need to prepare data for a specific production mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7, effect information output means for outputting effect information including at least specific effect mode information based on the specific effect mode displayed on the display means, and output by the effect information output means Production information input means capable of inputting information corresponding to the production information, and specific production mode setting means for setting the specific production mode based on the information input by the production information input means. A featured gaming machine I8.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the following effects are exerted. That is, the production information output unit outputs production information including at least specific production mode information based on the specific production mode displayed on the display unit. Information corresponding to the effect information is input by the effect information input means. The specific effect mode setting means sets a specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means. As a result, since it is possible to set a specific effect mode to be displayed on another pachinko machine, it is possible to freely synchronize the effect mode. Therefore, the player's willingness to play a game can be increased, and there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored with the gaming machine at an early stage can be reduced.

  It should be noted that the effect information output by the gaming machine I 8 may include information on the time during which a specific effect is displayed. By doing in this way, there exists an effect that the time when a specific production | presentation aspect is displayed can be synchronized no matter what timing the specific production | presentation aspect setting means performs.

  In the gaming machine I8, the effect information output means displays the effect information on the display means in a manner that can be acquired by an external device.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I8, the presentation information output means displays the presentation information in a mode (for example, a two-dimensional information code) that can be acquired by an external device (for example, a portable terminal). There is an effect that the setting operation of the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode setting means can be facilitated.

  Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, A gaming machine K1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of G1 to G7, G′1 to G′7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, A gaming machine K2, wherein in any one of G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, A gaming machine K3 characterized in that in any one of G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. . Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine in which a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided and various effect images are displayed on the display device has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-13528).
In this type of pachinko machine, it is possible to display various effect images, but since there is only one place where the effect image is displayed, an unexpected game using the effect image is provided. There is a problem that the player can get bored.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of alleviating the boredom of a player by providing a surprising game using a presentation image.
<Means>
To achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a first display means having a specific first display area and a second display means having a second display area different from the first display area. And an acquisition unit that can acquire information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, a display control unit that displays an effect based on the information on the first display unit or the second display unit, and a predetermined condition is satisfied Condition determination means for determining that the display control means is configured to produce an effect based on the information when the condition determination means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied. The display area is moved from one display area or the second display area to the other display area and displayed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the information stored by the acquisition unit is stored, and when the determination condition is satisfied, the storage unit stores the information stored in the storage unit. A determination means for performing a determination based on information, a dynamic display control means for causing the first display means to perform a dynamic display for a predetermined time as the effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and the determination means Before the execution of the determination by the pre-determination means for executing the pre-determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the production based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means, the second Pre-dynamic display control means for causing the display means to perform pre-dynamic display.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine of technical idea 2, wherein the storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information up to a predetermined number, and the plurality of information stored in the storage means Information selection means for selecting any information from the information in the above, and the advance dynamic display control means is to perform advance dynamic display corresponding to the information selected by the information selection means .
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, wherein the second display means can display a plurality of pre-dynamic displays corresponding to a plurality of information stored in the storage means. It is comprised, The said information selection means selects arbitrary prior dynamic display from the several prior dynamic display displayed on said 2nd display means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 corresponds to the information in the gaming machine of technical idea 3 or 4 before the execution of determination by at least the determination unit among the information stored in the storage unit. Holding symbol display control means for displaying a holding symbol, and the information selecting means selects any holding symbol from the plurality of holding symbols displayed by the holding symbol display control means, The pre-dynamic display control means performs pre-dynamic display corresponding to the reserved symbol selected by the information selection means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the information acquired by the acquisition unit is added to the first display unit having the first display area or the second display unit having the second display area by the display control unit. The production based on it is displayed. Then, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determining means, the effect displayed in either the first display area or the second display area is moved to the other display area. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to provide a surprising game, and it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the player.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the determination condition is satisfied, the determination means executes the determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and causes the first display means to perform dynamic display as an effect based on the determination result. Prior determination is performed by the prior determination means based on information stored in the storage means before execution of determination by the determination means, and dynamic display in advance on the second display means as an effect based on the prior determination result To do.
Thus, by displaying the dynamic display on the first display means and the advance dynamic display on the second display means, each motion can be expected while expecting the lottery contents stored on hold by the advance dynamic display. The result of the target display can be watched. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display from being lowered.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, the storage means stores a plurality of information with a predetermined number as the upper limit, and arbitrary information is selected by the information selection means from the plurality of stored information. The pre-dynamic display control means causes the pre-dynamic display according to the information selected by the information selection means to be performed.
As a result, a pre-dynamic display based on information desired by the player is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's tiredness can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the second display means displays a plurality of prior dynamic displays corresponding to a plurality of information stored in the storage means. Since an arbitrary pre-dynamic display is selected by the information selection means from the displayed plurality of pre-dynamic displays, the player can easily select a desired pre-dynamic display.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 or 4, the following effect is exerted. That is, the holding symbol display control means displays a holding symbol corresponding to the information before the execution of the determination by the determination means at least among the information stored in the storage means. An arbitrary reserved symbol is selected from the displayed plurality of reserved symbols by the information selection means, and the prior dynamic display control means performs a pre-dynamic display corresponding to the selected reserved symbol.
As a result, any pre-dynamic display can be selected while viewing the displayed reserved symbols. Therefore, there is an effect that it becomes easy for the player to select a desired prior dynamic display.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (first display means)
203a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area (storage means)
203b special symbol 2 holding ball storage area (storage means)
670 Spherical liquid crystal device (second display means)
S314 discrimination means
S406, S411 acquisition means S412 pre-Determination means
S1313 fluctuation display setting processing (first effect execution means)
S510 4 part of some S5103 information selection means of the second demonstration execution means
S5107 Part of the second effect execution means

Claims (2)

First display means having a first display area;
Based on the establishment of the resulting conditions preparative an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information,
Storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means;
Discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine, comprising: a first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect on the first display means as an effect for indicating the determination result by the determination means;
A second display means having a second display area different from the first display area;
Pre-determination means for executing determination based on the information before the determination is performed by the determination means stored in the storage means;
Second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect on the second display means as an effect for indicating the result of prior judgment by the prior judgment means;
Information selection means for selecting arbitrary information from the plurality of pieces of information stored in the storage means ,
The second display means is configured to be able to display the second effect corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of information stored in the storage means,
The gaming machine moves the first effect displayed on the first display means to the second display means based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been established, and displays the first effect on the second display means. A gaming machine comprising means capable of moving and displaying the second effect corresponding to the information selected by the information selection means being moved to the first display means . The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display .

Images